Home

NOtE - Accusys

1. Event ID Ox3C02 Type SNAPSHOT Severity INFO Parameters VVOL ID Message VVOLx created Description Snapshot volume vvox was created Advice None Event ID Ox3C03 Type SNAPSHOT Severity INFO Parameters VVOL ID Message VVOLx deleted Description Snapshot volume vvox was deleted Advice None Event ID Ox3C04 Secondary Type SNAPSHOT Severity ERROR Parameters Calorie Message Secondary volume x is out of free space All soace of the secondary volume was occupied Some or all Description snapshot volumes on this secondary volume would become faulty Delete all faulty snapshot volumes and expand the secondary Advice volume to a reasonable large capacity to prevent data loss caused in the future Event ID Ox3C05 Primary Vol ume Sec Type SNAPSHOT Severity INFO Parameters onday Volume Message Snapshot volume pair x y imported Description Snapshot volume pair x y was imported Advice None Event ID 0x3C07 Secondary Type SNAPSHOT Severity WARNING Parameters Volume Message Secondary volume x is y full bis The percentage of used space on secondary volume exceeds Description the pre defined threhold level D 69 unang Advice Consider to expand secondary volume to prevent data loss Event ID Ox3C08 c Spare COW Type SNAPSHOT S
2. Event ID 0x0819 3 Controller Type DISK Severity NOTICE Parameters ID Disk ID Message Controller x detected aborted task on HDDy The controller x aborted the command that hddy failed to respond to controller in time This could be a transient error due Description to unstable channel heavy traffic or malfunctioning hard disks The controller will retry the command to complete the lO how ever this could result in performance drop of the disk Advice If this event occurs often check the disk connectivity check power supply to disks or replace with a new disk Event ID Ox081a l Controller Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters ID Disk ID Message Controller x resets on HDDy The controller x resets hddy that failed to respond to controller in time and forced the disk back to its initial state This could be a Description transient error due to unstable channel heavy traffic or malfunc tioning hard disks The controller will resume normal access to the disk after resetting the disk however this could result in perfor mance drop of the disk If the disk cannot resume normal opera Advice If this event occurs often check the disk connectivity check power supply to disks or replace with a new disk Event ID Ox081e DISK ID Type DISK Severity NOTICE Parameters PCode sense key ASC ASCQ Macsade Check condition on HDDv SCSI opcode w Sense Key x ASC y ge
3. 4 7 1 Mirrored write cache control Command cachemirror Synopsis cachemirror on off Description Show or change the setting of mirrored write cache control Parameters on off enable or disable mirrored write cache 4 7 2 Change preferred controller Command prefctlchg Synopsis prefecichg o jodx dgxldy volx ctlx Description Change the preferred controller of a virtual disk Parameters o change owner controller immediately 4 7 3 Path failover alert delay Command foalertdelay Synopsis foalertdelay xxmin Set the delay period before the controller generates a Description warning event to notify users of the critical condition that virtual disks transferred to the non preferred controller 4 8 4 8 1 Event Management NVRAM event logs Command eventlist Synopsis eventlist f xx n xx s severity Description List records in the event log from older to newer records f xx starting point of event to list Parameters n xx maximum number of records to list s severity severity level of records to list Command eventget Synopsis eventget log txt log csv Description Download all event records to a file log txt or log csv 4 31 Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands Command eventconfig Synopsis enentcontig s severity Description oe the lowest severity level of
4. Event ID Ox206e Migrate progress Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DGID LDID Notify threshold Message LD migrate progress w on DGxLDy reach to the notify per cent z Description as progress of LD migration has reached the pre define thresh Advice None e Logical disk capacity expansion Event ID 0x2037 Type TASK INFO DG ID LD ID Message Expansion on DGxLDy started Description Logical disk capacity expansion on dgxldy was started manually Advice None Event ID Ox202e Type TASK NOTICE DG ID LD ID Message Expansion on DGxLDy started by schedule Description Scheduled logical disk capacity expansion on dgxlidy was started Advice None Event ID 0x2045 Type TASK Severity WARNING Parameters DG ID LD ID Message Expansion on DGxLDy failed to start by schedule Description oor logical disk capacity expansion on dgxldy failed to Advice Check if the logical disk or the disk group is busy or non optimal when starting the task unang Event ID 0x2031 Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID LD ID Message Expansion on DGxLDy paused Description Logical disk capacity expansion on dgxldy was paused Advice Check if a member disk in the disk group failed during the task Event ID 0x2032 Type TASK
5. Event ID Ox205c Reg Prog ress Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Notify threshold Message Reg progress y on DGx reach to the notify percent z Description The progress of Reg parity on dgx has reached the pre define threshold Advice None e Logic disk parity regeneration D 23 Event ID Ox203c Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters DG ID LD_ID Message Reg parity on DGxLDy started Description Reg parity on dgxldy was started manually Advice None Event ID Ox203e Type TASK Severity WARNING Parameters DG ID LD_ID Message Reg parity on DGxLDy aborted Description Reg parity on dgxldy was aborted Advice Check if the logic disk is busy or non optimal Event ID Ox203f Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters DG ID LD_ID Message Reg parity on DGxLDy stopped Description Reg parity on dgxldy was stopped manually Advice None Event ID Ox203d Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID LD_ID Message Reg parity on DGxLDy completed Description Reg parity on dgxldy was completed Advice None unang Event ID Ox206d Reg Prog ress Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID LD_ID Notify threshold Message Reg progress w on DGxLDy reach to the notify percent z Description The progress of Reg parity on dgxidy
6. Es EOD f DGOLDO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i DG1LDO 1 gt p Figure 5 12 Controller failover scenario Normally the heartbeat LED on each controller board is flashing periodically and the system keeps syncing state messages shown on the GUI to identify the controller is alive When a heartbeat LED does not flash anymore or the state message cannot be synced the controller will be regarded as failed NOTE When the heartbeat LED of both controllers are flashing users are allowed to hot remove any one controller Controller Failback If a system is in the controller failover mode the survival controller will take over the failed controller s job and process its own job When a healthy replacement controller is installed the system will proceed the failback process The survival controller will return the failed controller s job and sync all states and configuration to the failback controller When the redundant mode is established the heartbeat LED of the failback controller flashes Never remove or power down through the 5 36 Aulvanced Functions Functions GUI the survival controller before the failback controller heartbeat LED starts flashing NOTE 1 Only the tasks belong to the preferred controller will be returned to the failback controller If you have changed the preferred controller for tasks to the survival controller the survival controller then takes the ownership of those
7. Users can also use the simple provisioning method to establish the connections The steps are given below Configuration Tasks Using Simple Provisioning method Tasks Instructions Create Virtual volumes and RAID Management gt Disk Groups gt specify the preferred Create DGO and DG controller RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DGOLDO gt Specify the preferred controller as ctla RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DG1LDO gt Specify the preferred controller as ctlb Select Storage Provisioning RAID Management gt Storage method Provisioning gt Simple Specify the LUN ID and map fcpa2 gt DGOLDO LUNs fo fiber ports fcpa2 gt DGILDO fcpb2 gt DGOLDO fcpb2 gt DG LDO 5 26 Aulvanced Functions Functions e Active Active Redundant Single MPIO Host Quad Channel As Figure 5 7 shows the redundant RAID system is operating in a single MPIO host environment using the symmetric storage method The access channel is established via four fibre ports fcpal fcpa2 fcpb1 and fcpb2 The redundant paths of all LUNs are also established by mapping them across four fibre ports Host Group 0 o lt Host Controller A Controller B 4 M DGOLDO DG1LDO E Figure 5 7 Redundant Single MPIO host quad channel In this configuration for DGOLDO the green path is the active path while the red path is th
8. Message Reset host i f chip x in controller y The controller resets chip x that failed to execute commands properly This could be to recover from a transient error due to unstable channel or heavy traffic The controller will resume nor mal operations of the chip after reset however this could result in performance drop of the LUNs exported to the host ports of this chip Description If this event occurs often check the host connectivity or contact Advice local sales or support office Event ID 0x300a Chip ID Type HOST Severity FATAL Parameters Controleri Message Host i f chip x in controller y failed The controller cannot execute commands properly on chip x after all appropriate recovery procedures were conducted This could be resulted from unstable power supply to the system All LUNs controlled by the chip will be unavailable to hosts Description Check power supply replace with a new controller or contact Advice local sales or support office Event ID Ox300b Host Chan nel ID Con troller ID Error Code Type HOST Severity ERROR Parameters Message Host channel x in controller y PCI Error z Description The controller has detected error in the host channel Check if the power supply is stable Contact local sales or sup Advice port office D 40 Appendix SAS e Hosts Event ID O
9. Table 2 9 Performance profile values NOTE When the disks are in the degraded mode with the AV streaming profile selected the disk IO retry count and timeout values may be changed to reduce unnecessary waiting for I O completion Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI 2 5 2 RAID setup To perform quick setup all hard disks must be on line and unused Users can specify the RAID level number of spare disks and initiation method for an easy RAID configuration See the following for details of each option HDD This shows the number and the minimum size of Information hard disks RAID Level RAID 0 RAID 3 RAID 5 RAID 6 RAID 10 RAID 30 RAID 50 RAID 60 Spare Disks Select the required number of global spare disks Initialization Background The controller starts a background Option task to initialize the logical disk by synchronizing the data stored on the member disks of the logical disk This option is only available for logical disks with parity based and mirroring based RAID levels The logical disk can be accessed immediately after it is created Noinit No initialization process and the logical disk can be accessed immediately after it is created There is no fault tolerance capability even for parity based RAID levels Single controller RAID configuration A volume for raid30 raid50 or raid 0 or a logical disk for other RAID levels will be created with all capacity of all disks in
10. command commands allowed to be scheduled include dgexpand dgdefrag Idmigrate Idexpand hddclone diskcrub regparity and hdddst Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands Command scheduledelete Synopsis scheduledelete schedule_id Description Delete a schedule with the schedule ID Command schedulelist Synopsis schedulelist command all Description List one or all types of scheduled commanas 4 3 5 On going task monitoring Command tasklist Synopsis tasklist command all Description List one or all types of background tasks Command tasknotify Synopsis tasknotify on off o percentage Description eee the event notification of the background Parameters l p percentage completion percentage to notify 4 3 6 Array and volume roaming Command autoroam Synopsis autoroam on off Description ee a eal array roaming when the Command onlineroam Synopsis onlineroam on off Description Enable or disable on line array roaming Command hddimport Synopsis hddimport f t jodx dgx all nddx hday hddz Description Import all or specified foreign conflict hard disks f force to import an incomplete disk group with degraded Parameters logical disks t jodx dgx target disk to restore Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands 4 3
11. Logs out the user Logout r Opens the Help file Help iy Displays the GUI version firmware R version and boot code version About Table 2 1 Buttons in monitor and config mode System name controller name firmware version and boot code version information are also displayed at the bottom left of the page 2 2 1 HDD state Through the front panel of the RAID console displayed in the GUI you can easily identify the status of each hard disk by its color and status code Click on each hard disk to display detailed information Figure 2 8 HDD Tray GUI NOTE The RAID system can support up to 24 HDD trays The number of HDD trays displayed in the GUI monitor mode may differ depending on the RAID system model The status code and color of hard disks are explained in the following tables Code Hard Disk Status U Unused disk JO J15 JBOD Table 2 2 Hard disk code 2 6 Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI Code Hard Disk Status DO D7 Disk group DO Dv The redundant controller system supports up to 32 DGs which are encoding from DO to Dv LO L7 Local spare G Global spare T Clone Table 2 2 Hard disk code Color Hard Disk Status Color Hard Disk Status Online p Green Adding flashing green Purple i tci Faulty Permanently removed Red Silver m Conflict m Removed Orange Gray gep Foreign py Emp
12. B 6 Appendix algorithms that can intelligently self monitor and self adjust the performance parameters e Adaptive read ahead pre read pre fetch optimization Read ahead operation improves the performance of sequential reads by pre fetching data from disk drives according to current hosts read commands The firmware can further identify multiple sequential read streams in random access and perform pre read for the streams The administrator can also specify the pre read depth for dynamical tuning e Configurable write caching policies Write cache can improve the response time and concurrency level of hosts write commands With the write cache the controller can merge consecutive write commands to single write command and lower the disk drive s utilization by avoiding over write commands On the other hand to ensure the best data reliability the write policy can be set as write through to make sure all data is written to the disk media e Performance monitoring The controller keeps extensive IO statistics for performance monitoring The statistics include physical components like host ports and disk drives as well as logical objects like LUN cache and logical disks The complete picture of the storage performance profile is presented and performance tuning can be conducted more effectively e Intelligent IO processing Intelligent IO processing algorithms are efficiently executed to optimize the command execu
13. Task Notify On Off default Select this option to enable or disable the event notification when the background task is completed to a specified percentage The range is from 1 to 99 2 8 Hardware Configurations 2 8 1 Hard disks In this section you can configure the following settings to all hard disks Utilities Task Priority Low default Medium High This option determines the priority of the background tasks for utilities of all hard disks not belonging to any disk group such as scrubbing and cloning SMART Warning On Off default This option is only for SMART function supported hard disks The SMART function serves as a device status monitor Period of SMART Polling minute 60 default Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI This option is only available when the SMART warning Is turned on Specify the period in minutes to poll the SMART status from hard disks periodically SMART Action Alert default Clone This option is only available when the SMART warning Is turned on The controller will alert you or start disk cloning when a disk reports a SMART warning Disk IO timeout after 30 default sec s and retry 1 default time s Timeout value in unit of seconds If a hard disk does not respond to a command within this time the controller will reset and reinitialize the hard disk and retry the command The possible values are 1 to 60 Retry times Specify the num
14. Description Add hosts to a host group Command hgremovehost Synopsis hgremovehost hgx hostx hosty Description Remove hosts from a host group Command hgname Synopsis hgname hgx name Description Name a host group Command hglist Synopsis hglist hgx all Description List one or all host groups Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands 4 4 3 Storage groups Command sgaddlun sgaddlun sgx fcpx sasx scpx jody dgyldz voly vvoly Synopsis l I lunz s 512b 1kb 2kb 4kb g cylinder head sector w wt wb Description Add a LUN in a storage group or a default storage group l lunz LUN to be used by the virtual disk s 512b 1kb 2kb 4kb set sector size Parameters g cylinder head sector set the cylinder nead sector mapping of the LUN w wt wb write completion write through or write behind Command sgremovelun Synopsis sgremovelun sgx fcpx sasx scpx luny all Description Remove one or all LUNs in a storage group or a default storage group Command sgremovedisk Synopsis sgremovedisk sgx fcpx sasx scpx all jody dgyldz voly vvoly Description Remove LUNs of a virtual disk from one storage groups a default storage group or all storage groups Command sgmasklun Synopsis sgmasklun sgx fcpx sasx luny all Description Mask one or all LUNs in a storage group or a default storage group Command sgunmasklun Synopsis sgunma
15. 14 Copy the data from the snapshot volume to other places optionally 15 Delete the snapshot volumes optionally to avoid running out of space on the secondary volumes The tasks in the phase 1 and 2 are done only once when you set up a RAID system or when you create a new LUN They could also be parts of your RAID system reconfigurations The tasks in phase 3 are very likely to be repeated periodically when a snapshot is needed Planning for the Secondary Volumes When planning your storage resources you have to reserve sufficient free capacity for the secondary volumes In addition to the space reserved for the RAID controller to build lookup tables the capacity reserved for the secondary volumes depends on how much data could be modified on the primary and snapshot volumes during the life time of the snapshot volumes If you keep the snapshot volumes longer it is more likely that more data will be modified A commonly used capacity of a secondary volume is 20 of the source volume However not all write commands would consume space of the secondary volume For single block on the primary and snapshot volume the copy operation and space allocation on the secondary volume is performed only at the very first time when a write command hits the block As a result if write commands tend to hit the same blocks you may consider using a smaller secondary volume Another consideration in estimate reserved capacity is that because the
16. LCD console is offered for quick configuration and for display of simplified information and alerting messages It is mostly for initializing network setting to bring up the web based GUI or for knowing the chassis status Using the LCD console for configuration is only advised when you know clearly the preset configurations e CLI Commands chapter 4 Command line interface can be accessed by RS 232 port TELNET or SSH You can also use host based CLI software to manage RAID systems by in band FC SAS SCSI or out of band Ethernet interfaces It helps you to complete configurations in a fast way since you can type in text commands with parameters quickly without the need to do browse and click You may also use CLI scripts for repeating configurations when deploying many systems e RAIDGuard Central chapter 5 RAIDGuard Central is a software suite that helps you to manage multiple RAID systems installed in multiple networks It locates these systems by broadcasting and will be constantly monitoring them It receives events 1 10 introduction 1 6 from the systems and stores all the events to single database It also provides event notification by MSN messages Microsoft VDS chapter 5 VDS is a standard of RAID management interface for Windows systems The RAID system can be accessed by VDS compliant software after you install the corresponding VDS provider to your systems This helps you to manage RAID systems fr
17. NOTE A snapshot volume would crash when any of its primary volume secondary volume or spare COW volume crashes A primary volume would crash if either secondary volume or spare COW volume crashes while it is in the restoring state In the cases above please delete the volume pair Restoring Data with a Snapshot To restore data of a primary volume from a selected snapshot volume please follow the steps below 1 Unmount the LUN of the primary volume at the host computers 2 Remove the LUN mappings of the primary volume 3 Remove the LUN mappings of the snapshot volume optional 4 Issue the snapshot restore command from GUI or CLI 5 Restore the LUN mappings for the primary volume Aulvanced Functions Functions 6 Mount the LUN of the primary volume at the host computers NOTE 1 1 Restoring data with a snapshot volume destroys the data on the primary volume 2 If selecting a snapshot volume with LUN accessed by host computer flush the system cache before unmouting the LUN of the snapshot volume e Deleting Snapshots It is advised to delete any snapshot volume once you do not need it Deleting a snapshot volume frees the space it occupies in the secondary volume and if there is no snapshot the performance of the primary volume will be back to normal You can do it freely as long as no host is accessing it and deleting one snapshot does not interfere with the other snapshots of the same source vol
18. When the Beeper Control is set to On see 2 9 5 Miscellaneous on page 2 66 the system will turn on the beeper alarm if one of the following occurs If the user mutes the beeper via CLI LCD or GUI the system temporarily mutes the beeper until a new failure or error occurs e Voltage failure or error Troubleshooting e Power supply failure or error e Fan failure or error s Temperature failure or error s BBM failure or error when BBM is connected e Disk SMART warning e Disk bad block over threshold warning e Disk group with degraded logical disk and no disk for rebuilding e Disk group with faulty logical disks e UPS failure or error when UPS control is on see 2 9 4 UPS on page 2 66 e Controller failure or removed s Dual controllers fail to boot up because of configuration conflict e Controller failback cannot proceed 6 3 Performance Tuning Performance tuning is always not an easy job because it requires in depth knowledge of hardware and software This section offers a few guidelines for you to identify performance problem sources and to do improvements However the system performance depends on not only the RAID system but also the capability of all software and hardware components along the I O path Please contact your solution providers to choose field proven configurations 1 Understand the I O workload pattern Understand your workload before configuring the RAID for your hard disks Most applicatio
19. c ctx Description Create a volume s stripesize stripe size o sector alignment offset Parameters n name the name of a volume c ctlx for redundant controller only the preferred controller of a volume Command voldelete Synopsis voldelete volx f Description Delete a volume Parameters f force to delete LUN mapping Command volname Synopsis volname volx name Description Name a volume Command vollist Synopsis vollist volx all Description List the status of one or all volumes 4 11 Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands 4 2 8 Cache Command readahead Synopsis readahead volx dgxldy jbdx all policy m multiplier I read_log sas Enable or disable read ahead policy of a volume a logical Description aisk a JBOD disk or alll virtual disks policy always adaptive or off Parameters m multiplier set read ahead multiplier l I read_log set number of read logs Command writecache Synopsis writecache volx dgxldy jbdx all on off s on off as Enable or disable write cache of a volume a logical disk a Description JBOD disk or all buffers Parameters s on off enable or disable the write sorting Command cachepflush Synopsis cachepflush periodsec Description Review or set the current cache flush period Parameters periodsec the cache flush period Command cacheunit Synop
20. e Disk group defragmentation Event ID 0x2010 Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters DG ID Message Defragment on DGx started Description Disk group defragment on dgx was started manually Advice None Event ID 0x2033 Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Message Defragment on DGx started by schedule Description Scheduled disk group defragment on dgx was started Advice None Event ID 0x2047 Type TASK Severity WARNING Parameters DG ID Message Defragment on DGx failed to start by schedule Description Scheduled disk group defragment on dgx failed to start Kdvice eee if the disk group is busy or non optimal when starting the Event ID 0x2013 Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Message Defragment on DGx paused Description Disk group defragment on dgx was paused Advice Check if there is failed member disk in the disk group during the task unang Event ID 0x2014 Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Message Defragment on DGx resumed Description Disk group defragment on dgx was resumed Advice None Event ID Ox201 1 Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Message _ Defragment on DGx completed Description Disk group defragment on dgx was completed Advice None Event I
21. 2 9 1 Added modify event receivers 2 9 2 Added modify SNMP servers 2 9 3 Added descriptions for the event log file 2 10 1 Modified the hard disk states for the Erase configurations on HDD s option 2 10 2 Updated the Figure 2 18 2 19 2 20 and 2 21 and modified the related descriptions 2 10 5 Added SSL setting 2 10 7 Modified battery information 2 10 9 Added descriptions for the reg ular system shutdown proce dure 2 10 10 Added Miscellaneous Move the GUI refresh rate option to this section xix Coments Version Description Release Date 1 1 2 11 Modified the descriptions 2007 02 26 related to the Reset button 2 11 4 Added a note to explain the displayed information in the list 3 2 3 Added UPS off emergent info 3 2 5 Added hotkeys Chapter 4 Updated CLI commands Appendix C Updated event log messages 1 2 1 3 Modified descriptions related 2007 07 15 to the logical disk expansion and logical disk shrink 2 2 2 Modified descriptions related to the information icons 2 2 3 Modified the descriptions related to the rear side of the RAID system and picture include added SAS controller picture added component of Table 2 5 2 6 1 Added descriptions related to the disk identify option of Mod ify 2 6 6 Modified descriptions related to the WWN setting added a SAS Address setting for sym metric and selective method 2 9 4 Added support smart UPS info
22. Event ID 0x2816 Type ENCLOSURE Severity WARNING Parameters Controller ID Message Abnormal temperature of BBM in controller x Description The current temperature of BBM in controller x was out of normal range Advice Check the system fans and the air conditioning UPS Event ID 0x2817 Type ENCLOSURE Severity INFO Parameters Message UPS connection detected Description UPS detected by the controller Advice None Event ID 0x2818 Type ENCLOSURE Severity WARNING Parameters Message UPS connection loss Description The controller cannot detect UPS Advice Make sure that the proper communication cable is securely con nected to the UPS D 56 Appendix D 57 Event ID 0x2819 Type ENCLOSURE Severity WARNING Parameters Message UPS AC power failure Description The AC line voltage has failed Advice hous sure it is not unplugged from its power source if utility Dower Event ID Ox281a Type ENCLOSURE Severity INFO Parameters Message UPS AC power back on line Description The AC line voltage back to normal Advice None Event ID 0x28 1b Type ENCLOSURE Severity WARNING Parameters Message ___ UPS low battery Description UPS battery charge below normal range Advice None Event ID 0x281c Type ENCLOSURE Severity INFO Parameters
23. O N gt T S Q Q lt User s Manual ExaRAID GUI USER S GUIDE Powe HN cto Accusys ai Accusys RAID GUI User s Manual ExaRAID GUI Version 1 6 BaRAID Appendix Notice Product features and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without notice The manufacturer shall not be liable for any damage or loss of information resulting from the performance or use of the information contained herein Trademarks Accusys and the names of Accusys products and logos referenced herein are either trademarks and or service marks or registered trademarks and or service marks of Accusys Inc Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows 2003 MS DOS are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks and or service marks of their respective owners All contents of this manual are copyrighted by Accusys Inc The information contained herein is the exclusive property of Accusys Inc and shall not be copied transferred photocopied translated on paper film electronic media or computer readable form or otherwise reproduced in any way without the explicit written permission of Accusys Inc Manual version 1 6 Copyright 2008 Accusys Inc All rights reserved Preface About this manual Congratulations on
24. Upload a configuration file and store it as the controller s main configurations Figure 2 27 Options in the Configurations screen 2 System Management menu NOTE This option will be available when on line hard disks exist Therefore only on line hard disks will be displayed in the list box Get main configurations Specify this option to save the NVRAM configuration data to a file The following three options are available bin for user to backup configuration The configuration data is saved as config bin html human readable The configuration data is saved as config html html to send human readable mail The configuration data is saved as config html which is then sent to a specified mail receiver When this option is selected enter a mail address for the receiver Warning The controller will restart immediately when a user restores user configurations Save the NVRAM configurations to HDD s Read the NVRAM configurations from HDDs and save to the NVRAM Get main configurations bin for user to backup configuration lt Upload a configuration file and store it as the controller s main configurations Figure 2 28 Options in the Configurations screen 3 System Management menu 2 69 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI Upload a file and store it as the controller s main configurations S 2 10 pecify this option to upload a configuration file and store it on NVRAM Warning The contr
25. s lt script_file gt the file name that contains CLI scripts to be executed c lt commana gt the CLI command to be executed If the lt device gt is not specified the CLI utility will send the command to the first management LUN detected in dev sgxx Examples 4 Scan all dev sgxx to discover and display all management LUNs cli inband linux Vx xx 2 Enter the interactive mode to for the RAID system at dev sg3 cli inband linux Vx xx d dev sg3 3 List the status of all hard disks of the RAID system cli inband linux Vx xx u admin p 0000 c hddilist all 4 Run a CLI script file on the RAID system cli inband linux Vx xx u admin p 0000 s scripet txt NOTE The following four parameters lt controller_ip gt lt device gt lt username gt and lt password gt are optional They are not required if you ve set the corresponding environment variables before running the CLI utility Below are the syntax to do so set CLI_CTL_IP lt controller_ip gt set CLI_USERNAME lt username gt set CLI_PASSWORD lt password gt set CLI_DEVICE lt device gt Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands NOTE For both in band and out band CLI on Linux if there is no c or s option specified the CLI utility will automatically enter the interactive mode 4 1 4 Conventions Overview Object names 7 objects are named using the following keywords with an identifier x s Hard disk hddx e JBOD disk jodx
26. A Fan module e BP_FANI e BP_FAN2 s BP_FAN3 s BP_FAN4 Table 2 5 Components at the rear side of the system Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI s POW e POW2 s POW3 B Power supply C Ethernet port e IP Address s Network Mask e Gateway s DNS Server s MAC Address s FCP ID s WWN e Connection Mode s Date Rate e Hard Loop ID D Fiber ports E SAS ports e SAS ID s SAS Address F SCSI ports e SCSI ID s Data Rate s Default SCSI ID Table 2 5 Components at the rear side of the system 2 2 4 Login Login yl Figure 2 12 Login The RAID GUI provides two sets of default login members Username user admin Password 0000 0000 Table 2 6 Login usernames and passwords When logging in to the GUI as user you can only view the settings To modify the settings use admin to log in e Forgotten password In the event that you forget your password click the Forget password icon and an email containing your password can be sent to a preset mail account To enable this function make sure the Password Reminding Mail 2 11 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI option is set to On see 2 10 5 Security control on page 2 72 and the mail server has been configured in System Management gt Network NOTE You can use the FW customization tool to set a new password as the default 2 3 SAS JBOD Enclosure Display for S
27. ASCQ z Description This presents the SCSI status number when error happens such as p CRC error and it will have some field Sense Key ASC ASCQ c If this event occurs often check the disk connectivity check Advice power supply to disks or replace with a new disk D 26 Appendix D 27 Event ID 0x0813 Controller Type DISK Severity NOTICE Parameters ID DISK ID Error Code Message Controller x detected gross error on HDDy with code z The controller x makes gross error on hddy with parameter code z This could be transient error due to unstable channel elec Description tronic interference heavy traffic casually misbehaved hard disks or old FW The controller will invalidate the data and retry the command If this event occurs often check the disk connectivity check Advice power supply to disks replace with a new disk or contact local sales or support office Disk port and chip Event ID 0x081b E Disk port ID Type DISK Severity ERROR Parameters Gonvolerip Message _ Reset disk port x in controller y The controller y resets disk port x that failed to execute com mands properly This could be a transient error due to unstable Description channel heavy traffic or malfunctioning hard disks The control ler will resume normal operations after reset however this could result in performance drop of th
28. Force to delete LUN mapping s box All access to the logical disk will be stopped e Modify logical disks To modify a setting select an LD and click Modify Specify the following options for configuration Name Type a name for the DG ID LD ID Preferred This option is only available when the redundant Controller controller system is in use Select the preferred controller to be in charge of managing and accessing the logical disk However the controller ownership will not change unless you check the Change owner controller immediately box Write Cache This option enables or disables the write cache of a logical disk Write Sorting This option enables or disables the sorting in the write cache To improve writing performance it is recommended to turn this option on for random access This option is available only if the write cache Is on Read Ahead Always The controller performs pre fetching data Policy for every read command from hosts Adaptive The controller performs pre fetching only for host read commands that are detected as sequential reads The detection is done by read logs Off If there is no sequential read command read ahead will result in overhead and you can disable the read ahead 2 29 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI Read Ahead This option specifies the read ahead multiplier for Multiplier the Always and Adaptive read ahead policies Select how much additio
29. Message UPS battery back to normal Description UPS battery charge back to normal range Advice None Event ID Ox281d Type ENCLOSURE Severity WARNING Parameters Message __ UPS battery will fail Description The UPS has a battery that will fail Advice Replace the UPS battery as soon as possible unang Event ID Ox281e Type ENCLOSURE Severity INFO Parameters Message UPS battery replace back to non failure status Description The UPS is replaced and back to non failure status Advice None Event ID 0x28 1f Type ENCLOSURE Severity WARNING Parameters Message UPS overload Description The UPS overload 1 If overload occurs immediately after connecting new equip ment to the UPS the UPS cannot support the new load You must connect one or more devices to a second UPS or replace the current UPS with a model that can support a larger load 2 If the overload was not caused by adding new load equip ment run a UPS self test to see if the problem clears If the test Advice fails an overload still exists close all open applications at the UPS load equipment and reboot the UPS If the problem persists disconnect all equipment from the UPS and reboot the UPS If the overload still exists the UPS needs to be repaired or replaced Contact the UPS vendor support for assistance If the problem is cleared re
30. Please refer to s Setting FC Worldwide Node Name on page 2 60 to select identical WWNN After restarting the RAID system to make this change effective then follow 5 1 3 Configuring MPIO Hosts and RAID Controller on page 5 2 to complete the LUN mapping configurations The Mac OS multipath I O driver by default supports only round robin I O policy With Apple Xsan software you may set the policy to be either round robin rotate or static failover only For more information please visit Apple web site and read Apple Xsan Administrator s Guide 5 1 7 VMware ESX Server Multi Path Solution VMware ESX Server 2 5 or the later by default is loaded with hardware independent multi path drivers and management interface After completing the RAID system configurations and attaching the RAID system to the host computer you may use VMware Management Interface or the command vmkmultipath or esxcfg mpth at Service Console to manage the paths There are three multi path policy options supported 1 fixed Using user predefined path 2 mru using Most recently used path 3 rr using round robin algorithm which is available only after ESX Server 3 The first two polices are use only one active path and move to a standby path only when the active path is down The third policy can use all paths at the same time to deliver the best performance You may use esxcfg advcfg to set path performance parameters The single controller RAID sy
31. The severity level of this event is notice Advice None Event ID 0x0404 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message Event test with severity info Users have generated a simulated event to test the event han Description dling notification mechanisms The severity level of this event is info Advice None Event ID Ox2406 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message All event logs erased Description All event logs were erased After that this is the first event recorded Advice None Event ID 0x2413 Type SYSTEM Severity NOTICE Parameters Message Auto write through activated The pre defined triggering events for auto write through Description occurred and the controller has set the buffer cache as write through Advice Check the event logs and remove the causes of events that trig ger auto write through unang Event ID 0x2414 Type SYSTEM Severity NOTICE Parameters Message Auto write through de activated Description The pre defined triggering events for auto write through have p gone and the controller restored the original cache setting Advice None Event ID 0x2418 Type SYSTEM Severity NOTICE Parameters Message Auto shutdown activated Description The pre defined triggering events for auto shutdown occurred and the controller was going to shutdown itself Check the event logs and remo
32. Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters DG ID Message Write zero init on DGx started Description Disk group zeroing task on dgx was started Advice None Event ID 0x204d Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters DG ID LD ID Message Logical disk init on DGxLDy started Description Logical disk initialization task on dgxldy was started Advice None Event ID 0x204e Type RAID Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Message Write zero init on DGx completed Description Disk group zeroing task on dgx was completed Advice None Event ID 0x204f Type RAID Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID LD ID Message Logical disk init on DGxLDy completed Description Logical disk initialization task on dgx was completed Advice None Event ID 0x2050 Type RAID Severity WARNING Parameters DG ID Message _ Write zero init on DGx aborted Description Disk group zeroing task on dgx was aborted Mavic Check if any disks in the disk group failed and then re create the disk group unang Event ID 0x2051 Type RAID Severity WARNING Parameters DG ID LD ID Message Logical disk init on DGxLDy aborted Description Logical disk initialization task on dgxldy was aborted Check if any disks in the disk group failed and then re create the Advice logical disk Event ID 0x2064 Zeroing progress Type RAID Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Notify threshold
33. and a confirmation prompt displays Click Confirm to continue The controller will immediately start the update task in the background NOTE Contact your RAID system supplier before updating the firmware DO NOT udpate the firmware unless you fully understand what a version of firmware will do One of the general rules is not to update the firmware using an older version Otherwise the system might not work properly When updating the firmware boot code and external enclosure firmware do not perform any actions in GUI or power off the controller For external enclosure firmware option you can check the Apply to all external enclosure option to apply the updating to all external enclosure at the same times After updating the firmware for external enclosures it requires to restart both the controllers for the RAID system and all external enclosures The RAID controller supports redundant flash chip for system firmware Primary chips will be updated first and the secondary chips later Wait for the completion of firmware update of both chips The redundant controller RAID system supports uninterruptable firmware update but it depends on the compatibility of your running and new firmware contact your system supplier to know the compatibility After updating the firmware to the flash chip one both controllers one controller will be restarted first and the other controller will be restarted later During the
34. gt Logical Disks gt Create DGOLD1 gt Specify the preferred controller as ctlb RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DG1LDO gt Specify the preferred controller as ctla RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DGILD1 gt Specify the preferred controller as ctlb Select Storage Provisioning RAID Management gt Storage method Provisioning gt Selective Add WWPN of HBAs to hosts HBAO WWPN gt Host O HBA WWPN gt Host 1 HBAO WWPN gt Host 2 HBA1 WWPN gt Host 3 Add hosts to each host group Host O and Host 1 gt Host Group O Host 2 and Host 3 gt Host Group 1 Assign LUNs to storage groups DGOLDO and DGOLD1 gt Storage Group 0 DG1LDO and DGILD1 gt Storage Group 1 Bind host groups and storage Storage Group 0 bound to Host groups to the fibre ports Group 0 gt fcpa2 and fcpb2 Storage Group 1 bound to Host Group 1 gt fcpal and fcpb 1 5 30 Aulvanced Functions Functions e Active Active Redundant Dual MPIO Clustering Hosts With Fibre SAS switch As Figure 5 9 shows the redundant RAID system is operating in a clustering environment with dual MPIO hosts and two FC SAS switches Users should be notified that the number of FC SAS switches hosts and controller must be the same when working in a clustering environment e Host Group 0 FC SAS Switch itera PEELE 4343 FC SAS Panes HEE AENEA HEHE
35. like grouping the disk drives into disk groups Tradeoff analysis is required when choosing RAID levels like Using RAID O for good performance but losing reliability or using RAID 6 for high reliability but incurring performance penalty and capacity overhead The appendix provides information about the algorithms of each RAID level and the corresponding applications You can also use the embedded volume management functions to build LUNs of higher performance and larger capacity The RAID system offers much flexibility in configurations like independently configurable RAID attributes for each logical disk such that capacity overhead can be minimized while performance and reliability can still be guaranteed You might need to pay attentions to a few options when doing the tasks above like initialization modes cache settings alignment offset rebuilding mode and etc Please read the GUI chapter to know their 1 12 introduction meanings and choose the most appropriate settings because they are directly or indirectly related to how well the RAID system can perform see 2 6 RAID Management on page 2 21 and 2 7 16 Miscellaneous on page 2 55 NOTE When planning your storage resources reserving space for snapshot operations is needed Please check chapter 5 for information about the snapshot functions Installing and launching bundled software optionally The RAID system is equipped with host side software providing
36. lt device gt is not specified the CLI utility will send the command to the first management LUN detected Examples 1 Scan all HBA and LUNs to discover and display all management LUNs scli inband win32 Vx xx 2 List the status of all hard disks of the RAID system scli inband win32 Vx xx u admin p 0000 c hddlist all NOTE If a management LUN is presented you will see a SES device labeled as an unknown device in Windows Device Manager Windows might prompt you to install the device driver for it Please ignore it s In band CLI for Linux The in band command on Linux can be sent only through the SCSI generic SG devices dev sgxx to access the management LUN So it is required to turn on the management LUN before using in band CLI 4 4 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands 4 5 on Linux You will need also to get root access right to use the in band CLI Use the modeprobe v sg command fo start SCSI generic service if you cannot find any SG devices Installation To install in band CLI tool on Linux copy the cli inband linux Vx xx file to the directory where you want to run the program and you may start using the CLI utility Usage cli inband linux Vx xx d lt device gt u lt username gt p lt password gt s lt script_file gt c lt command gt Parameters d lt device gt the LUN that the in band CLI command to be sent uU lt username gt p lt password gt user name and password
37. s ID name Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI default SCSI ID and data rate To change the settings follow the instructions given below NOTE In redundant controller systems the four FC ports are given identifiers fcpai fcpa2 fcpb1 and fcpb2 to identify the corresponding port positions located on each controller 1 Select an FC SAS SCSI port and click Modify to open the configurations window 2 Specify the following options Controller For FC port with redundant controller only Failover Mode Multipath IO This mode allows the host computer to access the RAID system over multiple paths To use this mode Pathguard needs to be installed See 5 1 Multi Path IO Solutions for more information Multiple ID This function requires the use of fiber switch When you select this function only simple method is available for storage provisioning See 5 2 Multiple ID solutions for more information Name Type a name associated with each FC SAS SCSI port The maximum name length is 15 bytes For SAS ports please jump to step 4 after setting name Hard Loop ID Select a fixed loop ID for each FC port from the drop down menu To disable hard loop ID select Auto The loop ID is automatically determined during loop initialization procedure Connection Auto The controller will determine the connection Mode mode automatically Arbitration loop This is a link that connects all the storages with the host whic
38. so reconfiguration like adding removing paths or LUNs requires you to reinstall the PathGuard MPIO driver and reboot the host computer You might need also to manually rescan the physical drives use Computer Management gt Storage gt Disk Management When multi path disks are not properly detected 5 7 Advanced Functions Functions 5 8 Install and Uninstall PathGuard To install the PathGuard double click the installation file on a host computer choose the 32 bit or 64 bit installation file according to your host system And follow the on screen instructions to start the installation After the installation you can install MPIO driver or use PathGuard GUI Click the Start gt Programs gt PathGuard gt readme read the online help page To uninstall the PathGuard click Start gt Programs gt PathGuard gt Uninstall PathGuard Register RAID system to MPIO Driver optional The MPIO driver is only applied to the RAID systems that have vendor names and model names in the PathGuard device database PathGuard is delivered with predefined database but if the MPIO driver cannot recognize your RAID systems you may need to contact your supplier to get the updated PathGuard software or simply add the name of your RAID systems to the PathGuard database A software utility can be found to do so at Start gt Programs gt PathGuard gt Driver gt Update New Model After entering the vendor name and model name press t
39. switch To poeman EE J FCPa2 FCPa1 FCPb2 FCPb 1 I X CE Eg SNS N l Controller A Controller B Figure 5 9 Dual clustering MPIO hosts In this configuration for DGOLDO the two green solid path is the active path by controller A while the two red dotted path is the standby path by controller B for DG1LDO the condition is reversed Before proceeding with the following configuration tasks ensure the FC SAS switches are used to establish the connections between the hosts and the redundant RAID system Then perform the GUI configuration tasks as described in the following Configuration Tasks table 5 31 Advanced Functions Functions Configuration Tasks Tasks Instructions Create Virtual volumes and RAID Management gt Disk Groups gt specify the preferred Create DGO and DG1 controller RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DGOLDO gt Specify the preferred controller as ctla RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DG1LDO gt Specify the preferred controller as ctlb Select Storage Provisioning RAID Management gt Storage method Provisioning gt Symmetric Add WWPN of HBAs to hosts HBAO WWPN gt Host O HBA WWPN gt Host 1 HBAO WWPN gt Host 2 HBA WWPN gt Host 3 Add hosts to each host group Host 0 Host 1 Host2 and Host 3 gt Host Group 0 Map LUNs to host groups DGOLDO gt Host Group
40. the bootcode is stored on the bootrom the controller cannot work c Check if the power supply is stable Replace with a new control Advice ler Contact local sales or support office Event ID 0x2423 Bad block Type CONTROLLER Severity INFO Parameters number Controller ID Message Bad block x on primary system flash added in controller y Description Bad blocks happened and remapped successfully on the pri mary system flash in controller y Advice Check if there are any hardware hazards that lead to abnormal flash corruption Watch the secondary flash chip Event ID Ox2424 Bad block Type CONTROLLER Severity INFO Parameters number Controller ID Message Bad block x on secondary system flash added in controller y Description Bad blocks happened and remapped successfully on the sec ondary system flash in controller y Advice Check if there are any hardware hazards that lead to bad blocks Watch the secondary flash chip Event ID Ox2425 Type CONTROLLER Severity WARNING Parameters Controller ID Message Bad block on primary system flash over 70 in controller y bg The amount of bad blocks is over 70 of the table that is used to Description remap bad blocks Advice Check if there are any hardware hazards that lead to bad blocks This flash chip is close to fail unang Event ID Ox2426 Type CONTROLLER Severity WARNIN
41. the most essential troubleshooting is to check the event log of your RAID system and carry out the suggested actions offered in the Appendix D In addition you may need to check the system log of the operating system at your host computers Because there are a wide variety of hardware and software combinations use the following checklist for problem determination e Check all cables to make sure they are connected properly e Check all hardware units are powered on and working properly e Check any recent changes in hardware software or configurations e Verify that the latest version of firmware and software are used e Verify that the latest version of BIOS and device driver of HBA are used e Verify that the operating systems HBAs switches transceivers and hard disks are in the compatibility list e Check how to reproduce the problems Before you call support please collect the related information above to assist the support staff in identifying the problems It is also required to acquire the following three log files 1 RAID system user level event log in human readable form sv or txt 2 RAID system diagnostic level event log bin 3 the log file at operating system NOTE The bin log file is stored on hard disks so please keep your hard disks in the system when downloading the log file For redundant controller systems you re required to download the bin log file for each controller 6 2 Beeper
42. 0 DG1LDO gt Host Group 0 5 32 Aulvanced Functions Functions e Active Passive Redundant Single MPIO Host Dual Channel In the active passive mode one controller is active to process all I O requests while the other is idle in standby mode ready to take over I O activity should the active primary controller is failed As Figure 5 10 shows the controller A serves as an active role and the controller B as a standby role Two LUNs are both mapped to two fiber ports fcpa2 and fcpb2 For all LUNs the green path is the active path to the controller A and the red path is the standby path to the controller B Host Group 0 2 Host N N Controller A Controller B ag ae DIG ae DG1LDO BG Figure 5 10 Active Passive Redundant Single MPIO host The steps to set up the active passive and active active connections are almost the same You simply need to specify all the LUNs to the same preferred controller in the RAID GUI 5 33 Advanced Functions Functions The Configuration Tasks table shown below details each configuration task according to the example given in Figure 5 10 Configuration Tasks Tasks Instructions Create Virtual volumes and RAID Management gt Disk Groups gt specify the preferred Create DGO and DG1 controller RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DGOLDO gt Specify the preferred controller as ctla RAID Manageme
43. 2 10 8 Modified descriptions related to the external enclosure F W 2 10 10 Add memory testing when boot up option in Miscella neous 2 11 Removed screen 2 22 2 22 2 23 2 24 3 2 1 Modified disk status 3 2 5 Added a ESC button function of Hotkeys 4 1 Added descriptions for SSH info Appendix D Added PathGuard MPIO Utility Appendix E Added DiskPart Utility XX ee paras Version Description Release Date 1 3 e Modified Company Address 2007 10 29 2 2 3 Modified the descriptions related to the rear side of the RAID system and picture include added SCSI controller picture added component of Table 2 5 2 6 6 Added a SCSI ID setting for sim ple method 2 8 2 Added a Default SCSI ID setting for SCSI ports and provider set ting data rate of SCSI on SCSI ports Appendix F Added RAIDGuard Central Appendix G Added VDS Provider 1 4 Chapter 1 2008 02 25 Updated contents 2 1 1 Added language setting in Firefox 2 2 1 Updated the hard disk tray color 2 2 3 Added the rear side of redun dant controller system 2 3 Added the rear view and descriptions of the SAS JBOD chassis and its identifiers 2 5 Added notes for the redun dant controller system and the different parameters in the degraded mode 2 6 2 Added preferred controller option and VVOL button for JBOD disks 2 6 4 Added preferred controller option and VVOL button for logical disks 2 6 5 Added preferred
44. 7 Command hddimportlist Synopsis hddimportlist all hddx hddy hddz Se E Command volimport Synopsis volimport f t volx dgxldy dgildj Description import a volume from logical disks specified parameter Te eens Command volimportlist Synopsis volimportlist all dgx doy Description List volume configurations on all or specified logical disks Array recovery utilities Command dgrecover Synopsis dgrecover dgx hddx hdady f member_id Description Recover a faulty disk group Parameters f member_id force to recover disk Command ldrecover Synopsis ldrecover dgxldy partition_id Description Recover a faulty logical disk Command volrecover Synopsis volrecover volx dgildj dgxlady Description Recover a faulty volume 4 4 4 4 1 Storage Presentation Hosts Command hostcreate Synopsis hostcreate hostx WWN n name Description Create a host with WWN Parameters n name host name Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands Command hostdelete Synopsis hostdelete hostx hosty Description Delete hosts Command hostname Synopsis hostname hostx name Description Name a host Command hostlist Synopsis hostlist all hostx Description List all hosts or one host 4 4 2 Host groups Command hgaddhost Synopsis hgaddhost hgx hostx hosty
45. AC562410 Multi Path Disk Device amp AC5S82410 SCSI Disk Device se 4C582410 SCSI Disk Device E TY amp ST3800134 Y 2 Display adapters H E Human Interface Devices Y 3 IDE ATA ATAPI controllers T 76 Keyboards D Mice and other pointing devices 22 Monitors 89 Network adapters 23 Other devices Ai Ethernet Controller E A Ports COM amp LPT Logic Fibre Channel Adapter amp QLogic Fibre Channel Adapter ce Sound video and game controllers E System devices T Universal Serial Bus controllers ep 0 T T Figure 5 3 Computer Management screen Device Manager e Use the PathGuard GUI for managing MPIO disks You can launch the PathGuard GUI by clicking Start gt Programs gt PathGuard gt PathGuard GUI As PathGuard GUI allows you to manage multiple hosts running PathGuard MPIO drivers either the local one or remote ones you need to connect and login to a host before monitoring or managing its MPIO Please follow the steps below 1 Click the Connect button 2 Choose Localhost or Remote from the Connect Host drop down menu 3 If Localhost is selected you can click the Login button if you are currently using an administrator level user account to access the local computer 4 If is Remote selected you need to enter the name or the IP address of the remote host in the Host Name box You need to also enter the name of an administrator level user account in t
46. CLI utilities for in band interface are offered for Windows and Linux The in band CLI can work only when there is at least one LUN presented to the host computer running the in band CLI When there is no LUN available a management LUN needs to be set up to transfer the in band commands The CLI command sgmgmtdevice on off allows you to enable or disable the management LUN which is presented to hosts as a SES SCSI Enclosure Service device occupying the LUN 127 Contact your HBA vendor if you cannot find the management LUN on your system 4 3 Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands s In band CLI for Windows Installation To install in band CLI tool on Windows copy the scli inband win32 Vx xx exe and isdk inband Vx xx lib files to the directory where you want to run the program and you may start using the CLI utility Usage scli inband win32 Vx xx d lt device gt u lt username gt p lt password gt C command Parameters d lt device gt the LUN that the in band CLI command to be sent t lt controller_ip gt the IP address of the RAID controller to be accessed u lt username gt p lt password gt user name and password c command the CLI command to be executed There are three options to name the LUN on Windows for d lt device gt 1 Drive letter like D 2 Physical drive number like PhysicalDrive2 or PhysicalDrive5 3 Adapter path target and LUN like scsi2 0 0 127 or scsi3 1 O 127 If the
47. Command passwd Synopsis passwd user admin old_password new_password Description Set or change the password for an account Parameters old_password enter the old password new_password enter the new password Command passwdchk Synopsis passwdchk user admin on off Review or set password checking for an account Description Show or change the setting of password check for an account Parameters on off enable or disable the password check Command paswdmail Synopsis passwdmail s account send off When enabled the email account to which the password Description reminder should be sent to is displayed When disabled off is displayed Only one of the three options can be specified at a time s account enable and set the mail account Parameters send send the mail off disable the function Command logout Synopsis logout quit bye exit Description Log out the current user and return to the user name prompt 4 36 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands Command autologout Synopsis autologout xmin off Description Review or set the logout timer xmin time out value Parameters off turn off the auto logout function Command forward Synopsis forward on off Description Show or change the setting of forwarding control Parameters on off enable or disable the forwarding 4 9 4 System information Comm
48. DISK ID Message Clone from HDDx to HDDy auto resumed Description Disk cloning from hddx to hddy was auto resumed Advice None Event ID 0x206f Clone prog ress DISK ID Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DISK ID Notify threshold Message Clone progress w from HDDx to HDDy reach to the notify per cent z Description ha progress of disk cloning has reached the pre define thresh Advice None Appendix Disk scrubbing of hard disks Event ID 0x201c Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters DISK ID Message Scrub on HDDx started Description Disk scrubbing on hddx was started manually Advice None Event ID 0x2035 Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DISK ID Message Scrub on HDDx started by schedule Description Scheduled disk scrubbing on hddx was started Advice None Event ID Ox204a Type TASK Severity WARNING Parameters DISK ID Message _ Scrub on HDDx failed to start by schedule Description Scheduled disk scrubbing on hddx failed to start Advice Check if the disk is off line or busy Event ID 0x2020 DISK ID Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters sector NGA Message Scrub on HDDx stopped with y bad sectors detected so ye Disk scrubbing on hddx was stopped manually and y bad sec Description tors were detected If the number of bad sectors grows e
49. Debug Type SYSTEM Severity ERROR Parameters Code Message System error x Description Unknown system error and its event ID is x Advice Contact local sales or support office Event ID 0x2430 Message Fatal system fault x Description Unknown fatal system fault and its event ID is x Advice Contact local sales or support office D 66 Appendix D 8 Network Network Event ID 0x3400 Type NETWORK Severity INFO Parameters Ethernet ID Message Link up on network interface ethx Description The network link on network interface ethx had been built suc cessfully Advice None Event ID 0x3401 Type NETWORK Severity NOTICE Parameters Ethernet ID Message Link down on network interface ethx The network link on network interface of ethx had been turned Description down This happens when the network configuration is incorrect or cable were removed or during abnormal network activity If the network link unexpectedly disconnects or it happens Advice repeatedly check the network configuration and hardware If it is still unable to work contact local sales or support office Event ID 0x3402 Type NETWORK Severity WARNING Parameters Ethernet ID Message MAC address conflicted on network interface ethx Description The MAC address of network adapter ethx
50. Default Shutdown Sys Model Name System Info gt ESV eee Boot Code F W Version RAM BP ID IP Address Figure 3 2 Menu tree 3 3 2 Creating an Array In the Quick Setup menu users can create disk arrays quickly and easily Configure the following items to create the array See the options as below RAID Level Level 0 default Level 3 Level 5 Level 6 Level 10 Level 30 Level 50 Level 60 Spare Disk Default 1 2 3 4 Init Method Background Foreground default No Init Use the UP and DOWN buttons To scroll through the options Press the ENT button to select To cancel the selection and return to the previous level press the ESC button 3 6 Using the LCD Console the LCD Consolel 3 3 3 Network Settings In Ethernet Setup menu users can view the network status and configure the server settings Use the UP and DOWN buttons to scroll through the following items and press the ENT button to select Select CTL ID For redundant controller system only Selects the controller you want to configure Status Displays the connection status Set DHCP ENABLE default DISABLE If DHCP is disabled the system will require you to enter an IP address net mask gateway and DNS These settings are configured in the sequence as shown MAC Address Display MAC address Users can enter the IP related settings according to the following IP format IP format XXX XXX XXX X
51. Description memory module Check if the memory module is installed properly and make sure the memory module is in the compatibility list Replace the mem ory module and if the error continuously happens contact local sales or support office Advice e Flash chip Event ID 0x2421 Type CONTROLLER Severity ERROR Parameters Controller ID Message Primary system flash in controller x is corrupt The primary system flash chip on controller x is corrupt and can Description not be used But the secondary flash still works Check if there are any hardware hazards that lead to abnormal Advice flash corruption Watch the secondary flash chip Event ID Ox2422 Type CONTROLLER Severity ERROR Parameters Controller ID Message Secondary system flash in controller x is corrupt The secondary system flash chip on controller x is corrupt and Description cannot be used But the primary flash still works Check if there are any hardware hazards that lead to abnormal Advice flash corruption Watch the secondary flash chip D 48 Appendix D 49 Event ID 0x242b Type CONTROLLER Severity ERROR Parameters Controller ID Message Bootrom in controller x is corrupt Bootrom on controller x is corrupt and cannot be used Because Description
52. Description exceeded the pre defined threshold level The severity of this p event depends on the threshold being exceed Over threshold 1 2 3 leads to notice events If the number of BBR table entries or spare blocks being reallo Advice cated grows exceptionally fast or beyond a reasonable number consider to conduct diagnostics and replace with new disks Event ID 0x140a Threshold Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters value Disk ID Message BBR exceeds warning threshold x on HDDy The number of bad block reallocation table entries on hddy has Description exceeded the pre defined threshold level The severity of this p event depends on the threshold being exceed Over threshold 4 leads to warning events If the number of BBR table entries or spare blocks being reallo Advice cated grows exceptionally fast or beyond a reasonable number consider to conduct diagnostics and replace with new disks Event ID 0x140d Type DISK Severity NOTICE Parameters Disk ID Message BBR exceeds clone threshold on HDDx Description The number of bad block reallocation table entries on hddx has p exceeded the pre defined threshold level to trigger disk cloning If the number of BBR table entries or spare blocks being reallo Advice cated grows exceptionally fast or beyond a reasonable number consider to conduct diagnostics and replace with new disks Event ID UX 1 407 Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message Out of BBR table entries o
53. Detailed snapshot volume information Click amp to display a complete list of snapshot volume information You will see the following details e VOL ID e Allocated Space on SV MB e UUID 2 6 7 Storage provisioning The RAID GUI provides three storage provision methods simple symmetric and selective Whenever you change the method the following confirmation message is displayed Switch Storage Provision Method Changing the storage presentation method is allowed only when all LUN mappings are cleared Do you want to continue Figure 2 19 Method switching message e Simple method Simple storage is used in direct attached storage DAS environments where there is no FC switch between the RAID and the hosts Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI As the illustration shows any SE computer is allowed to access the LUNs presented by the controller after gaining access to the host ports of the controller LUN1 FCP1 Port1 HOST LUNs are assigned to each virtual disk in RAID so the host can address 7 U R LUNO LUN1 and access the data in those Ezeo o p Cao osm U 8 9 l 1 l 1 devices Figure 2 20 Simple storage Add LUNs in a storage port In the simple storage main screen click Add to add a LUN to the default storage group of an FC port SAS port SCSI port fepx sasy scpz with a vir tual disk HTP ID Each FC SAS SCSI port has a unique ID which is determined
54. Event log download message Click Close to close the window NOTE The event log file stores details of controller activity In the case of malfunction this data can be analysed by the user to determine the cause s Record Event Log Click Configure and specify the Lowest severity of events option for the events you want to record on NVRAM The events with severity levels higher than the specified one will be recorded The default severity level is info which means events of all severity levels will be recorded Send a Test Mail Click Configure and specify the Severity of testing event option to send a test mail A testing event record will be generated according to the selected severity level This helps users to test the event logging and notifications setup NOTE Before sending out the test mail you need to turn on the event notification and specify the event receivers Refer to 2 9 1 Setting up the SMTP on page 2 61 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI 2 9 4 UPS The UPS Control option enables or disables the UPS function when the controller is started When this option is set to On the controller will automatically detect if the UPS is connected or not To configure the UPS settings do the following 1 Select Event management gt UPS from the main menu you can view the UPS information status and battery status here 2 Click Configure and specify the following options Change Date This option
55. FC port or all FC ports Parameters sect eo arbitration loop fabric or automatically Command fcprate Synopsis fcprate fcpx all 1gb 2gb 4gb auto Description Set the prefered data rate of an FC port or all FC ports Command fcpwwnn Synopsis fcpwwnn identical distinct Set the World Wide Node Name of FC port to be identical or Description distinct Without option this command shows the current setting Command fcpisthost Synopsis fcplisthost fcpx all Description List the detected hosts of an FC port or all FC ports Command fcplistusrconf Synopsis fcplistusrconf fcpx all Description List the user s configurations of an FC port or all FC ports Command fcplistusrconf Synopsis fcplistcurconf fcpx all Description List the current configurations of an FC port or all FC ports 4 5 5 Management network interface Command ethsetaddr Synopsis ethsetaddr ethx method a ip_addr s net_mask g gw_addr d dns_addr z on off Description Set IP address of an Ethernet port method static or dhcp a network address Parameters s network mask g gateway address d DNS server address z Automatic Private IP Addressing APIPA 4 26 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands Command ethlistaddr Synopsis ethlistaddr ethx Description List IP and MAC address of an Ethernet port Command smtpconfig smtpconfig set primary secondary serv
56. Factory NO default YES Restore the factory settings to NVRAM Shutdown NO default YES Power off the system Use the UP and DOWN buttons to scroll through the items and options Press the ENT button to select To cancel the selection and return to the previous level press the ESC button 3 3 6 System Information The System Info menu provides the following information Use the UP and DOWN buttons to scroll through each of them Users are allowed to modify the model name of the system and controller Sys Model Name Display and modify system model name Controller Model Display and modify controller model name Boot Code Display boot code version F W Version Display firmware version RAM Display system memory size BP ID Display backplane ID number IP Address Display controller IP address Line 1 shows the controller A information and Line 2 shows the controller B information 3 8 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands Chapter 4 Using the CLI Commands 4 1 Overview The Command Line Interface CLI is a set of commands which allows users to configure or monitor the RAID system by entering lines of text through a variety of the terminal consoles Both controller based embedded CLI and host side software based CLI are supported The Figure 4 1 depicts how the CLI can be accessed Host System Host System Hyper TELNET Out band ff In band Terminal j SSH CLI CLI RS232 Ether
57. HDDx Description The NVRAM configurations were restored from hddx Advice None Apendi Event ID 0x2417 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message NVRAM configurations restored from file The configurations were restored from a file uploaded to the Description controller Advice None Event ID Ox2409 Type SYSTEM Severity FATAL Parameters Message NVRAM configuration checksum error The checksum stored on NVRAM do not match the contents on NVRAM This could happen if the controller was not properly shut down Because NVRAM configurations might be corrupt and cannot be trusted all event logs are automatically erased Description Restore the configurations from hard disks or by uploading the Advice backed up configuration file If this event happens continuously contact local sales or support office Event ID 0x2431 Type SYSTEM Severity FATAL Parameters Message NYRAM mapping table checksum error The checksum stored on NVRAM do not match the contents on NVRAM This could happen if the controller was not properly shut Description down System will restore the default mapping table automati cally Advice Start to monitor more carefully the status of the NVRAM e Security control Event ID 0x240d Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message Admin login Descript
58. NOTICE DG ID LD ID Message Expansion on DGxLDy resumed Description Logical disk capacity expansion on dgxldy was resumed Advice None Event ID 0x2030 Type TASK Severity WARNING Parameters DG ID LD ID Message Expansion on DGxLDy aborted Description Logical disk capacity expansion on dgxldy was aborted Advice Check if the disk group is faulty during the task TBD Event ID Ox202f Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID LD ID Message Expansion on DGxLDy completed Description Logical disk capacity expansion on dgxldy is complete Hosts might need to rescan the LUN of the logical disk to get the Advice updated capacity The partitions or file systems on the logical disk has to be grown to access the newly created space Event ID 0x2060 Expand progress Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Notify threshold Message LD expand progress y on DGx reach to the notify percent z Description O progress of LD expanding has reached the pre define thresh Advice None Appendix e Logical disk shrink Event ID Ox200e Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID LD ID Message DGxLDy shrinked Description DGxLDy shrinked Make sure partitions or file systems on the logical disk have been Advice shrunk before conducting the logical disk capacity shrink After finishing hosts might need to rescan the LUN of the logical disk to get the updated capacity
59. Refer to sgaddlun for all parameters Command hgremovelun Synopsis hgremovelun hgx luny all Description Remove one or all LUNs from a host group Command hgremovedisk Synopsis hgremovedisk hgx all jody dgyldz voly vvoly Description Remove all LUNs of a virtual disk from one or all host groups 4 21 Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands Command hglistlun Synopsis hglistlun hgx all Description List LUN information in one or all host groups 4 5 Hardware Configurations and Utilities 4 5 1 Generic hard disk Command hddst Synopsis hddast short extended all nddx hddy hdaz Description Perform short or extended disk self test DST Command hdddststop Synopsis hdddststop all nddx hddy hddz Description Stop DST immediately Command hddadstlist Synopsis hdddstlist all hddx hddy hddz Description List disk self test information and status Command hddsmart Synopsis hddsmart on p period a clone alert hddsmart off Description Change the SMART warning settings of all hard disks on off SMART control Parameters l p period period of SMART polling a clone alert SMART actions Command hddsmartiist Synopsis hddsmartlist all nddx hddy hdaz Description List SMART information and current status of the specified or all hard disks Command hddsmartread Synopsis hddsmartread hddx Description Di
60. Relationship of volumes e Restoring by Snapshots Users can online restore a primary volume to one of its snapshot volumes After the restore the contents of the primary volume immediately become the current image of data of the selected snapshot volume and the primary volume is accessible A backward synchronization task is started in the background to copy data of segments from the secondary volume and spare COW volume to overwrite the differential data on the primary volume During the restoring the I O access to the primary volume and the other snapshot volumes can still be processed normally but only after the restoring is done new snapshots can be created again e Online Volume Expansion 5 40 Adlvanced Functions Functions The capacity of primary volume secondary volume and spare COW volume can be expanded without interfering with the operations of the snapshot volumes After the capacity expansion operation is done for a volume or a logical disk the new capacity can be automatically recognized and utilized by the snapshot functions You may use this feature to allocate limited space for secondary volume and expand the secondary volumes later when more hard disks are available NOTE 1 The total maximum number of volume pairs is 64 16 for 512MB 1GB 1GB 512MB memory installed 2 The total maximum number of snapshot volumes is 512 3 The maximum number of snapshot volumes per primary volume is 32 The maxi
61. Scanning the online RAID systems in the specified IP range 5 68 Scanning the online RAID systems in the selected agent s domain 5 68 Registering a RAID system to an agent cece eee 5 70 RGC GUI System Panel ee 5 71 VDS Provider illustration sse eee eee eee eee 5 73 VDS Provider Configure screen eee eee eee 5 75 RAID O GISK Alay anasan eee Aaa eee A 3 PRAT Rel UT A 4 FRAID S CISK T UA A 5 RAID SdiSk aa UT A 6 RAID 6 disk array eee A 7 RAID T0diskartay Shots avian si Slt ce eT ent aloe hia ike es A 8 RAID GO GISK array oic lett all oe eat te atta ae ie A 9 RAID 50 CISK aray tals ccs lm dae a mela el Palen E T Raze 7 A 10 RAID 60 diSk array sis rail eset etcetera hal eeeh alate A 11 JBOD disk array sese A 12 NRAID TTT A 13 xvii CO Revision History Version Description Release Date 1 0 Initial release 2006 09 22 1 01 2 2 2 Added detailed information of 2007 01 24 information icons shown in Monitor Mode 2 2 3 Added detailed information of Components shown in Monitor Mode 2 4 2 Removed the restrictions on the number of spare disks for quick setup 2 5 1 Added a note for the Disk Cache field shown in RAID Management gt Hard Disks 2 6 1 2 6 2 2 6 3 2 6 4 2 6 6 Modified the contents for the Schedule option 2 6 8 Added the contents for the Schedule option 2 7 1 Added a caution for the boot up delay time 2 9 2 Added a note for the NVRAM configuration 2 9 3 Modifie
62. Synopsis confighdd frequency Description Show or update the progress of background tasks except reconfiguration task Parameters frequency high medium or low 4 9 2 Time management Command dateset Synopsis dateset static ntp t YYYY MM DD hh mm n xxx yyy zzz Description Set the current date and time on the controller t YYYY MM DD hh mm date and time This is valid only when static is specified Parameters ee n xxx yyy zzz NTP server network address This is valid only when ntp is specified Command timezoneset timezoneset z Area Location d on off Synopsis t l timezoneset i Description Set the time zone i Interactive mode Parameters z Area Location Time zone name of area and location d on off Daylight saving time DST setting Command ntpsync Synopsis ntpsync Description Immediately synchronize controller s time with network time server Command datelist Synopsis datelist 4 35 Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands Description List the current date time and time zone on the controller 4 9 3 Administration security control Command login Synopsis login username t target_controller Description Login into CLI with an account and its password username enter the user name Parameters t target_controller enter the IP address of the RAID subsystem the users want CLI to log in
63. Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Message Expansion on DGx paused Description Disk group expansion on dgx was paused Check if there is failed member disk in the disk group during the Advice bee Event ID Ox200d Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Message Expansion on DGx resumed Description Disk group expansion on dgx was resumed Advice None D 8 Appendix Event ID Ox200a Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Message Expansion on DGx completed Description Disk group expansion on dgx was completed Advice None Event ID Ox205f Expand progress Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Notify threshold Message DG expand progress y on DGx reach to the notify percent z Description i progress of dg expanding has reached the pre define thresh Advice None Logical disk migration Event ID 0x2004 Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters DG ID LD ID Message Migration on DGxLDy started Description Migration on dgxldy was started manually Advice None Event ID Ox202c Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID LD ID Message Migration on DGxLDy started by schedule Description Scheduled migration on dgxldy was started Advice TBD Event ID 0x2044 Type TASK Sev
64. UNEQ the two controllers have different daughter board C PLD VERS UNEQ the two controllers have different PLD version D MEM SZ UNEQ the two controllers install memory of different size E BBM INSTL UNEQ one controller has BBM while the other has no BBM Below list the resolutions for the configuration conflict Troubleshooting A B C Contact your RAID system supplier to get the correct controller D E Install proper memory module and BBM If the conflict configuration can be resolved by overwriting the configuration of the replacement controller the following LCD messages will be displayed and waiting for your confirmation by LCD ENT button F CHK BC VERS the two controllers have different boot code version G CHK FW VERS the two controllers have different firmware code version H CHK BBM OPT the two controllers have different BBM option CHK ENC SN the two controllers belong to different enclosures For F and G press the ENT button on the LCD to update the boot code and firmware code respectively and the replacement controller will reboot For H and I press the ENT button to overwrite the BBM and enclosure serial number and the replacement controller will continue boot up 2 During dual controller boot up the controllers hang with LCD messages When the two controllers boot up at the same time negotiation will be performed between the two controllers to choose one controller as the mast
65. according to the physical location of the port on the controller Select one from the drop down menu SCSI ID For SCSI port Select a SCSI ID from the drop down menu A maximum of 16 SCSI IDs can be added to the controller LUN ID Select a LUN ID from the drop down menu where up to a maximum of 128 LUNs can be selected Mapping Virtual Disk Select a virtual disk from the drop down menu for LUN mapping Sector Size 512Byte 1KB 2KB 4KB Select a sector size from the drop down menu as the basic unit of data transfer in a host Number of Cylinder Define a specific cylinder head and sector to Number of Head accommodate different host systems and Number of Sector applications The default is Auto 2 37 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI Write Completion Write behind Write commands are reported as completed when a host s data is transferred to the write cache Write through Write commands are reported as completed only when a host s data has been written to disk Remove LUNs in storage port Select the LUN s you want to remove and click Remove To remove alll LUNs of a virtual disk from the default storage group of fepx sasy scpz check the Remove mapping virtual disk from all storage group box Symmetric method Symmetric storage is used in environments where hosts are equipped with multi path IO MPIO driver or software that can handle multiple paths LUNs to a single virtu
66. as they are getting old It could also be because of the abnormal Appendix environmental conditions like bad air conditioning or vibrations or because of failures of hardware components like connectors or cables When any of these happens the data and RAID configurations are gone forever for most storage systems With the online array recovery the firmware can online recognize and recover the RAID configurations stored on disk drives and get the data back as long as the disk drives can be running again B 10 Vigilant System Monitoring After a storage system is installed and starts serving the applications one of the most important jobs for the administrators is to monitor the system status The hardware components in a storage system like disk drives fans or power supply units might become unhealthy or even dead and the environment might also be out of control The firmware vigilantly watches these hardware components and environment and alerts the administrators timely It may also intelligently conduct necessary countermeasures to recover from the degradation or mitigate the risks e Remote monitoring by Web GUI The web GUI displays the picture of the hardware components of the storage system and shows their corresponding status The administrator can quickly get the overview of the system status and easily understand what components need to be serviced Because the GUI can be remotely accessed by web browsers the monit
67. as below s IE 6 x Windows s IE 7 x Windows e FireFox 1 x Windows Linux and Mac s Safari 1 x and 2 x Mac 2 The following webpage appears when the connection is made To login enter the username and password see 2 2 4 Login on page 2 11 You can then access the Config Mode Figure 2 1 GUI login screen 2 1 1 Browser Language Setting The GUI is currently available in English Traditional Chinese and Simplified Chinese For other languages you can use the FW customization tool to add multi language support The following example shows how to set up language in Internet Explorer 6 Other browsers support the same functionality Please refer to the instructions included with your browser and configure the language accordingly Open your web browser and follow the steps below to change the GUI language 1 Click Tools gt Internet Options gt Language gt Add 2 1 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI 2 In the Add Language window find the language you want to use and click OK 3 In the Language Preference window select the language you want to use and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move it up to the top of the list Click OK 4 Click OK again to confirm the settings NOTE If the GUI does not support the selected language the webpage will still appear in English e Firefox language settings Here is an example of how to change the GUI language settings in Firefox 1 Ope
68. background tasks e Support background task roaming e Support automatic resuming tasks when the system restarts e Support early notification of task completion e Array Roaming and Recovery e Support Configuration on disk COD with unique ID for each disk drive e Support drive traveling e Support online and offline array roaming e Support automatic and manual roaming conflict resolution e Online array recovery for logical disks disk groups and volumes e Storage Presentation 1 4 introduction e Support multiple storage presentations simple symmetric and selective e Support dynamic LUN masking s Independently selectable access control for each host and LUN e Independently selectable CHS geometry and sector size for each LUN e Support host grouping management e Support up to 32 hosts 16 host groups and 32 storage groups e Support up 1024 LUNs and 128 LUNs per storage group e Hard Disk Management e Support hard disk adding and removal emulation utility e Support disk self test DST and disk health monitoring by SMART e Support SMART warning triggered disk cloning e Support bad block over threshold triggered disk cloning e Support disk cache control e Support disk auto standby when idle e Support disk and disk group visual identification by LED e Support disk sequential power on e Extensive disk I O parameters selective for different environments e Expansion Port Functions model dependent e Support SAS JBOD e
69. be in charge of managing and accessing the volume 2 31 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI Stripe Size KB 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 The stripe size must be larger than or equal to the cache unit size Alignment Set the alignment offset for volume starting sector Offset sector to enhance the controller s performance For Windows OS it is suggested to set the alignment offset at sector 63 NOTE All logical disks must be in the same RAID level No two logical disks can be in the same disk group None of the logical disks can be used by other volumes None of the logical disks can be bound to any LUNs All logical disks must be in the optimal state All disk groups of the logical disks must belong to the same owner controller Cn LH 5 LU KM KA Delete volumes Select the volume s you want to delete and click Delete To delete alll LUNs of volx check the Force to delete LUN mapping s box All access to the volume will be stopped Modify volumes To modify a setting select a volume and click Modify Specify the following options for configuration Name Type a name for the volume ID Preferred This option is only available when the redundant Controller controller system is in use Select the preferred controller to be in charge of managing and accessing the volume However the controller ownership will not change unless you check the Change owner controller i
70. choose each WWPN of Fiber HBA from the Choose from detected hosts box or directly enter the WWPN in this field SAS Address For SAS controller each SAS port needs a SAS Address for communicating with other devices in an SAS domain Host Name Use the system default name as hostx x is the Host identifier OR Uncheck the Use system default name box and enter the name in the Name field The maximum name length is 63 bytes HG ID Select a Host Group ID from the drop down menu You can select from hgO to hg31 or No group Remove hosts Select the host s you want to delete and click Remove Check the Only remove from host group box if you want to remove the host s from the host group only Modify hosts host groups Select a host you want to change for its host name host group ID or host group name and click Modify to enter the settings screen Add LUNs in storage group In the selective storage main screen click SG gt Add SG ID Select a SG ID from the drop down menu A maximum of 34 storage groups can be created in the controller LUN ID Select a LUN ID from the drop down menu where up to 128 IDs are available for the selection A total of 1024 LUNs can be created in the controller 2 41 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI Mapping Virtual Disk Select a virtual disk from the drop down menu for LUN mapping Mask Status Unmask Mask This option makes a LUN availa
71. chunk 0 DG DG Figure 5 19 Defragment a disk group to consolidate free chunks 5 5 2 Logical disk shrink Logical disk shrink can be used to decrease the capacity of a logical disk When performing logical disk shrink the capacity of the corresponding LUNs will be modified immediately and any attempt to access to the space beyond the new capacity will be rejected You have to shrink the partition and the file system on the host computer before shrinking the logical disks in order to avoid data loss e Shrink logical disk with an adjacent free chunk When a logical disk is shrunk the free chunk right after the logical disk is expanded by the capacity reduced at the shrunk logical disk 5 51 Advanced Functions Functions LD 0 Ht shrink LD 1 LD1 free inae 0 Figure 5 20 Logical disk capacity shrink and expanding an adjacent free chunk e Shrink a logical disk without an adjacent free chunk After a logical disk is shrunk a free chunk is created next to the logical disk a LDO eee LDO shrink LD1 LD1 LD 1 4 free chunk 1 LD2 free chunk 0 i free chunk 0 DG Figure 5 21 Logical disk capacity shrink and creating a new free chunk 5 5 3 Logical disk expansion Logical disk expansion can be used to increase the capacity of a logical disk by allocating free chunks and by moving logical disks in the same disk group to consolidate a free chunk for the new space of the selected logical disks e Expand a logica
72. completed click Finish For more information please follow the link below Microsoft Web Site Links Search link http technet2 microsoft com windowsserver en library 25257b2a 6d72 4adb 8f43 e3c0d28471d01033 mspx mfr true NOTE You have to login as a member of the Backup Operators group or Administrators group on the local computer for using Microsoft VDS software Advanced Functions Functions e Qlogic SANSurfer Express VDS Manager Qlogic SANSurfer Express is a point and click GUI utility that allows administrators to discover supported Fibre Channel storage devices including host bus adapters HBAs switch and array systems It also permits configuration and monitoring of these devices For more information please contact Qlogic or follow the link below Web Site Links http www qlogic com e Emulex EZPilot EZPilot is an end to end storage provisioning application for deploying industry leading solutions from Emulex and its partners EZPilot features an intuitive storage manager GUI for discovery allocation and assignment of storage in SAN It also provides users with a comprehensive view of the SAN environment graphically displaying all supported servers HBAs switches and storage For more information please contact Emulex or follow the link below Web Site Links http www emulex com 5 77 Troubleshooting Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 6 1 General Guidelines When you encounter issues
73. conflicted with another one on the same network Advice Try to configure the network adaptor with a different MAC address Event ID 0x3403 Type NETWORK Severity WARNING Parameters Ethernet ID Message P address conflicted on network interface ethx Description The IP address of network adapter ethx conflicted with another on the same network Advice Try to configure the network adaptor with different an IP address D 67 Apendi D 9 Miscellaneous Event subscribe Event ID 0x3800 IP Address Type MISC Severity NOTICE Parameters BSN DEE Message Send message to x port y failed Description Send a message a specify registrant is failed Advice None Event ID 0x3801 IP Address Type MISC Severity NOTICE Parameters Bok NUnbE Message Registrant x port y is kicked Description The registrant is kicked Advice None D 10 Snapshot Event ID 0x3C00 Primary Vol ume Sec Type SNAPSHOT Severity INFO Parameters ondary Volume Message Snapshot volume pair x y created Description Snapshot volume pair x y was created Advice None Event ID 0x3C01 Primary Vol l ume Sec Type SNAPSHOT Severity INFO Parameters ondary Volume Message Snapshot volume pair x y deleted Description Snapshot volume pair x y was deleted Advice None D 68 Appendix
74. data disks ensures high efficiency Recommended use Video production and live streaming Image editing Video editing Any application requiring high throughput Figure A 3 RAID 3 disk array A 5 Appendix A 5 RAID 5 With RAID 5 the system calculates parity from data on three drives If one of the drives fails parity data can be used to rebuild the lost data Under RAID 5 parity data is stored across all disks in the array This maximizes the amount of storage capacity available from all drives in the array while still providing data redundancy Data under RAID 5 is block interleaved RAID 5 Independent data disks with distributed parity blocks Characteristics Storage capacity number of disks 1 x capacity of the smallest disk A minimum of three disks are required Fault tolerance Good Each data block is written to a disk The parity of blocks with the same rank is generated on writes recorded in a distributed location and checked on reads Highest read data transfer rate medium write data transfer rate Relatively low ration of parity disks to data disks results in high efficiency Good aggregate transfer rate Most versatile RAID level Recommended use File and application servers Database servers Internet email and news servers Intranet servers The diagram below represents the writing of data on a RAID 5 array composed of four HDDs connected to the controller Parity blocks are rep
75. dgxldy failed to start Advice Check if the logic disk is busy or non optimal D 20 Appendix Event ID 0x2041 DG ID LD_ID Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters Sector Num Row Num Row Num Scrub on DGvLDw stopped with x bad sectors detected y incon M essage sistent rows found and z rows recovered Disk scrubbing on dgvidw was stopped manually and there Description were x bad sectors detected y inconsistent rows found and z rows recovered If the number of bad sectors or inconsistent rows grows excep Advice tionally fast or beyond a reasonable number consider to con duct diagnostics and replace with new disks Event ID 0x2042 DG ID LD_ID Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters Sector Num Row Num Row Num Scrub on DGvLDw aborted with x bad sectors detected y incon Message sistent rows found and z rows recovered Disk scrubbing on dgvildw was aborted and there were x bad Description sectors detected y inconsistent rows found and z rows recov ered Advice Check if the logical disk is busy or non optimal Event ID 0x203a DG ID LD_ID Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters Sector Num Row Num Row Num Scrub on DGvLDw completed with x bad sectors detected y Message inconsistent rows found and z rows recovered Disk scrubbing on dgvildw was completed and there were x bad Descriptio
76. disks Parameters h show hardware status 4 2 2 JBOD disks Command jbdcreate Synopsis jbdcreate jbdx hddy n name c ctlx Description Create a JBOD disk by a member disk n name the name of a JBOD disk Parameters c ctlx for redundant controller only the preferred controller of a JBOD disk 4 7 Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands 4 2 3 Command jbddelete Synopsis jbddelete jbadx f Description Delete a JBOD disk Parameters f force to delete LUN mapping Command jbdname Synopsis jodname jodx name Description Name a JBOD Command jodlist Synopsis jbdlist jodx all Description List the status of one or all JBOD disks Disk groups Command dgcreate sons Set thea me Pomel Description Create a disk group with member disks n name the name of a disk group i par seq logical disk initialization mode parallel or Parameters sun l z write zero immediately s hddz hdda local spare disks t capacity capacity to truncate Command dgdelete Synopsis dgdelete dgi Description Delete a disk group Command dgname Synopsis dgname dgx name Description Name a disk group Command dginit Synopsis dginit dgi par seq Description Set initiation mode of a disk group 4 8 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands Command dglist Syn
77. disks are required Fault tolerance Very good Read transaction rate Good Better than a single drive but worse than many other RAID levels Write transaction rate Worse than a single drive but better than many other RAID levels 100 data redundancy means that in the event of disk failure data can be copied directly to the replacement without rebuilding All the disks contain the same data Recommended use Accounting Payroll Finance Any application requiring high availability Figure A 2 RAID 1 disk array A 4 unang A 4 RAID 3 In RAID 3 all data is divided into pieces after which the system calculates the parity of these pieces The pieces are written to separate disks in parallel with the writing of the parity data In the event of disk failure the parity data can be used to rebuild the lost data If two or more disks fail data will be lost While the low ratio of parity disks to data disks ensures high efficiency the parity disk is accessed more frequently than other disks therefore making it unsuitable for random write access RAID 3 Parallel transfer with parity Characteristics Storage capacity number of disks 1 x capacity of the smallest disk A minimum of three disks are required Fault tolerance Good The data block is striped written on the data disks Stripe activity is generated on writes recorded on the parity disk and checked on reads e Low ratio of parity disks to
78. down menu 2 Check the Change Password checkbox and a pull down menu appears Fill in the passwords in each field 3 If you want to enable or disable password checking before login specify the options from the Password Check drop down menu Global Setting To enable or disable the auto logout function select either On or Off from the Auto Logout drop down menu By default the auto logout time is 10 minutes Set the Password Reminding Mail option to On to enable the controller to send out a password reminding email when users forget their password An email account is also required SSL Setting A secure connection is always required to login to the GUI therefore SSL Forced is enabled by default and users are forced to connect to the system via HTTPS Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI To disable forced SSL encryption select either On or Off from the SSL Forced drop down menu When all the settings are complete click Apply to make them effective immediately 2 10 6 System information To view system information and controller information select System Management gt System Information from the main menu You will see the following details System Information e System Name s Vendor Name s Model Name e Product Revision s Product Serial Number Controller Information s Controller ID e RAM Size MB s Serial Number s Controller Name NOTE When the redundant controller system is in use
79. e MPIO is enabled and dynamic load balancing is turned on e O are processed evenly by the two controllers e O are distributed evenly to multiple disk groups 12 Close the web GUI during I O access Sometimes the web GUI or RAID monitoring software could be an influential factor to the performance unstableness because it needs to retrieve RAID system status periodically and consumes CPU cycles of the storage processor Close the web GUI when you run time sensitive applications 6 4 Troubleshooting 13 Reduce the impact of background task The background I O tasks like RAID initialization or rebuilding have impact to the performance of your applications because they need to access hard disks Even SMART monitoring could cause disturbance You may set the priority of background tasks to low or schedule these tasks to run at non business hours to avoid the impact 14 Constantly monitor the I O statistics To know details of the performance of your RAID system you may check the performance management web pages by which you may identify slow hard disks slow host interface links or unbalanced workload distribution see 2 11 Performance Management on page 2 76 Some operating systems offer similar utilities For example Microsoft Windows Performance Monitor not only displays many useful statistics but also can be configured to send out alerts according to the threshold you set The statistics can also be saved as a log fi
80. e Task progress data The task progress data of a controller s background task will be synchronized to the peer controller If one controller fails the other can resume the background task of the failed controller s Time Two controllers will keep syncing the Real Time Clock RTC in a fixed period of time e Firmware The redundant controller system must have the two controllers to be operated in the same firmware version There are four scenarios for firmware version update e Boot State Update Upon system boot if the firmware version and boot code of the two controllers are unmatched the system will have prompt text shown on 5 23 Advanced Functions Functions the LCD The user needs to select the target version or boot code through the LCD menu interface e Failback State Update When the backup controller s firmware version is different with the survival controller the survival controller will automatically synchronize the firmware to the backup controller to make the two controllers with the same firmware version The user needs to confirm the firmware update by pressing the button on the LCD panel to continue the automatic synchronization e Normal State Update The normal state indicates that two controllers are normally in use When the system receives a firmware update commana it first updates the primary flash and then the secondary flash on both controllers After that the system will execute non interrup
81. eee B 9 B 10 Vigilant System Monitoring sss sees B 11 B 11 Convenient Task Management eee B 12 B 12 Extensive Supportive Tools esse eee eee ee eee B 13 xii B 13 Easy To Use User Interfaces sese eee B 14 Appendix C Boot Utility EN N Set eTel C 2 C2 L Load Image by TFTP sss C 3 C 3 B Update Boot ROM a 53 et ae cia ah aia ie aaa aa C 4 C 4 S Update System ROM C 4 SUD BIT OS uT ect a seat irc soe ates etd Neate tat ach od otis C 5 C 6 P Set password saninten a ape EE em nne nes C 5 C 7 R Restart system sees ccs ve poet ct noes etnias salad obs ae bee eienenn sealed C 5 C 8 Q Quit amp Boot RAID system yg sse C 5 Appendix D Event Log Messages D PRP ln ar c8 eect tat ee A A A SA a eet ek heh cee cee ees D 1 RT estes tpn sie eas esete set ilo ite slau ia aca et ated face nig ate ee toe D 8 D3 DISK sce i tea alien Pett eats med sa hh eh Mires Stes hy nl ls aie dad a D 25 SL Helal TTT D 37 D 5 Controller hardware sss eee D 48 DO ENGlOSUIG senon eoar ai e a Ea a aii e D 51 BD V SYSTE Ek e E e EEE E EEEE tase E a E E E EE D 59 REV eT EE E E E E EE D 67 BES IMISCEIAMEOUS TTT D 68 SR LST ne alo sanes sca inc naa ad need aea a Win bpd sea tn a Aa D 68 xiii Coments xiv Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 4 Table 2 3 Table 2 5 Table 2 6 Table 2 7 Table 2 8 Table 2 9 Table 2 10 Table 2 11 Table 2 12 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 6 1 List of Tables Buttons in monitor a
82. events to be Parameters s severity severity level of events to record Command eventerase Synopsis eventerase Description Erase all records in the event log Command eventtest Synopsis enenttest severity Description Generate a testing event record with the specified severity level 4 8 2 Event notification Command notifycontrol Synopsis notifycontrol on off smtp snmp all Description Enable or disable event notifications of all or the selected notification method Command notifylist Synopsis notifylist smtp snmp all Description List the current settings of all or the selected notification method Command eventmailrcv eventmailrcv set rcvx receiver severity Synopsis j eventmailrcv reset rcvx Description Enable or disable the specified mail account for mail notification receiver set reset set or clear receiver rcvx receiver identifier Parameters receiver mail address of receiver severity severity level to notify 4 32 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands Command eventmailconfig Synopsis eventmailconfig j subject r xmin d xsec c content Description Display or set the event mail configurations j subject event mail subject l r xmin event mail retry period Parameters l d xsec event mail delay time c content event mail content Command snmptraprcv Synopsis snmptraprcv set rcvx server port v
83. following presentation methods Simple presentation for direct attached storage DAS environment Symmetric presentation for host computers with multiple IO path MPIO software O Apendi Selective presentation for sophisticated storage area network SAN environments The administrators can choose an appropriate presentation method according to the environment to quickly complete the presentation at the deployment stage and effectively manage the presentation at the maintenance stage s Host and LUN management The host HBA ports are managed by groups and the internal storage resources are exported as LUNs managed in distinct storage groups Because the storage presentation can be conducted based on the groups the presentation process can be simplified and more easily managed e Independent LUN attributes Each LUN can have different attributes such as CHS geometry sector size and optimization policy All LUNs can be independently and dynamically masked or unmasked IO access control of LUN can be also enforced for security or for isolating problematic host computers Because each LUN can be independently configured storage resources can be virtualized and shared without unnecessary compromise B 3 Flexible Storage Provisioning Storage provisioning is the process to organize the physical disks with appropriate RAID configurations which determine the level of performance and reliability of LUNs The more RAID configuration
84. for certain hotkey functions Hotkey ere Key Combinations PURSUE TOE UP View the previous status info message DOWN View the next status info message ESC Enter the menu mode Skip memory testing when controller boot up Boot Code v1 03 or latest UP DOWN Press twice to mute the beeper ESC ENT Restart to display the local enclosure status info messages ENT UP Display the previous expansion info message ENT DOWN Display the next expansion info message ESC UP For redundant controller system only Press for 2 3 seconds to switch to controller A ESC DOWN For redundant controller system only Press for 2 3 seconds to switch to controller B 3 5 Using the LCD Console the LCD Console 3 3 Menu 3 3 1 Menu Tree Use the UP or DOWN arrow buttons to scroll through the menu Press the ENT button to enter the selected setting To exit the menu press ESC The menu tree hierarchy is as shown below Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Quick Setup RAIDLevel SpareDisk Init Method Status Ethernet Setup gt Select CTL ID gt _ gt IP Address Netmask Gateway DNS Set DHCP gt MAC Address Terminal Port gt Baud Rate Stop Bit gt Data Bit gt Parity p Flow control gt Passwd Setup gt PasswdENABLE Change Passwd System Setup gt Save Config gt Save amp Restart SavetoNVRAM Restart Factory
85. found and z rows recovered Disk scrubbing on dgw was completed and there were x bad Description sectors detected y inconsistent rows found and Z rows recov ered If the number of bad sectors grows exceptionally fast or beyond Advice a reasonable number consider to conduct diagnostics and replace with new disks Apendi Event ID Ox205d Scrub Prog ress Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Notify threshold Message Scrub progress y on DGx reach to the notify percent z Description The progress of scrubbing on dgx has reached the pre define threshold Advice None NOTE Because one disk group can have only one logical disk executing disk scrubbing the events do not record ID of the logical disk to execute disk scrubbing e Disk scrubbing of logic disks Event ID 0x2040 Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters DG ID LD_ID Message Scrub on DGxLDy started Description Disk scrubbing on dgxlidy was started manually Advice None Event ID 0x204b Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID LD_ID Message Scrub on DGxLDy started by schedule Description scheduled disk scrubbing on dgx was started Advice None Event ID 0x2057 Type TASK Severity WARNING Parameters DG ID LD_ID Message Scrub on DGxLDy failed to start by schedule Description Scheduled disk scrubbing on
86. further utilize the disk soace a capacity oriented volume can be created by concatenating multiple logical disks of different capacity to form storage with huge capacity Without the embedded volume management the administrator is required to use different host based volume management software for different operating systems which results in difficulties in managing volume configurations and risks of configuration lost if there is anything wrong with the host computers e RAID quick setup Within very few steps the administrator can complete the RAID configurations for all disks as well as basic system settings The RAID quick setup is provided through multiple user interfaces Web GUI CLI and LCD By the RAID quick setup a reliable storage system can quickly be available within only a few minutes needing no sophisticated expertise B 4 Comprehensive RAID Configurations RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks technologies are deemed as the most promising solutions for building disk based massive storage systems with high performance and reliability The RAID controller firmware provides comprehensive RAID levels and stripe sizes such that a storage system can fulfill different types of requirements In addition valuable enhancements are also provided to offer useful flexibilities Combining with flexible storage provisioning and presentation the firmware can unleash the power of the controller and meet users needs e Comprehens
87. is free soace on its disk group The capacity is expanded by allocating adjacent free chunks and by relocating logical disks on the same disk group The capacity can also be shrunk to release free space on a disk group During the B 5 unang capacity change RAID operations are still available to protect data and serve requests from host computers e Concurrent logical disk capacity and disk group expansion The logical disk capacity expansion can also be done simultaneously with disk group expansion and as a result users can expand the capacity of a LUN by adding more drives to its disk group Without logical disk capacity expansion the administrator is forced to create a new LUN after the disk group expansion is done To use the capacity on the new LUN either extra data management efforts like file system or application reconfiguration are needed or the administrator needs to deploy volume management software on the host computer which leads to extra cost complexity and efforts e Autonomous free space management The free space on a disk group is managed as free chunks A free Chunk is created when an administrator deletes a logical disk or shrinks its capacity Free Chunks are for creating new logical disks or for expanding a logical disk By visualizing the free soace with easy management utilities an administrator can easily manage the free soace and avoid waste e Online de fragmentation To have a continuous free space
88. it effective On Windows Vista you can also use Computer Management Disk Management GUI to do partition expansion and shrinking Please follow the links below and enter diskpart to find more information Microsoft Web Site Links Search link hitp search microsoft com mkt en US Download diskpart utility link hitp www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID 0fd9788a 5d64 4f57 949f ef62de7ab1ae amp displaylang en 5 57 Advanced Functions 5 6 RAIDGuard Central 5 6 1 Introduction RAIDGuard Central is a software utility that allows you to remotely monitor multiple RAID systems located at different networks and to consolidate event logs from these RAID systems at a single console It also offers smart discovery of RAID systems and real time event notification by MSN messages The features and benefits of RAIDGuard Central are summarized as below s Remote monitoring multiple RAID systems With RAIDGuard Central you can watch the status of multiple RAID systems by single GUI console which can be launched either locally or remotely by a web browser You can quickly know the status of all RAID systems simply at one glance and when there is an event happening to a RAID system you can launch the web GUI of the RAID system by RAIDGuard Central to know further details of the RAID system or conduct maintenance tasks This helps you quickly locate the RAID systems in trouble and frees you from checking the
89. kernel to do I O manipulation such as logical volume management software RAID and also in our case multi path I O The dm multipath driver is the implementation of Linux multi path I O based on the device mapper driver Together with a user soace program multipathd which when started reads the configuration file etc multipath conf to create multi path devices at dev It also runs as a daemon to constantly monitor and recover failed paths Because the DM multi path works above the hardware layer all HBA should work Novell SUSE and RedHat along with other Linux vendors are pushing DM multi path as the standard multi path solution Many RAID vendors have also adopted DM multi path as the default multi path solution on Linux You may find extensive related information over the Internet For single controller RAID systems native Linux multi path has everything you need and the default configuration file can be used All you need to do is to make sure the dm multipath tool has been installed on your Linux systems RHEL 5 requires manual installation of dm multipath package The sections below are examples offered for SUSE SLES 10 For redundant controller RAID systems in addition to the native Linux dm multipath you need also to install the proprietary RPM package and edit the configuration file Aulvanced Functions Functions e Install and start the multipathd service Single Controller System 1 Check etc multipa
90. of the Security current user Logout Log out the current user Specify the desired GUI language Language The language options will differ according to the language support on your operating system P Help Contents Open the help web page e k About Display the program version Tool Bar MSN tool button Open the MSN Login and Configure screen This icon also indicates the MSN status Green MSN account is online Red MSN account is offline Left Panel IP input area Enter the IP address of an agent Add button Register the specified agent Structure tree Display the registered agent and RAID system System Panel When an agent is selected Display the current agent IP address IP range field and list of scanned registered RAID systems When a RAID system is selected Display the system information and event logs See more information in the section 5 6 8 RAID System Monitoring on page 5 71 Aulvanced Functions Functions 5 6 7 RAID System Registration You need to register RAID systems to RGC using the RGC GUI to build network connections to the RAID systems Because the RGC Server communicates with RAID systems using RGC Agents you also need to have one RGC Agent for each network of the RAID systems After installing and running the RGC Agents follow the steps below to complete the RAID system registration using the RGC GUI e Add the RGC Agents e Scan the network of the RGC Agents to di
91. on The firmware also provides extensive hardware statistics that helo the administrator to know the system better and to conduct integration diagnostics more effectively e Management network interface Using network to manage IT infrastructure and devices has been a common practices so a storage system is required to be easily adopted in a network environment The firmware supports a variety of network protocols HTTP TELNET SSH SSL DHCP NTP DNS SNMP and SMTP such that the storage system can be easily managed B 13 Easy To Use User Interfaces A storage system is valued not only by its functionalities but also how user friendly it is The storage systems with RAID controller have been marketed as the most easy to use storage solutions in the market for years The firmware provides comprehensive features while keeps everything simple The administrator can quickly understand each operation and unleash the functions of the system more effectively The storage system vendors can also benefit from that because the efforts for educating users and supporting users TO conduct maintenance tasks can be largely reduced and the technical support staff can focus on high level planning or cultivating new business e Web based GUI The administrator can enjoy the friendly GUI by pervasive web browsers without installing any software Because the GUI is platform independent it eases the administration access to the storage systems and largely r
92. option is only available when the redundant Controller controller system is in use Select the preferred controller to be in charge of managing and accessing the JBOD disk e Delete JBOD disks Select the JBOD disk s you want to delete and click Delete To delete alll LUNs of jbdx check the Force to delete LUN mapping s box All access to the JBOD will be stopped e Modify JBOD disks To modify a setting select a JBOD and click Modify Specify the following options for configuration Name Type a name for the JBOD ID Preferred This option is only available when the redundant Controller controller system is in use Select the preferred controller to be in charge of managing and accessing the JBOD disk However the controller ownership will not change unless you check the Change owner controller immediately box Write Cache This option enables or disables the write cache of a JBOD disk 2 23 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI Write Sorting This option enables or disables the sorting in the write cache To improve writing performance it is recommended to turn this option on for random access This option is available only if the write cache is on Read Ahead Policy Always The controller performs pre fetching data for every read command from hosts Adaptive The controller performs pre fetching only for host read commands that are detected as sequential reads The detection is do
93. page For more information about multi path on Solaris please refer to Solaris Fibre Channel and Storage Multipathing Administration Guide or go to Sun s online document web site http docs sun com and Sun s online forum web http wikis sun com 5 17 Advanced Functions Functions 5 2 Multiple ID solutions 5 2 1 Overview The multiple ID mechanism provides host transparent controller failover failback solution That is no particular software or driver is required to be installed at the host side Howerver a fiber switch is required Through the connection of fiber switch the fiber host chanel ports can provide backup for each other Fcpal and fcpb1 can backup each other so do fcpa2 and fcpb2 For example if controller A fails fcpb1 inherits the target ID of fcpal while fcpb2 inherits the target ID of fcpa2 When the target ID is inherited the lun map under the ID is inherited as well Now both fcpb1 and fcpb2 have two IDs When controller A gets failback fcpbl and fcpb2 disable the inherited ID before fcpal and fcpa2 are enabled The procedure is delicately controlled to achieve seamless failover failback When MTID mode is selected the topology is set to arbitration loop automatically The fiber switch ports connected to the RAID fiber ports should be configured as public loop ports which are offen denoted as FL or GL ports The ta
94. resets the latest battery replacement YYYY MM DD dote Delay 90 180 270 360 450 540 630 Shutdown When a power failure occurs and the UPS battery seconds charge is below the normal range the UPS will power down after the specified delay time Delay Boot 0 60 120 180 240 300 360 420 seconds The UPS automatically powers on after the specified delay time This avoids branch circuit overload when AC power returns Low Battery Threshold seconds 120 300 480 660 840 1020 1200 1380 This option notifies the user that the UPS battery is low with the specified remaining seconds Change Restart Percentage 0 15 30 45 60 75 90 After the AC power returns the UPS does not power on until the battery charge reaches the specified capacity 3 Click Apply to confirm the current settings NOTE 1 The values from each drop down menu may be different according to the UPS connected 2 Currently the controller only support and communicate with Smart UPS function APC American Power Conversion Corp UPS Please check detail http www apc com 2 9 5 Miscellaneous Beeper Control On default Off Mute Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI This option controls the controller s beeper On The beeper sounds during exceptional conditions or when background tasks make progress By default the beeper is on Off The beeper is quiet all the time Mu
95. restart the controller will take over the peer controller However for updating the firmware of external enclosures rebooting is still needed 2 10 9 Restart or halt the controller 2 74 Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI When you want to turn the RAID system off you must go through a regular shutdown procedure Always follow the steps below to instruct the controller restart or halt before powering off the RAID system 1 Select System Management gt Restart Halt from the main menu 2 For redundant controller system only From the Controller ID drop down menu specify whether you want to restart or halt ctla ctlb or Both Controllers 3 From the Action drop down menu select Restart or Halt 4 Once any external SAS JBOD enclosure is connected the Apply to all external enclosures checkbox will be displayed Check this checkbox to restart or halt all the enclosures at the same time 5 Click Apply e When Restart is selected the controller automatically restarts Click Reconnect when boot up is complete e When Halt is selected a confirmation prompt displays Click Confirm close the GUI and power off the RAID system 2 10 10 Miscellaneous Select System Management gt Miscellaneous from the main menu and the following settings become available for your controller Enclosure Polling Period second Disabled default 1 2 5 10 30 60 This option is only available for the controller equipped with an
96. scprate Synopsis scprate scpx all async fast fastwide ultra ultrawide ultra2 ultra2wide ultra3 ultra320 You can sets the preferred data rate of a SCSI port scpx or all SCSI ports all as Asynchrous SCSI async Fast SCSI fast D ibti Fast Wide SCSI fastwide Ultra SCSI ultra Ultra Wide SCSI escrprhon ultrawide Ultra2 SCSI ultra2 Ultra2 Wide SCSI ultra2wide Ultra3 SCSI ultra3 or Ultra 320 SCSI ultra320 The default is ultra320 Command scpdefid Synopsis scpdefid scpx scsi_id sn you can sets the default SCSI ID of a SCSI port scpx to Description lt c jd which valid value are 0 15 The default SCSI ID is 0 Command scplistusrconf Synopsis scplistusrconf scpx all Description Displays the user configurations of a SCSI port scpx or all SCSI ports all Command scplistcurconf Synopsis scplistcurconf scpx all Description Displays the current configurations of a SCSI port scx or all SCSI ports all FC ports Command fconame Synopsis fconame fcpx name Description Name an FC port Command fcploopid Synopsis fcploopid fcpx id auto Description Set the hard loop ID of an FC port Parameters id hard loop ID auto automatically determined 4 25 Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands Command fcoconmode Synopsis fcpoconmode fcpx all al fabric auto Description Set the connection mode of an
97. sensor x A TEMPx xx xC BP temperature sensor x BP TEMPx xx xC BP average temperature BP AVG xx xC Expansion temperature sensor x Power x is s TEMP x Xx xC Powx s Expansion power x is s Pow x s Both Celsius C and Fahrenheit F are supported Users can customize the temperature scale for the display A denotes controller A B denotes controller B s Good Warning Error OFF Table 3 1 List of status messages Using the LCD Console the LCD Console 3 2 3 Emergent info When an emergent event occurs you can read the message on the LCD This state is held until every event is confirmed See the function buttons as below UP DOWN Scroll up down the message ENT Confirm clear the message not supported in current version ESC Enter the menu password may be required Line 1 shows messages and Line 2 shows the disk status The displayed emergent info is listed below Emergent Info Message Note Voltage failure Power failure Voltage Failure Power Failure Fan failure Fan Failure Temperature sensor failure Temp Failure Temperature warning is not included BBM failure BBM Failure Only when BBM is present Disk SMART warning SMART Warning Disk BBR error Disk BBR Error DG with degraded LD and no rebuild task DG Degraded LD DG with faulty LD DG F
98. solutions for multi path I O VDS compliant management and centralized management console on multiple platforms You can locate their sections in the chapter 5 and know their features and benefits as well as how to do the installation and configuration Contact your RAID system supplier to know the interoperability between the software and the system NOTE Installing multi path I O driver is a must for redundant controller systems to support controller failover failback Please check Chapter 5 Advanced Functions for more information about MPIO and redundant controller solution Getting ready for future maintenance tasks The better you re prepared the less your maintenance efforts would be Below are the major settings you ll need for maintenance Event logging and notification You can have peace only if you can always get timely notifications of incidents happening to your RAID systems so completing the event notification settings is also a must do You might also need to set the policies for event logging and notifications see 2 9 Event Management on page 2 61 Data integrity assurance For better system reliability you are advised to set policies for handling exceptions like to start disk cloning when SMART warning is detected or too many bad sectors of a hard disk are discovered see 2 8 1 Hard disks on page 2 56 or to turn off write cache when something wrong happens see 2 9 5 Miscellaneous on page 2 67 You may
99. tasks For more information about preferred controller see Owner controller and preferred controller on page 5 22 2 The replacement must be exactly the same controller as the surviving one as mentioned previously e GUI Notification When one of the controller is failover the following notification message will be displayed and provide the link to the backup controller Click Go to peer controller s GUI to view or configure settings Controller Issue The current controller cannot be connected please use the link below to go to the peer controller Go to peer controller s GUI Figure 5 13 Controller failover and the page redirection message When a controller is failoack a pop up dialog box appears to notify users that the system is doing failback GUI screen is polling every 15 seconds Users can click the OK button when the failback process is finished Controller Issue The system is failover failback Please wait until the task done and the ok button will appear CRD en eee Figure 5 14 Controller failback message If both controllers are down the following pop up dialog box will be displayed to notify the user Controller Issue The controller and peer controller are both unable to be connected Figure 5 15 Error message indicates both controller failures 5 37 Advanced Functions 5 4 Snapshot 5 4 1 Introduction Snapshot allows you to create instantaneous data images of a
100. the RAID enclosure It will be mapped to LUN O of all host ports All other configurations will remain unchanged and all RAID parameters will use the default values Redundant controller RAID configuration Two volumes for raid30 raid50 or raid 60 or two logical disks for other RAID levels will be created with all capacity of all disks in the RAID enclosure One volume will be based on two disk groups so totally there will be four disk groups The preferred controller of one volume or logical disk is assgined to controller A and the other is assigned to controller B They will be mapped to LUN O and LUN 1 of all host ports on both controllers All other configurations will remain unchanged and all RAID parameters will use the default values Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI 2 6 RAID Management 2 6 1 Hard disks This feature allows you to add or remove hard disks and set any online disk as global spare drive The hard disk information included is listed as follows Table 2 10 Hard disk information Category Display HDD ID Hard disk identifier Model Hard disk model name Capacity c GB Hard disk capacity State On line Foreign Conflict Removed PRemoved Faulty Initializing Unknown Unused JBOD disk DG data disk Local spare Global Type spare or Clone target SMART Status Healthy Alert or Not supported Mode Ready Standby or Unknown e State definition On line The hard di
101. the disk failed or the source disk group is non optimal Advice when starting the task Event ID 0x2018 DISK ID Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DISK ID Message Clone from HDDx to HDDy paused Description Disk cloning from hddx to hddy was paused Check if the source disk group is busy or non optimal during the Advice fae Event ID 0x2019 Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters eo DISK ID Message Clone from HDDx to HDDy resumed Description Disk cloning from hddx to hddy was resumed Advice None Event ID 0x2017 DISK ID Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters DISK ID Message Clone from HDDx to HDDy stopped Description Disk cloning from hddx to hddy was stopped manually Advice None unang Event ID Ox201a DISK ID Type TASK Severity WARNING Parameters DISK ID Message Clone from HDDx to HDDy aborted Description Clone from hddx to hddy was aborted Check if the disk failed or the target disk was rebuilding when the Advice source disk failed Event ID 0x2016 Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters RREI DISK ID Message Clone from HDDx to HDDy completed Description Disk cloning from hddx to hddy is complete Advice None Event ID 0x2056 Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DREID
102. to align the data stripes with the data organization of file systems And the later is to truncate the size of disk drives in a disk group such that disk drives of slightly smaller size can still be used e Real time management with NTP The controller is equipped with real time clock RTC chip so that controller can record events or conduct scheduled maintenance tasks following the wall clock time and calendar The firmware also supports Network Time Protocol NTP to synchronize its date and time with an external time server This ensures that all the IT equipments have common time base to act upon e Configuration management The controller stores the configurations on either the disk drives or the NVRAM of the controller The administrator can download the unang configurations and save it as a file on his desktops and he can restore the configurations later if needed for system recovery or apply the configuration files to other systems The configurations can also be saved to disk drives such that the configurations can be restored from the disk drives after the array roaming e Hardware parameters Extensive user configurable parameters are provided for configuring the system The administrator can choose the speed of connections of disk drives or host for better compatibility or he can choose to set policies for IO processing like maximum number of retries time out value SMART polling period on disk cache control and so
103. to bind the host groups across four fibre ports Host Group 0 Host Group 1 N FCPa2 FCPa1 FCPb2 FCPb1 Controller A Controller B Storage Group 0 Storage Group 1 for Host Group 0 for Host Group 1 Figure 5 8 Redundant Dual Independent MPIO hosts To set up the connection perform these tasks in the RAID GUI e Specify the storage provisioning method e Assign the WWPN for the HBAs in the server hosts s Define the host group to which the server host belongs to e Create storage groups for LUNs s Bind storage groups to each host group across four fibre ports In this configuration for DGOLDO and DGOLD1 the green path is the active path while the red path is the standby path when the green path fails the link transfroms and access will be continued by the red dotted path for DGT LDO and DGILD1 the condition is reversed 5 29 Advanced Functions Functions In this configuration each LUN is mapped to all fibre ports one is active path and the other is standby path The Configuration Tasks table shown below details each configuration task according to the example given in Figure 5 8 Configuration Tasks Tasks Instructions Create Virtual volumes and RAID Management gt Disk Groups gt specify the preferred Create DGO and DG1 controller RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DGOLDO gt Specify the preferred controller as ctla RAID Management
104. u admin p 0000 c hddilist all 4 2 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands s Out band CLI for Linux Installation To install out band CLI tool on Linux copy the cli outband linux Vx xx file to the directory where you want to run the program and you may start using the CLI utility Usage cli outband linux Vx xx t lt controller_ip gt u lt username gt p lt password gt s lt script_file gt c lt command gt Parameters t lt controller_ip gt the IP address of the RAID controller to be accessed u lt username gt p lt password gt user name and password s lt script_file gt the file name that contains CLI scripts to be executed C lt command gt the CLI command to be executed Examples 1 List the status of all hard disks of the RAID system at 168 95 0 1 cli outband linux Vx xx t 168 95 0 1 u admin p 0000 c hddilist all 2 Enter the interactive mode to access the RAID system at 168 95 0 1 cli outband linux Vx xx t 168 95 0 1 u admin p 0000 3 RUN a CLI script file on the RAID system at 168 95 0 1 cli outband linux Vx xx t 168 95 0 1 u admin p 0000 s scripet txt 4 1 3 Host side In band CLI Utilities In band CLI communicates with a RAID system by the interface that is the same as the I O interfaces like FC SAS or SCSI depending on the host interface of your RAID system Using the in band CLI frees you from setting up network connections for RAID systems The host side
105. warning or BBR alert X No disk INFO2 and DISK are mutual exclusive 3 2 Using the LCD Consolel the LCD Consolel 3 2 2 Status info When the system is ready the system information and background task messages are displayed sequentially every two seconds See the button functions as below UP DOWN Scroll up down the message ESC Clear the message and enter the menu password may be required ENT Enter the password if required UP DOWN Clear all status info and restart to display all the status Messages Line 1 shows messages and Line 2 shows the disk status Messages to be disolayed on the LCD panel can be customized by users The supported status info is listed below Status Info Message Note Product name Expansion name product name Expansion x x Expansion ID Up to four expansions can be added Date and time IP address hh mm MM DD YY XXX XXX XXX XXX BP FAN x rom FANX xxxxxrom Expansion FAN x rom FAN X Xxxxxrom Controller voltage 3 3V A 3 3V xx xx 3 3V 5V and 12V status Controller voltage 5V A 5 0V xx xx OD CORNONEN AOL 2 A denotes controller A Controller voltage 12V A 12 0 xx xx B denotes controller B BP voltage 3 3V BP 3 3V Xx xx 3 3V 5V and 12V status BP voltage 5V BP 5 0V xx xx on backplane BP voltage 12V BP 12 0 xx xx Expansion voltage sensor x VOLT X XX XX Controller temperature
106. 10 27 Battery ack p Mod le z srein Teea etei 2 73 2 10 8 Update system firmware boot code and external enclosure F W 2 74 2 10 9 Restart or halt the controller sse 2 74 2 10 10 Miscellaneous scisco igiene te eaa reve EO 2 sei agarose E aeu aE ASE 2 75 2 11 Performance Management eee 2 76 ZA ANG GISKS 2 iacc care a tat A shared aces 2 76 A Wied Cache ancora nee et WN fe A a ot Liao aah Sid ON sl wl Sea 2 76 ES N 0 LUN e e aa e ara heer ease e eee 2 77 Peal E sle DORE cet ice dice Spee gol a ase ce a e a aaea aaia 2 78 viii TS Chapter 3 Using the LCD Console 3 1 Starting LCD Manipulation eee tude Bile ian ie sees Ny sae 3 1 led COMM password e e eee erea ee eere ea a E eerie Eat R Riia 3 1 3 2 LCD Messages read 2 anns eae nes 3 2 3 24 LGD layout aine a ii Ser E e a 3 2 32 2 Status INO e e e EE E en O E eA EEEE 3 3 3 2 9 EMErgent T 3 4 3 2 4 Background task messages eee 3 4 3 2 O HOKEY S s5cdv nated irae tae release ricer anne ea oem aemee ac 3 5 3S MENU ea 22 09 225241 e a 202 HHE ad 200 LRU HT Z 0 EaU Ac Zo 3 6 3 3 Men eT 3 6 3 3 Creating anM Array ee nen re ee ne ee Eaa e e aiiai 3 6 3 9 9 NetWork Settings ienien etea e eneket re aa ae enaa a Eeit re eee 3 7 3 3 4 Terminal Port Settings essere 3 7 Ee SYSIOM OCUINGS neses uaa aia aces let aus io neta ie a 3 8 eE SY SLO MI Ins aue 3 8 Chapter 4 Using the CLI Commands AV Ka Tl TT 4 1 4 121 Embedded hae B 4 1 4 1 2 Host side Out band CLI Utilities sss eee eee eee
107. 2822 Voltage ID Type ENCLOSURE Severity WARNING Parameters Enclosure ID Voltage Message Abnormal voltage source x in enclosure y z V Description Voltage source x in enclosure y was out of normal range Advice Check the power supply system or contact local sales or support office Power supply Event ID Ox280d Type ENCLOSURE _ Severity INFO Parameters FID Enclosure ID Message Power supply x in enclosure y detected Description Power supply unit PSU x was installed and present Advice None Event ID 0x280e Type ENCLOSURE Severity ERROR Parameters Ean Enclosure ID Message Power supply x in enclosure y failed bets The controller cannot get status from power supply unit PSU x in Description enclosure y which might have failed or removal Advice Replace the power supply or contact local sales or support office D 54 Appendix BBM Event ID Ox280f Type ENCLOSURE Severity INFO Parameters Message BBM disabled Description The battery backup function was disabled Advice None Event ID 0x2810 Type ENCLOSURE Severity INFO Parameters Message Dirty boot and flush data ou The controller was not properly shutdown and it will flush cached Description data in memory protected by BBM Advic
108. 4 2 4 1 3 Host side In band CLI Utilities sese eee eee 4 3 4 1 4 Conventions Overview sese eee eee eee 4 6 4 2 Basic RAID Management 2 cccececeeeseeeeeeccdeceeecccceeneteneeeneceeseeeeeeeeenesteeesees 4 7 Mee Z aT eT eee ected orn tai Seek a Sold tied bead bts ih Nis hoe dark elie a Joie ee 4 7 d 2 2 JBOD AS KS ioe ieee inthe eels tanned ath eden al esac e a asain 4 7 4 23 DISK QrOUDS oneni ene ote Reece Aen eee 4 8 4 2 4 Spare and rebuild sese 4 9 4 2 9 BOON CAI CIS KS fae since ene cesudecoceenen este epee e eE ER eE EEE se ask e 4 10 4 2 6 RAID algorithms Options sss sexe eee 4 10 4 2 1 NOUMES exis a n TH ES HER H 4 11 4 2 o CANE acer cient easton Sends t can E anh dente ea e aa uel ala eere ta e eriein 4 12 4 3 RAID Maintenance Utilities sse eee 4 13 4 3 1 RAID attributes reconfiguration utilities eee eee eee eee eee 4 13 4 3 2 Data integrity maintenance utilities eee 4 14 4 3 3 Task priority COMMON fai suc eaer vanes acca ree ene a Ee rE Erase SE EEE 4 15 4 3 4 Task schedule management eee 4 15 4 3 5 On going task monitoring sss sss sees 4 16 4 3 6 Array and volume roaming sss sse eee 4 16 4 3 7 Array recovery utilities sse 4 17 4 4 Storage Presentation 2x4 o its cca diese eek iol need rer eee 4 17 4AN EO SUS so 2 creo coh een eat Pe AG a ne une a Ce at 4 17 AA FOS PE US TT 4 18 4 4 3 Storage groups sese eee eee 4 19 4 4 4 Presentation planning sese 4 20 4 4 5 Selective storage presentation eee 4 20 4 4 6 Simple stora
109. 5 2 To check if multipathd service has been activated or not type chkconfig list multipathd 3 To check if service has been running or not type serivce status all The multipathd provides several commands for configuring the paths as well as showing path and device information Type multipathd k to enter its interactive mode 4 You may also use multipath command to configure list and remove multi path devices 5 To add or remove LUNS after completing the changes to the RAID system configurations restart the service by typing service multipathd restart Modifying the configuration needs also to restart the service to make the modifications effective 6 If you re running Linux cluster and need to have consistent multi path device names you need to use the alias option in multipath conf or to use the Linux persistent binding For complete information please go to RedHat and Novell web site to find the following online documents RedHat Using Device Mapper Multipath Novell SUSE SLES Storage Administration Guide 5 15 Advanced Functions Functions 5 1 6 MAC Multi Path Solution Mac OS X provides multi path support on a basis since OS X 10 3 5 providing both path redundancy and load balancing Mac OS X implements miltipathing at the target device level and it requires that the RAID controller presents the same World Wide Node Name WWNN to all the host interfaces connected to the MAC systems
110. 5 Click Apply and a confirmation prompt displays Click Confirm 6 The disk group recovery starts Rebuilding will also start for degraded logical disks on a disk group If the logical disk is not recovered automatically after disk group recovery perform logical disk recovery After logical disks are restored you can perform the volume recovery to restore the lost member logical disks to a volume 2 14 Schedule task The DG reconfiguration LD reconfiguration disk cloning disk scrubbing and DST scheduled tasks are listed in the Schedule Task section When the scheduled date and time is met the controller will start the specified tasks NOTE The controller will try to launch commands according to the schedule However if the command cannot be executed at that moment the controller will not retry To cancel a scheduled task select it and click Delete A confirmation prompt displays Click Confirm to delete the selected task 2 7 15 Cache Configurations In this section you can configure the following settings to the controller The settings of Cache Unit Size Auto Array Roaming Control and Write Log Control will take effect after you restart the RAID subsystem Cache Unit Size KB 4 8 16 32 64 128 default The cache unit size must be smaller or equal to the minimum stripe size of existing logical disks Read Ahead Expire Control 1 100 second 55 default 2 54 Usingthe RAID GUI
111. 5 34 BSA SIMAD SION TT 5 38 54 1 IMUOGUCHON ex a eet onts incede e ee a ar a puts batbndidaa E ceiian tetas 5 38 5 4 2 How Snapshot Works see eee 5 39 5 4 3 How to Use Snapshots eee eee eee 5 41 5 4 4 Snapshot Utility and Scripting sse eee eee eee eee eee 5 45 5 5 Dynamic Capacity Management eee eee eee 5 48 5 5 1 Free chunk defragmentation sse as a eal 5 50 9 9 2 Logical GISK SHIN TTT 5 51 5 5 3 Logical disk expansion sse 5 52 5 5 4 Disk group expansion sees eee eee eee 5 53 5 5 5 Volume expansion and shrink sse eee eee 5 54 5 5 6 Windows DiskPart Utility sss sese 5 55 SORAID G ard Central ersen aa a alesse 5 58 5 0 1 Introduction a a a a a 5 58 5 6 2 Deployment OvervieW i sisessiessicnctii c iieeienriereietinibrotrieteotr netrinti rehia ieii 5 59 5 6 3 Installing the RAIDGuard Central sees cece cece eee 5 61 5 6 4 Uninstalling the RAlIDGuard Central sese 5 62 5 6 5 Launching the RAlIDGuard Central sese 5 62 5 6 6 RGC GUI Overview eee eee 5 65 5 6 7 RAID System Registration eee 5 67 5 6 8 RAID System Monitoring sss tacit eee 5 71 5 6 9 Configuring MSN Event Notification sese sees eee eee eee eee 5 72 xi Oil VIDS Provider o teeccenstiaead hence aden aus RO 6s bao here e e e ain 5 73 Dick ON Te 5 73 5 7 2 Installing the VDS Provider sse eee 5 74 5 7 3 Uninstalling the VDS Provider sees eee 5 74 5 7 4 Using the VDS Provider Configuration Utility eee eee eee eee eee 5 74 5 7 5 VDS Based RAID Management Software sese eee eee
112. 5 7 1 Overview The RAID controller supports Microsoft Virtual Disk Service VDS by supplying a VDS Provider It allows you to use VDS compliant software to manage the RAID systems on Windows platforms VDS is a key component in Microsoft Simple SAN Solutions and has been adopted by many leaders in the storage industry VDS is a management interface standard on Microsoft Windows for communication between storage management software and RAID hardware You may manage RAID systems from different vendors by VDS compliant software as long as VDS providers for the RAID systems are installed The architecture of VDS is illustrated as below Virtual Disks Service VDS e e fA Hardware E Microfost g Integer frame Figure 5 40 VDS Provider illustration VDS is supported on Windows server 2003 SP 1 VDS1 0 Windows server 2003 R2 VDS1 1 and Windows server 2008 VDS1 1 Microsoft provides both command line and GUI tool based on VDS DiskRAID and Microsoft Storage Manager for SAN VDS compliant storage management software from other vendors is also available Please see Section G 5 for more information You may follow the steps below to build VDS based management environment 5 Install your RAID systems and connect them to networks 6 Choose a management host system connected to the same LAN 7 Install the VDS Provider on the management host system 8 Use VDS Provider Configuration Utility to locate the RAID systems and comple
113. 5 76 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 6 1 General Guidelines eee eee 6 1 Biz Tel 6 1 623 Performante TUNNI ces celvade coca tees cena cena peigne cones ex are aea sues pase EE eaa EEE EEE 6 2 BAM Hard DISKS NSS ses cies ate ck il ate a ate ae ae ae ag tat ea 6 5 6 5 User Interfaces onsems eo cies ee ee ee ee eet 6 7 6 6 RAID Configuration and Maintenance sese eee 6 8 6 7 Redundant Controller and MPIO sss esse 6 10 Appendix A Understanding RAID POT RAID Ove IMIOW ni e naana a a e a E E A 1 AZ TSS cs ne eg sees a a e a ai a A EE A 3 AS RAID HT A 4 LRS TRAILS E e E E E EE A 5 L A Ip R r one RR a ee ere A 6 AG RAID O erea e E tl ag Pred lesa eh N a E ne aed A 7 A CRAIDD IO eere e acted hates tan dd nated e e a dts a E a Aa A 8 AS RAID OO T A 9 AO RAID SO aena aeoiee e a aa a e aiaa Guapo Casas A 10 ATORAID e e e e eE E aE a anges E a E eset EAE EE EENE A 11 ANR 10 DE EENE E E EEEE A 12 ANZ NRAID Freiren T A 13 Appendix B Features and Benefits Bel OVVIE Wn oedeem nea a E EE E tog EE B 1 B 2 Flexible Storage Presentation sse eee B 1 B 3 Flexible Storage Provisioning sss sese eee B 2 B 4 Comprehensive RAID Configurations sss eee B 3 B 5 Dynamic Configuration Migration eee eee B 4 B 6 Effective Capacity Management eee B 5 B 7 Adaptive Performance Optimization sss sees eee B 6 Bo Proactive Dala Protection vezes vn st Yote vE SZ er 22T yx ZL oge Y2L YZL He YZST e y B 8 B 9 Fortified Reliability and Robustness sese
114. 9 3 Event logs When the state of a logical or physical component in the controller changes such as failure of hard disks or completion of a background task an event occurs Events are classified into different severity levels You can view the events according to the different categories Specify the severity level at the top of the page Events are listed in the event log from newer to older The events contain the following information 1 Sequence number 2 Severity level of the event 3 Date and time when the event is occurred 4 The message text of the event its associated parameters and event identifier For the complete list of event messages refer to Appendix D Event Log Messages on page D 1 Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI Erase Event Log To clear all the records in the event log click Erase A confirmation prompt displays Click Confirm and all records will be erased Download Event Log To download all the records in the event log click Download Select a file type from the drop down menu and click Apply csv excel readable txt human readable bin for system suppliers Click on the link in the following pop up message and the File Download window displays Select Save and the download task begins If txt is specified as the file type right click the link to save the file File Type Download Event Log l Please use the following link to download file Figure 2 25
115. ARU UNTRUST OPTIMAL Force to recover a logical disk by the ARU UNTRUST REBUILD The partition completes data rebuilding REBUILD OPTIMAL Table 2 12 State transition BANISH Before logical disk recovery make sure the following e There are enough hard disks in the disk group e No background tasks in progress such as disk rebuilding or RAID reconfiguration e No reconfiguration tasks are performed by the faulty logical disk e Start a recovery When there are any hard disk conflicts there might be faulty disk groups logical disks or volumes on your controller You can perform DG recovery to restore lost member disks to a disk group The faulty logical disks on the disk group are recovered automatically when the disk group is recovered To perform a disk group recovery do the following 1 Select Maintenance Utilities gt Array Recovery from the main menu 2 53 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI 2 Select DG from the Recovery Type drop down menu 3 Select a disk group and click Recover 4 The Restore the Array window displays Select the original member disks to restore NOTE 1 If a non member disk is selected check the Force to recover disk option and specify the Disk Member Index Make sure the recovery index is correct 2 To reduce the possibility of data loss ensure that the recovery order is correct when the Force to recover disk option is chosen
116. AS expansion controller only The single controller RAID subsystem provides a SAS expansion port which allows users to connect a SAS JBOD The single controller support 120 hard disks so a maximum of six enclosures can be connected to the subsystem serially and each enclosure supports up to 16 SAS hard disks Each redundant controller system provides two SAS expansion ports to connect with one or more SAS JBOD chassis While the single SAS JBOD chassis only supports 16 bay RAID system the redundant SAS JBOD chassis is designed in two models 16 bay and 24 bay Depending on the redundant controller system and SAS JBOD chassis models 16 bay or 24 bay as well as the memory size in use 1G or 2G the GUI may have different enclosure tabs and front tray view displayed See Table 2 7 below for the supported number of SAS JBOD chassis and hard disks RAID Subsystem G Units of SAS JBOD SAS JBOD model y HDD 16 bay 24 bay 1G 64 3 2 16 bay 2G or higher 120 7 5 1G 64 3 27 24 bay 2G or higher 120 6 4 Table 2 7 Supported number of redundant SAS JBOD chassis and hard disks Please note that there are some empty slots shown in the SAS JBOD enclosure display in the last enclosure tab due to the maximum number of supported drives Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI 2 3 1 Rear side monitor of the SAS JBOD chassis On the rear side of the SAS JBOD chassis there are three ports for single SAS JBOD o
117. B Update Boot ROM Update System ROM H Utility menu P Set Password R Restart system Q Quit amp Boot RAID system Cmd gt p New Password Retype new Password _ C 7 R Restart system Press R to exit the Boot Utility and restart the RAID system C 8 Q Quit amp Boot RAID system Press Q to exit the Boot Utility and the system starts to load the primary flash When the loading is done you can boot the RAID system C 5 Appendix Appendix D Event Log Messages D 1 RAID e Disk operations Event ID Ox0800 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters Disk ID Message HDDx added Description hddx was added to the system from the user interface Advice None Event ID 0x0801 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters Disk ID Message HDDx removed Description hddx was removed from the system from the user interface Advice None Event ID 0x0802 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters Disk ID Message HDDx plugged Description hddx was added to the system by manual installation Advice None Event ID 0x0803 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters Disk ID Message HDDx unplugged es hddx was removed from the system by manual unplugging or Description hddx failed to respond to the controller Advice None Creation and deletion Event ID Ox0c00 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters JBOD ID Me
118. BODs A16R SJ Figure 2 17 displays the Config Mode when a SAS enclosure is connected Use the drop down menu at the top of the page to select the enclosure ID you wish to configure Enclosure ID drop down menu CONFLICT 003 ST3200822AS 186 CONFLICT DG HEALTHY dd4 8T3160812AS 148 CONFLICT DG HEALTHY ncthddS SAMSUNGSP1614C 148 CONFLICT DG HEALTHY encihdd6 SAMSUNG SP1614C 148 CONFLICT DG HEALTHY encihdd SAMSUNG SP1614C 148 CONFLICT DG HEALTHY encthdd9 HitachiHDS72404 372 CONFLICT DG HEALTHY Ready D encthdd10 8T3300622A8 279 CONFLICT DG HEALTHY Ready encthdd11 5T380013AS 4 CONFLICT DG HEALTHY Ready D encthdd12 Maxtor 6Y120M0 114 CONFLICT DG HEALTHY Ready System Management Performance Management aha Yanar greg 76 conruct pe HEALTHY Reay a enethddi4 ST3160812A8 148 CONFLICT DG HEALTHY Ready D encthddi5 SAMSUNG SP1614C 148 CONFLICT D0 HEALTHY Reay B UNUSED HEALTHY Ready i encthddi6 SAMSUNG SP1614C 148 Onine Figure 2 17 SAS enclosure configuration mode In order to use the expansion port on the SAS controller you must have firmware version 1 20 or later for complete functionary Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI 2 3 4 Information icons In Monitor Mode the following information icons are displayed on the screen When components are working normally their icons are shown in green When components fail to
119. COW operations are done by chunks consisting of multiple consecutive sectors more space is required than the actual data being modified If the space of a secondary volume is fully occupied the data on the snapshot volumes will be corrupted Be aware of applications that would change huge amount of data on a source volume like video recording and file system defragmentation If all the data will be changed ensure that the secondary volume s capacity is set to 105 of the size of the source volume 5 42 Aulvanced Functions Functions You will also properly set the RAID attributes of the secondary volume depending on your performance and reliability requirements for the snapshot volumes It is advised that the secondary volumes are located on the different disk group of the primary volumes such that the COW operation and the I O access to the snapshot volume can be done more efficiently NOTE 1 Set spare COW volumes to avoid data loss in the snapshot volumes when the space of the secondary volume is overflow 2 Expand secondary volume or spare COW volume to accommodate more differential data e Creating Snapshots using GUI or CLI After secondary volumes are chosen for the volumes need to have snapshots you may create snapshots by the Web GUI or CLI commands Detailed information about GUI and CLI can be found in 2 6 6 Snapshot Volumes on page 2 34 and 4 2 Basic RAID Management on page 4 7 respectively On Windows yo
120. Click Confirm to end the DST NOTE Hard disks must support DST Hard disks must not be executing DST For ATA disks the SMART must be turned on For ATA disks if SMART is turned off during DST execution DST will be aborted During DST execution accessing the hard disks may lead to performance degradation For scheduling DST the disk must be either unused a global spare a local spare or a JBOD For redundant controller system only The DST may not continue after failover and the following error messages may pop up see 5 3 Redundant Controller on page 5 21 for more detailed information on failover e The self test was interrupted by the host with a hardware or software reset e Self test fail due to unknown error Users can simply re launch the DST process when encountering the above conditions Please note that some disks may continue the DST process without any problems 2 7 12 Array roaming Array roaming will be activated when hard disks are moved from one slot to another or from one controller fo a new controller This ensures that the new controller can be working at all times You can determine the way of array roaming through the Auto Array Roaming Control See 2 7 16 Miscellaneous on page 2 55 When the Auto Array Roaming Control option is enabled the configuration of the disks can be identified and restored and uncompleted tasks are automatically resumed 2 51 Using the
121. Configuration Utility click Start gt Programs gt VDS Provider gt Configure Tool assuming the VDS Provider is installed in its default path The table below describes the functions of the configuration utility System Exit Exit the program Jei Help Contents Open the help web page e p About Display the program version 5 74 Aulvanced Functions Functions ee Scan RAID Press the bar to scan the online RAID systems on systems in the the LAN and they will be displayed on the System LAN Panel Display the information of RAID system LE as System Help ENN Version 10 10 7 38 1 24 00 10 10 88 108 Ee IN 10 10 88 109 k 1 24 00 N 10 10 88 150 WVi 22 Betaso 10 10 100 1 10 10 88 3 10 10 10 11 10 10 10 17 10 10 6 19 10 10 9 25 10 10 7 37 10 10 99 71 10 10 99 77 10 10 7 120 10 10 99 121 10 10 7 121 10 10 88 123 MMM is L 2 BTT Bel IS T IS m al Figure 5 41 VDS Provider Configure screen e Register RAID systems 1 Click the Scan RAID systems in the LAN button to locate RAID systems on the LAN 2 Check the checkbox in the Ctrl column of the RAID system you want to register 3 For each checked RAID system a window pops up for you to enter the password 4 If all setting are done choose Exit to exit this program NOTE 1 At most 16 RAID systems are managed by single VDS Provider 2 If th
122. Configurations FC SAS ports and COM port settings Event Allows you to configure event mail event logs Management and UPS settings Allows you to erase or restore the NVRAM System E i configurations set up the mail server update the Management 7 firmware and boot code and so on Performance Allows you to check the IO statistics of hard disks Management caches LUNs and FC SAS ports Before configuration read Understanding RAID thoroughly for RAID management operations Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI 2 5 Quick Setup 2 5 1 Performance profile The RAID GUI provides three performance profiles for you to apply the preset settings to the RAID configuration This allows users to achieve the optimal performance for a specified application When using a profile for the RAID configuration any attempt to change the settings is rejected See the following table for the values of each profile Select Off if you want to configure the settings manually Profile AV streamin MAAMONG MOMMU 9 per second throughput Disk IO Retry U 1 1 Count Degrade 2 Disk IO Timeout 3 second Degrade 10 pa Bad Block Retry Off On On Bad Block Alert On N A N A Disk Cache On On On Write Cache On On On Write Cache Periodic Flush 5 5 5 second Write Cache Flush Ratio 2 a9 Read Ahead Adaptive Off Adaptive Policy Read Ahead Multiplier j ve Read Logs 32 32
123. D Ox205e Defrag progress Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Notify threshold Message Defrag progress y on DGx reach to the notify percent z r The progress of defragmentation has reached the pre define Description threshold Advice None Volume expansion Event ID Ox202a Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters VOL ID Message VOLx expanded Description Volume capacity expansion on volx was completed Hosts might need to rescan the LUN of the volume to get the Advice updated capacity and the partitions or file systems on the vol ume has to be grown to access the newly created space Disk cloning Event ID Ox2015 DISK ID Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters DISK ID Message Clone from HDDx to HDDy started Description Disk cloning from hddx to hddy was started manually Advice None Appendix Event ID 0x2034 DISK ID Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DISK ID Message Clone from HDDx to HDDy auto started Disk cloning from hddx to hddy was started by SMART warning Description BBR over threshold event or by schedule Advice None Event ID 0x2048 DISK ID Type TASK Severity WARNING Parameters DISK ID Message Clone from HDDx to HDDy failed to auto start Description Auto disk cloning from hddx to hddy failed to start Check if
124. DG ID and an LD ID from the drop down menu for migration Expanding The controller performs disk group expansion with HDDs specified hard disks RAID Level The controller performs the specified RAID level migration The feasibility of migration is limited to the original and final RAID level and the number of member disks in the disk group The following table defines the rules of the number disks during the RAID migration Table 2 11 Limitations of the number of member disks RAID 10 RAID 3 5 OK OK N A N A Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI Table 2 11 Limitations of the number of member disks RAID 10 Nn gt No 2 Nn No 1 2 Nn No 2 2 RAID 3 5 Nn gt Not Nn gt No OK RAID 6 Nn gt No 2 Nn gt Not Nn gt No Where Nn means the number of member disks in the new RAID level No means the number of member disks in the original old RAID level OK means the migration is always possible and N A means the migration is disallowed Stripe Size KB This option must be specified when migrating from a non striping based RAID level to a striping based RAID level Schedule Immediately The task will start immediately Once The task will start on the specified date and time Defragment Check this option to allow defragmentation during during migration migration 2 7 4 Expanding the capacity of logical disks in a disk group To
125. E There is almost no limitation to the maximum number of RAID systems registered to RAIDGuard Central 5 64 Aulvanced Functions Functions 5 6 6 RGC GUI Overview e Login To launch RGC GUI you may click the Launch RGC GUI button on the RGC Server monitor screen You can also access the GUI remotely with a web browser by entering the URL http RGC IP xxxx RGCG where RGC IP is the IP address of the computer running RGC Server and xxxx is the port of the RGC web server is listening to NOTE 1 The RGC GUI is a java based software utility Each time you open the RGC GUI a java webpage displays which is used to run the java applet Then a warning message pops up for digital signature verification Click Run to enter the login screen Please always keep the webpage used to run the java applet open or minimized in the task bar so that you can view and use the RGC GUI properly After logging into the RGC Gul the following screen displays eo LH RAIDGuard Central GUI ystem Security Language Help 1 Menu Bar gt 2 10 10 1 233 Structure tree Wait for operation a la A AN Left Panel System Panel Figure 5 34 RGC GUI main screen 5 65 Advanced Functions Functions The following table describes each menu bar item tool bar button left panel and system panel contents in this screen Menu Bar System Exit Exit the program Change Password Change the password
126. G Parameters Controller ID Message Bad block on secondary system flash over 70 in controller y ar The amount of bad blocks is over 70 of the table that is used to Description remap bad blocks Advice Check if there are any hardware hazards that lead to bad blocks This flash chip is close to fail Controller In Dual Controller Configuration Event ID Ox242e Type CONTROLLER Severity ERROR Parameters Controller ID Message Controller x failed One of the controllers failed was removed or powered off while Description the other controller remains working This happens only in dual controller configuration Advice res if the power supply is stable Replace with a new control Event ID Ox242f Type CONTROLLER Severity ERROR Parameters Controller ID Message Controller x returned Description The failed controller has been replaced and back to work D 50 Appendix D 6 Enclosure D 51 Temperature Event ID 0x2800 Sensor ID l Enclosure ID Type ENCLOSURE Severity NOTICE Parameters Tempera ture Temperature at sensor x in enclosure y back to normal z c Message Temperature at sensor x in controller back to normal z c Description The temperature at sensor x in enclosure y or controller returned E to normal working temperature range right now is z C Advice If the temperature is very unstable contact l
127. GUI of each RAID system s Consolidating event logs of multiple RAID systems RAIDGuard Central keeps monitoring the RAID systems and stores the event log from the RAID systems To local files You can browse the event logs of the RAID systems registered in RAIDGuard Central to know the complete event history or to export the event log to files Because the old event logs stored on the controller will eventually be overwritten by latest events due to limited space of NVRAM using RAIDGuard Central can help to keep as many event logs as you need e Support multiple network segments When RAID systems are located at different network segments RAIDGuard Central can still monitor these RAID systems and collect their event logs by introducing one RAIDGuard Central Agent for each network segment RAIDGuard Central Agent bridges between the RAID systems in the same local network and RAIDGuard Central and performs RAID system discovery and monitoring on behalf of RAIDGuard Central e Enable access to web GUI of RAID systems in private networks RAIDGuard Central and its agents forward the transactions of web GUI access between a web browser and the RAID systems located in a private network You can use the web GUI for RAID system remote monitoring and full function management of a RAID system even if the local network of the RAID system uses virtual IP addresses e Instant event notification by MSN messages IM Instant Messaging services have bec
128. Host 3 gt Host Group 1 Map LUNs to host groups DGOLDO and DGOLD1 gt Host Group 0 DG1LDO and DGILD1 gt Host Group 1 5 5 Advanced Functions Functions e Clustered MPIO Host Computers For clustered host computers sharing single RAID system the storage is to be accessed simultaneously by all host computers In such case one host group should be created for all host computers and a host group should include all HBA ports on all clustered host computers So all host computers can have the same LUN mappings from all paths Figure 5 27 illustrates two clustered servers sharing single RAID system with multi path I O Both servers see the same two LUNs DGOLDO and DGOLD1 each of which has two paths _ Host Group 0 _ Pla lad r s Pig Server Server2 gt A with Pathguard installed with Pathguard installed Fibre Switch SAN EET o00000 o00000 200000 Storage Group for Host Group 0 Figure 5 2 Clustered server environment The table below shows the configuration steps for Figure 5 27 Tasks Instructions Select Storage Provisioning RAID Management gt Storage method Provisioning gt Symmetric 5 6 Advanced Functions Functions Add WWPN of HBAs to hosts HBAO WWPN gt Host O HBA1 WWPN gt Host 1 HBA2 WWPN gt Host 2 HBA3 WWPN gt Host 3 Add hosts to one host group
129. Host O and Host 1 gt Host Group O Host 2 and Host 3 gt Host Group U Map LUNs to host groups DGOLDO and DGOLD1 gt Host Group 0 DG1LDO and DGILD1 gt Host Group 0 5 1 4 Windows Multi Path Solution PathGuard PathGuard is the bundled multi path IO solution for Windows platforms and it is based on Microsoft Multipath I O MPIO framework PathGuard consists of MPIO drivers and a web based path manager GUI that allows you to manage MPIO configurations for multiple host computers The MPIO drivers include standard drivers from Microsoft and DSM Device Specific Module provided by the RAID system supplier For more information about Microsoft MPIO please visit the link below http www microsoft com windowsserver2003 technologies storage mpio default mspx The following steps are required for enabling PathGuard MPIO 1 Complete the hardware and software setup at RAID systems 2 Install the PathGuard package to the host computer 3 Register the vendor name and model name of your RAID system to the PathGuard optional 4 Install the PathGuard MPIO driver 5 Reboot the host computer 6 Launch PathGuard GUI to set multi path policies Windows MPIO framework requires rebooting the host computer when enabling the MPIO driver on the host computer such that the regular disk device drivers will be replaced by the MPIO disk drivers Windows can properly detect multi path disks only during MPIO driver installation
130. I features a side button for a quick on line system view The side button is always on the left side of the screen so that you can click to view all the other on line systems at anytime Move the cursor over the side button and the multiple system viewer appears see Figure 2 5 ae a A Ta Monitor Mode 3 0 2 G e Ian Q System Name unknown Controller Name 0 S FAN Version V1 10 Beta5 SSSR Boot Code Version 1 01 Accusys Figure 2 4 Multiple system viewer side button 2 3 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI 2 4 SS LL 51 rri Ew wmWh DD BF 5 W0 U CEERI 10 10 88 109 edward 10 10 88 123 unknown 10 10 99 71 unknown 10 10 99 77 Marphy 93100 10 10 99 121 10 10 99 125 unknown 10 10 100 1 unknown System Name unknown Accusys Controller Name ctl0 S pas a FAW Version V1 24 00 SERA SS 0 Boot Code version 1 03 Figure 2 5 Opening the multiple system viewer Move the cursor to a system and the following system information will appear IP address System name Model name Firmware version and Status Click on a system to open its GUI and you can login to view the complete system information If there are too many on line systems displayed in the viewer at one time you can use the arrow buttons to scroll up and down Click the G button to refresh the viewer Move y
131. ID systems by RGC GUI When there are new RAID systems installed to a network with an RGC Agent you need to use RGC to rescan the network To discover and register the new RAID systems When there are new RGC Agents you will need to add these RGC Agents to your RGC Server by RGC GUI If RAID systems are attached to a private network with virtual IP address the computer running RGC Agent for this network must have a real IP address such that RGC Server can communicate with the RGC Agent NO 5 60 Aulvanced Functions Functions This can be done by creating a mapping in the gateway of the network and assign a real IP address to the computer Note that when there is constant heavy network traffic the communication between RGC components would be influenced and the operations would become slow When the network connection between RGC Server and RGC Agents is down the status and the latest events of the RAID systems managed by the RGC Agents will not be visible But after the network connection is recovered the RGC Server will synchronize its local event database with the event logs on the RAID systems For easing the management you may also consider dividing the RAID systems into two or more domains and install one RGC Server for each domain But note that one RGC Agent can be accessed by only one RGC Server To avoid discontinued monitoring because of the failure at the monitoring sites you may set up two RGC Servers to monito
132. LUN to force the operating systems to flush cached data and to avoid I O access when the snapshot is taken 5 43 Advanced Functions Functions 5 44 Dealing with Identical Data Images at Hosts Some operating systems and applications could get confused when seeing more than one identical volume at the same time In Windows if a volume is configured as a dynamic disk its snapshot volume will get the same Disk ID and the Windows Logical Disk Manager will malfunction when both volumes are present To avoid this problem it is advised to export the snapshot volumes to other host computers like a backup server However the type of operating systems to access the snapshot volumes should be capable of recognizing the data created by the host computer of the source volumes Retaining Permanent Data of Snapshots Because a snapshot volume serves I O by accessing the corresponding primary volume and secondary volume its reliability and performance also depends on the configurations of these two volumes The snapshot volume will crash if either of the two volumes is damaged To completely retain the data in the snapshot volume for data protection or to avoid performance degradation it is advised to copy the data from a snapshot volume to another volume or another RAID system Applications that need to keep the snapshot data for a long time like doing data mining compression or archival having an independent data image is more suitable
133. Message Write zero progress y on DGx reach to the notify percent z Description The progress of zeroing DG has reached the notify threshold Advice None Event ID 0x2066 Init prog ress DG ID Type RAID Severity NOTICE Parameters LD ID Notify threshold Message Logical disk init progress w on DGxLDy reach the notify per cent z Description The progress of initializing logical disk has reached the pre define threshold Advice None e Spare Event ID Ox0804 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters Disk ID Message Global spare HDDx added Description hddx was selected to be a global spare Advice None Appendix Event ID 0x0805 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters Disk ID Message Global spare HDDx removed Description Global soare hddx was changed to be an unused disk Advice None Event ID 0x1002 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters a e Message Local soare HDDx of DGy added Description hddx was selected as local spare of dgy Advice None Event ID 0x1003 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters a ee Message _ Local spare HDDx of DGy removed Description dgy s local spare hddx was removed Advice None Rebuild Event ID Ox2000 Type RAID Severity NOTICE
134. NFORM event notification Traps are unreliable because the receiver does not send any acknowledgment when it receives a trap An SNMP manager that receives an INFORM request acknowledges the message with an SNMP response PDU However some SNMP applications may not support SNMPv2c Community Name public default Set up the community name in the event notification packets such that your SNMP applications can know how to process it Severity Level Notice default Warning Error Fatal Events with a severity level higher than the specified one will be sent via SNMP traps Remove SNMP Servers Select the SNMP server s you want to delete and click Remove The selected SNMP server s are deleted Modify SNMP Servers Select the SNMP you want to change for the settings and then click Modify to enter the settings screen Send a Test SNMP Trap Select the SNMP server s to which a test SNMP trap will be sent and click SNMP The test SNMP trap will contain message This trap is for testing purpose only NOTE In a redundant controller system both controllers send out SNMP event notification packets for one event e SNMP MIB Definition A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of information that is organized hierarchically MIBs are accessed using a network management protocol such as SNMP They are comprised of managed objects and are identified by object identifiers lf a vendor RAID controlle
135. O size of single I O access But if you still need software striping use the maximum stripe size for example 256KB for MAC OS striping breadth There could be also options provided by the operating systems and HBA drivers for you to increase the maximum O size 4 Ensure aligned I O access The RAID controller can process I O requests more efficiently if I O is aligned with the RAID stripe size or cache unit size For x86 systems file data of a file system like NTFS starts after the MBR Master Boot Record which occupies the first 63 sectors of a LUN see 2 6 RAID Management on page 2 21 So the alignment offset option of a LUN is needed to set 63 or 191 sectors for NTFS However it works only for your first partition in a LUN When creating partitions on Windows 2003 and later you may use the Disk Partition Toll Dispart exe with the option align N to force the partition to start at the specified alignment offset To ensure all data chunks are aligned you need also to make the NTFS allocation size equal to or bigger than the RAID stripe size 5 Ensure I O access fits striping data size When you set the write cache of a RAID5 LUN as write through data written to only a stripe of a RAIDS data row causes reading the old data and parity to calculate the new parity is necessary But if all the stripes of a data row are written with new data then the new parity can be produced with only the new data An example to do so is the opt
136. PS delay power off in seconds b xxsec UPS delay power on in seconds Performance management 4 6 1 Hard disks Command hddstat Synopsis hddstat on off reset Description Change the setting of hard disk IO logging Command hddliststat Synopsis hddliststat hddx Description List hard disk IO statistics 4 6 2 Cache Command cachestat Synopsis cachestat on off reset Description Change the setting of cache IO logging Command cachestatlist Synopsis cachestatlist volx dgxldy jbdx all Description List cache IO statistics 4 6 3 LUN Command lunstat Synopsis lunstat on off reset Description Change the setting of LUN IO logging Command lunliststat Synopsis lunliststat sgxluny fcpxluny sasxluny scpxidylunz hgxluny Description List LUN IO statistics 4 29 Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands 4 6 4 Storage ports Command fcpstat Synopsis fcpstat on off reset Description Enable or clear FC port statistics Command fcpliststat Synopsis fcpliststat fcpx Description List FC port IO statistics Command sasstat Synopsis sasstat on off reset Description Enable or clear SAS port statistics Command sasliststat Synopsis sasliststat fcpx Description List SAS port IO statistics 4 30 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands 4 7 Redundant Controller Configurations
137. Parameters DG ID Message Rebuilding on DGx started Description Disk rebuilding on dgx was started Advice None Event ID Ox2001 Type RAID Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Message Rebuilding on DGx completed Description Disk rebuilding on dgx was completed Advice None Event ID 0x2002 Type RAID Severity WARNING Parameters DG ID Message Rebuilding on DGx aborted Description Disk rebuilding on dgx was aborted Advice None unang Event ID 0x2063 Rebuild progress Type RAID Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Notify threshold Message Rebuild progress y on DGx reach to the notify percent z Description The progress of rebuilding has reached the pre define threshold Advice None e Roaming Event ID 0x0820 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters Message Disks changed during power off The number of disks installed is different when the controller was Description powered off Either existing disks were removed or new disks were installed during power off Advice Check hard disk status and conduct roaming or recovery if nec essary Event ID 0x1004 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters DG ID Message DGxis imported Description Foreign disk group has been imported to be dgx Advice None Event ID Ox1c02 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters VOL ID Message VOLx is
138. RAID system is powered up with only one controller installed the system will be operating in the single controller mode and there is no event or beeper alert because of the absence of the peer controller But if the other controller is installed the system will be operating in redundant controller mode While enabling the mirror write cache protects the data integrity disabling this option may cause data loss when the controller is failover but allows better write performance For the purpose of data protection it is suggested to turn this option on 5 3 2 Controller Data Synchronization When running in a redundant environment two controllers will automatically synchronize the configuration data event logs task progress data system time and firmware See further details as described below e Configuration data The controller s configurations and states are synchronized between two controllers There are two copies of one identical configuration data in the two controller Updating the two copies of configuration data should be considered as an atomic operation e Event logs The event logs are mirrored between controllers Users can view the event logs even one of controllers is failed The SMTP and SNMP configuration will be also the same across the master and slave controllers Should the master controller is failed to send the event notification the system will try to send it through the slave controller and vice versa
139. RAIDGUL the RAID GUI Some hard disk configurations may cause conflicts when moved to a new controller You are allowed to view group information including the virtual disk and hard disk states from the Array Roaming page NOTE At the top of the page you can select the group id and the group type JBOD disk disk group or volume for the information to be displayed Each group type will have different columns on this page To import the foreign conflict disks click the Import button and specify the following options Target ID Select an ID which may be a JBOD ID disk group ID or volume ID to be used after import Members Select the foreign conflict hard disks to be imported and restored the configurations Use the arrow buttons to move the hard disks from the Available Members list to the Selected Members list Force toimport Check this option to allow the import of abnormal incomplete disk groups Without this option only group normal disk groups and volumes can be restored 2 7 13 Array recovery With the Array Recovery Utility ARU you can recover the disk groups logical disks and volumes To perform recovery you must fully understand the partition state of each logical disk A partition of a logical disk can be one of the following states OPTIMAL FAULTY REBUILD or UNTRUST Each state is described as below s OPTIMAL The partition is working and the data is valid s FAULTY The partit
140. RT prompt type Extend Size 5000 If you do not set a size such as the above example for 5 GB it will use all the available space on the current disk to extend the volume When the extend command is done you should receive a message stating that Diskpart had successfully extended the volume The new space should be added to the existing logical drive while maintaining the data Do shrink a partition Shrinking a partition can release free space for other partitions on the same LUN Or after the partition shrinking is done you may shrink the LUN to release free space for other LUNs Step1 At a command prompt type Diskpart exe Launches the utility Step2 At the DISKPART prompt type select disk 1 Selects the disk Step3 At the DISKPART prompt type select volume 1 Selects the volume Step4 At the DISKPART prompt type shrink desired 2000 If you do not set a size such as the above example for 2 GB it will shrink the partition by the maximum amount possible You may use shrink querymax command to know the maximum space that you can shrink 5 56 Adlvanced Functions Functions When the shrink command is done you should receive a message stating that Diskpart had successfully shrunk the volume The partition soace should be subtractive to the existing drive while maintaining the data on the volume and there will be Unallocated space created NOTE Rebooting the host computers might be needed so as to make
141. UI the RAID GUI Click amp to see a complete list of storage port information You will see the following details e HTP ID e TX RX Word e Primitives Sequence Protocol e LIP Count Error Count NOS Count s Second since last reset e TX RX Frame s Error Frame e Dumped Frame NOTE The information displayed is dependent on the installed FC chip Some chips do not support the provision of all storage port information 2 79 Using the LCD Console the LCD Consolel Chapter 3 Using the LCD Console 3 1 Starting LCD Manipulation The RAID system has a front LCD panel which supports a quick configuration and RAID monitoring You can use the four buttons on the LCD panel to manipulate the LCD configuration utility Each state and display sequence is illustrated as below 1 Boot up info fail y ready 4 Status info ge events c ESC 7 ESC password error E Press ESC or Press ESC i i Press A 2 Emergent info 2 7 Confirm password Press ENT Minute time out Clear Clear s passed Press UP DOWN to select items Press ESC ENT to enter exit sub menu Press ENT Press ESC sete Figure 3 1 LCD manipulation procedure Once the RAID system is powered on the booting information starts to display on the LCD panel If the system is ready status messages are displayed sequentially If not error messages are displayed and the system is halted See the details of status and emergent messages in t
142. W volume for the primary volume The spare COW volume serves as a buffer to accommodate written data of size larger than planned and allows you to expand size of the secondary volume later Although a spare COW volume can be used by any primary volume one spare COW volume can be used by one primary volume at a time For example if you have 5 39 Advanced Functions Functions one spare COW volume and you have two primary volumes with overflow problems then you can keep only the snapshots of the first primary volume that acquires the soare COW volume As a result it is advised to create multiple soare COW volumes if you have multiple primary volumes e Multiple Concurrent Snapshots A primary volume can have multiple snapshots at the same time The old data of snapshots at different points in time shares single secondary volume and spare COW volume Figure 5 15 shows the relationship of primary volume secondary volume and snapshot volumes However when there are snapshot volumes the COW operation would cause performance impact to the primary volume and access to the snapshot volume would take longer time because of data lookup overhead in the secondary volume You will experience more performance degradation when more snapshot volumes are being accessed at the same time Primary Volume Snapshot Volume 1 Snapshot Volume 2 Secondary Volume Snapshot Volume 3 Snapshot Volume 4 Figure 5 16
143. XX where x is 0 1 9 Use the UP and DOWN buttons to select the numbers 0 to 9 Press the ENT button to enter the number To cancel the selection backspace and return to the previous level if IP is empty press the ESC button 3 3 4 Terminal Port Settings To configure the settings of terminal port enter the Terminal Port menu Specify the following items one by one Baud Rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 default Stop Bit 1 default 2 Data Bit 7 8 default Parity NONE default ODD EVEN Flow control OFF default H W Use the UP and DOWN buttons fo scroll through the options Press the ENT button to select it To cancel the selection and return to the previous level press the ESC button 3 7 Using the LCD Console the LCD Console 3 3 5 System Settings In the System Setup menu users are allowed to change the password settings save or restore the configurations to NVRAM reboot and power off the system See the following table for details of each option Password Passwd ENABLE YES default NO Enable or disable the password check when logging in menu Change Passwd Key in the new password The maximum length of password is eight characters Press and hold the ESC button to backspace continuously and return to the previous level Save Config Save to NVRAM NO default YES Save configurations to NVRAM Restart NO default YES Reboot the system
144. _2pm 2 Delete a snapshot acs_snap win32 Vx xx exe delete PhysicalDrive2 db_2pm 3 Flush cache acs_snap win32 Vx xx exe flush F 4 List snapshot information acs_snap win32 Vx xx exe list F The lt device gt denotes the name of drive acs_snap win32 Vx xx to carry on the command It could be either logical drive letter C D F or PhysicalDrivex where x is the number of the physical drive given by Windows When creating a snapshot its name lt snapshot_name gt cannot be repeated within the same source volume because lt snapshot_name gt is used as the identifier of the snapshot Scripting Snapshot Operations To illustrate using script in a SAN based backup application consider the SAN environment in Figure 5 24 LAN Host A Backup Server Figure 5 17 SAN Environment The script below is to be executed by the backup server and it backs up the SQL server on the remote Windows 2003 hosts 1 Net stop mssqlserver 2 rcmd 192 168 0 1 C snapshot acs_snap flush D 3 rcmd 192 168 0 1 C snapshot acs_snap create D sql_shot 4 Net start mssqlserver 5 RAID CLI to export the snapshot LUN to the backup server 6 Mount the snapshot LUN on the backup server use mountvol 7 Backup Software CLI to run the backup operations 8 rcmd 192 168 0 1 C snapshot acs_snap delete D sql_shot 5 46 Advanced Functions Functions e Automating Snapshot Operations With this utility together with the instructions to st
145. a disk group is managed as free chunks When there is no logical disk on a disk group all the available space forms a free chunk Later free chunks are created when you delete logical disks or shrink the capacity of logical disks but adjacent free chunks will be merged automatically You can use free chunks for creating new logical disks or expanding a logical disk A logical disk has to use contiguous space on a disk group so you need to merge all free chunks into one by the disk group defragmentation utility which starts a background task to move the data of all logical disks on the disk group to the beginning space of the hard disks such that all free space is consolidated to form single free chunk located at the ending space of the hard disks Two common scenarios are illustrated as below Disk group expansion to expand the last existing free chunk 5 50 Adlvanced Functions Functions All existing free chunks except the one at the end of the disk group are deleted and the last free chunk is expanded LD0 LD0 free chunk 0 LD 1 eee disk group ry mo free chunk 0 free chunk 2 DG Figure 5 18 Defragment a disk group a expand the last free chunk e Defragment a disk group to consolidate free chunks All existing free chunks are deleted and a single free chunk at the end of the disk group is created LD0 yy LD0 free chunk 0 LD 1 disk group Lor LD1 defragment LD2 free chunk 1 e LD2 free
146. a virtual disk The controller that controls a virtual disk is the owner controller of the virtual disk When both controllers are healthy and all paths are online the owner controller is the same as the preferred controller There are two possible cases that the preferred controller loses the ownership of a virtual disk to the peer controller 1 lf a controller fails the survival controller will take over the ownership of all virtual disks of the faulty controller 2 When all the paths to a controller are disconnected the MPIO driver will force the virtual disks to transfer to the other controller NOTE To get best performance make all LDs in a DG have the same preferred controller and evenly distribute DGs between the two controllers The preferred controller is soecified when a virtual disk is created and it can be changed later by users see the Preferred Controller option in Section 2 6 2 2 6 4 and 2 6 5 for modifying JBOD disk logical disk and volume respectively But the owner controller is changed dynamically according to the current path and controller status NOTE Once the a virtual disk has been exported to host as a LUN ona controller the owner controller can be changed only after restart the controller and the Change owner controller immediately option is not displayed Single controller mode in redundant controller system 5 22 Aulvanced Functions Functions If a redundant controller
147. agmenting disk groups on page 2 43 to put them together RAID level and strip size migration Changing RAID level of a logical disk see 2 7 3 Changing RAID level stripe size for logical disks on page 2 44 will significantly affect the performance reliability and space utilization For example you may add one disk to a two disk RAID 1 disk group and change its RAID level to RAID 5 such that you can have a three disk RAID 5 disk group offering usable space of two disks On the other hand changing stripe size affects only the performance and you may do as many online experiments as possible to get the performance you want Schedule a task You won t want the performance degradation during the execution of the online maintenance utilities which very like need non trivial amount of time To avoid such impact you re allowed to schedule a task execution to any time you want see 2 7 14 Schedule task on page 2 54 like during off duty hours You can get event notifications when the task is done or unfortunately fails or at a user configurable percentage of the task progress see 2 7 16 Miscellaneous on page 2 55 1 15 Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI Chapter 2 Using the RAID GUI 2 1 Accessing the RAID GUI 1 Open a browser and enter the IP address in the address field The default IP address is 192 168 0 1 You can use the FW customization tool to set another IP address as the default The supported browsers are listed
148. ails cine yeh cee able 2 47 2 7 6 Cloning hard diSkS gists chest hee de el ele ieee 2 47 WANT Scrubbing aoee i Vern Meets arr teenie ty aA es nner oN 2 49 2 7 10 Regenerating the parity eee eee 2 50 2 7 11 Performing disk Self test eee 2 50 2 AZ UA eTel eise Dani ht eo et lh hd fail ek a colitis 2 51 Dad e PART AY MECOV CIN Sic ease atte i ete etd ele deters aN cane dus eee ek eile 2 52 2 14 Sched le task ier ite e e a a hails chads cle nalts 2 54 2 7 15 Cache Configurations see 2 54 2 0 VO Miscellaneous cuinnein ieii bin Ses eee 2 55 2 8 Hardware Configurations sss sese 2 56 2 8 1 Harddisks cinn n a ale tacaveau aise aes ail an ete aes 2 56 22012 FP GIS Polo Ol DONS atheist tod fait cc ih ad el hed fol Oe eeu fats 2 59 Ze SOON POM TTT 2 60 2 9 Event Management cise h ci cuetde tec cccen etisalat ee ated ace leeds 2 61 2 9 1 Setting up the SMTP xcscusce ncenennee enn Sine 2 61 2 9 2 Setting up the SNMP see 2 62 29 3 Event logs e a e E E e EE E E Ee E aaa EEE 2 64 2 DA IP Sis a ade e a ate tae E ae ean aed E 2 66 S Re VIISCE IANO OUS xt bocca a ht 8 fed ail Lites 2 67 2 10 System Managements naz voz zevot esy Tev vr ZKO YGZ gS Ey esk yy cgo 2 68 2 10 1 Restoring to factory settings eee eee eee 2 68 2 10 2 NVRAM configuration sse eee eee 2 68 2 10 3 Setting up the network sese 2 70 2 104 System TIM soca aea a cies eek Aah ted rar ae eee cue 2 71 2 10 5 Security control sacar a a aden 2 72 2 10 6 System information sss essere 2 73 2
149. al disk Use the provided PathGuard package to install and use the MPIO driver For more information see 5 1 Multi Path lO Solutions In this case the controller s performance is highly elevated You need not consider different host ports because the bindings between hosts and storage groups are applied to all host ports As the illustration shows LUNs are assigned according to each host s WWPN World Wide Port Name Therefore you need to set the host WWPN first Each host can recognize LUNs as paths to virtual disks instead of individual disks To set up symmetric storage groups first add host s MPIO Environment Figure 2 21 Symmetric storage Add hosts In the symmetric storage main screen click Host gt Add Host ID Select a Host ID from the drop down menu A maximum of 32 hosts can be added to the controller Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI WWPN Each FC port needs a WWPN for communicating with other devices in an FC domain Users can choose each WWPN of Fiber HBA from the Choose from detected hosts box or directly enter the WWPN in this field SAS Address For SAS controller each SAS port needs a SAS Address for communicating with other devices in an SAS domain Host Name Use the system default name as hostx x is the Host identifier OR Uncheck the Use system default name box and enter the name in the Name field The maximum nam
150. al disk or volume If a virtual disk is part of other virtual disk then it cannot be exported to LUNs 1 9 Antrontuction e LUN mapping A LUN mapping is a set of mapping relationships between LUNs and virtual disks in the controller Computer systems can access the LUNs presented by the controller after inquiring host ports of the controller 1 5 User Interfaces to Manage the RAID System A variety of user interfaces and utilities are offered for managing the RAID systems and you may choose TO use one or multiple of them that suit your management purposes Introduction to these interfaces and utilities is described as below e Web based GUI chapter 2 Web based GUI is accessed by web browsers after proper setup of the network interfaces It offers an at a glance monitoring web page and full function system management capability in structured web pages It is advised to use the web based GUI to fully unleash the power of RAID system if you are a first time user e SNMP Manager section 2 9 2 Setting up the SNMP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a widely used protocol based on TCP IP for monitoring the health of network attached equipments The RAID controller is equipped with an embedded SNMP Agent to support SNMP based monitoring You can use SNMP applications SNMP v1 or v2c compliant at remote computers to get event notification by SNMP traps and watch the status of a RAID system e LCD Console chapter 3
151. al disks can be in the same disk group None of the logical disks can be used by other volumes None of the logical disks can be bound to any LUNs All logical disks must be in the optimal state All disk groups of the logical disks must belong to the same owner controller NO Ln amp LU 3 Click Apply to view the current settings 4 Click Confirm to continue the expansion 2 7 7 Shrinking volumes The shrink operation conducts without background task it simply reduces the capacity of the volume by removing the concatenating volume units To release free space of a volume do the following 1 Select Maintenance Utilities gt LD Reconfiguration from the main menu 2 Select Shrink and specify the following options for a VOL shrink task VOL ID Select a VOL ID from the drop down menu for shrink Shrinking VUs Select member VUs you want to remove from the list and use the arrow buttons to move them to the Shrinking VUs list NOTE The volume must be in optimal state There must be at least two concatenating volume units in a volume All selected volume units must be the last concatenating volume units in the volume 3 Click Apply to view the current settings 4 Click Confirm to continue the shrink 2 7 8 Cloning hard disks 2 47 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI When a hard disk is likely to be come faulty or develop errors for example when the number of reported err
152. all logical disks sequentially from the first to the last logical disks and sequentially according to the order specified by the administrator respectively e Flexible hot spare policy Hot spare disks are standby disks that are used for replacing faulty disks by rebuilding the data of the faulty disks Soare disks can be configured as local spare dedicated to specific disk group or global spare shared by alll disk groups Users can also enable the auto spare option to force the spare disk returns to standby after the faulty disks are replaced by newer disks This helps to control the physical organization of hard disks in the chassis B 5 Dynamic Configuration Migration Business and users needs are dynamic and the storage systems are required to be aligned dynamically with the business requirements As a result the administrators need to reconfigure the storage from time to time The RAID controllers are equipped with extensive utilities for online migration of the RAID configurations while retaining the system availability Without the online reconfiguration utilities unwanted system downtime and efforts for offline manual reconfiguration will stop the administrator from optimizing the storage e Online disk group expansion Expanding a disk group by adding hard disks to be its member disks enlarges the usable capacity of a disk group and more logical disks can be created from the disk group An administrator can start a disk group
153. alling the RAIDGuard Central Follow the steps below to uninstall the RAIDGuard Central from the host server Windows OS platform 1 Click Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs Locate RAIDGuard Central and click Remove to begin uninstallation 2 An uninstallation message pops up Click Yes fo continue or No to abort 3 The uninstaller starts to remove the RAIDGuard Central from your computer Mac Linux OS platform To uninstall the RAIDGuard Central from your Mac or Linux operating system simply delete the folder where the RAIDGuard Central program files are located 5 6 5 Launching the RAlDGuard Central 5 62 When the installation is finished launch the RGC Server and RGC Agent monitor screens as described below In Windows OS Go to Start gt Programs gt RAIDGuard Central gt RAIDGuard Central or RAIDGuard Agent In Mac OS Go to Application gt RAIDGuard Central gt RGC jar or RGCAgent jar In Linux OS You can use either of the following ways to launch the RGC Server and RGC Agent e Run the Linux terminal and type in the following commands to execute the RGC Server and RGC Agent java installation directory java jar RGC jar or java installation directory java jar RGCAgent jar By default the java application is installed in usr java jdk1 6 0_01 bin The default installation directory depends on the JRE version and the operating system in use e Double click th
154. also schedule periodic maintenance tasks to do disk scrubbing see 2 7 9 Scrubbing on page 2 49 for defected sectors recovery or to do disk self tests see 2 7 11 Performing disk self test on page 2 50 1 13 Antrontuction Miscellaneous settings There are also minor settings that you might need to do like checking UPS see 2 9 4 UPS on page 2 66 time setup see 2 10 4 System Time on page 2 71 changing password strongly suggested and etc Saving the configurations If you ve done all the configurations please save the configurations to files human readable text file for your own reference and binary file for restoring the configurations if any disaster happens 1 7 Maintaining the RAID System Properly configuring RAID systems is a good starting point but you need to do regular checking and reconfiguration to make sure your RAID systems are healthy and delivering the best throughout the lifetime e Constantly monitoring RAID system health You can quickly get an overview of the RAID system health by accessing the monitoring page of the Web GUI see 2 2 Monitor Mode on page 2 5 You probably need to do so only when receiving event notification email or traps All the events are described in the Appendix D each of which has suggested actions for your reference You need to watch the status of chassis components like fans power supply units battery module and controller module You need also check the status of har
155. ameters Host Port ID Message Host port x detected CRC error during Data Out phase Description CRC error was detected during data out phase Advice None Event ID 0x301c Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x transfer count mismatch The amount of data that the target actually transferred does not Description match the DataLength The amount of data was specified in the TargetAssist request message Advice None Event ID 0x301d Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x data offset error Description Data was received with a data offset that was not expected Advice None unang Event ID Ox301e Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x too much write data aT More than the expected amount of write data was received Description from the initiator Advice None Event ID Ox301f Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x IU too short Description A received information unit was shorter than the value allowed by the protocol specification Advice None Event ID 0x3020 Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x EEDP Guard Error eas The data in an end to end data protection I O failed the CRC Description guar
156. an the stripe size of any logical disks managed by the RAID controller The conflict might also be because there has been a disk group with the same disk group ID of the hard disks You can use Array Roaming Utilities see 2 7 12 Array roaming on page 2 51 to import the hard disks to form a disk group with a new disk group ID Other configuration conflicts might be caused incompatible firmware version You re required to erase the configuration information on the hard disks for your RAID system to use the hard disks Or contact your system supplier for solutions 6 Disk group enters degraded mode Make sure that there are member disks available Use the Array Recovery Utility to restore the disks to the degraded disk group see 2 7 13 Array recovery on page 2 52 7 Faulty logical disks or volumes cannot be recovered You are required to recover a disk group before recovering its logical disks And similarly to recover a volume you re required to recover its logical disks 6 7 Redundant Controller and MPIO 1 The replacement controller stops boot up with LCD messages When a replacement controller is online installed to the RAID system the two controllers will synchronize with each other If there is configuration conflict discovered see Section 5 2 the replacement controller will stop boot up The beeper alerts and the LCD shows the following messages A CONTR MOD UNEQ the two controllers are of different model B DB
157. and time every week Monthly The task will start on the specified date and time every month 3 Click Apply The task will start according to the specified time To stop parity regeneration do the following 1 Select the task s and click Stop A confirmation prompt displays Click Confirm to stop the parity regeneration task 2 7 11 Performing disk self test This feature instructs the hard disks to start or stop short or extended disk self test DST The test performs a quick scan for bad sectors To execute this function make sure the SMART warning has been turned on See 2 8 1 Hard disks on page 2 56 Follow the steps below to start a disk self test 1 Select Maintenance Utilities gt Disk Self Test from the main menu Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI 2 Select the hard disks you want to perform the disk self test and click DST Specify the following options Schedule Immediately The task will start immediately Once The task will start on the specified date and time Weekly The task will start on the specified day and time every week Monthly The task will start on the specified date and time every month Perform Check this option to start an extended disk self extended disk test Without this option the hard disks perform self test short disk self test 3 Click Confirm to begin testing To stop the DST of a hard disk select it and click Stop A confirmation prompt displays
158. and ctlname Synopsis ctlname ctlx controller_name Description Set the controller name Command sysname Synopsis sysname system_name Description Set the system name Command ctllist Synopsis ctllist ctlx r Description List the controller related information Parameters r for redundant controller only Show internal controller status 4 9 5 Miscellaneous Command restart Synopsis restart h c ctlx b e Description Restart or halt the controller h halt without restart c ctlx for redundant controller only restart only one controller Parameters l b for redundant controller only effective for both controllers e effective for all external enclosures 4 37 Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands Command beeper Synopsis beeper on off mute Description Review or set the beeper Command fwupdate Synopsis fwupdate image bin b c ctlx Description Upload the firmware image or update the boot code with the file image bin b update boot code Parameters c ctlx for redundant controller only target controller to update Command fwupdateprog Synopsis fwupdateprog c ctlx Description List the current firmware update progress Parameters c ctx for redundant controller only target controller to get firmware update progress Command batterylist Synopsis batte
159. and f S sector The accumulated transfer size of write commands since Read Cache Hit the disk was powered on The number of cache hits by read commands since the system was powered on Merged Write The number of merged writes write hits since the system was powered on Dirty Buffer The number of dirty buffers in the cache at present Clean Buffer The number of clean buffers in the cache at present 2 11 3 LUN This feature allows you to enable disable or reset LUN IO logging When LUN IO logging is enabled the following IO statistics of a LUN depending on the storage presentation method selected will be displayed You can press the Reset button to clear all statistics except outstanding IO to zero Category Display ID Storage group and LUN identifier The number of read commands executed since the Read disk was powered on Command sector The accumulated transfer size of read commands since the disk was powered on f The number of write commands executed since the Write disk was powered on Command sector The accumulated transfer size of write commands since the disk was powered on Response Time ms The average command response time since the disk was powered on The maximum command response time since the disk was powered on Outstanding IO The number of current outstanding IO 2 77 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI NOTE Whe
160. and providing load balance among multiple host connections for higher availability and performance Together with active active redundant controller configuration the RAID system offers high availability without single point of failure Great Flexibility and Scalability Nowadays IT staff is required to make the most from the equipments purchased and thus easier sharing and better flexibility is a must for business class storage systems The RAID controller allows different RAID configurations like RAID levels stripe sizes and caching policies to be deployed independently for different logical units on single disk group such that the storage resources can be utilized efficiently by fulfilling different requirements As business grows or changes during the lifetime of storage systems the requirements are very likely to be changed and the users need to reconfigure the system to support the business dynamics while maintaining normal operations The RAID controller allows capacity expansion by adding more disk drives or expansion chassis 1 1 Antrontuction Comprehensive online reconfiguration utilities are available for migration of RAID level and stripe size volume management capacity resizing and free soace management e Outstanding Performance The RAID controller delivers outstanding performance for both transaction oriented and bandwidth hungry applications Its superscalar CPU architecture with L2 cache enables effici
161. and system code Support dual flash chips for protecting and recovering system code Support object naming and creation time logging NOTE The features may differ for different RAID system models and firmware version You may need to contact your RAID system supplier to get the updates 1 3 How to Use This Manual This manual is organized into the following chapters Chapter 1 Introduction provides a feature overview of the RAID system and some basic guidelines for managing the RAID system Chapter 2 Using the RAID GUI describes how to use the embedded GUI for monitoring and configurations with information helping you to understand and utilize the features Chapter 3 Using the LCD Console presents the operations of LCD console which helps you to quickly get summarized status of the RAID system and complete RAID setup using pre defined configurations Chapter 4 Using the CLI Commands tabulates all the CLI commands without much explanation Because there is no difference in functions or definitions of parameters between GUI and CLI you can study the GUI chapter to know how a CLI command works Chapter 5 Advanced Functions provides in depth information about the advanced functions of the RAID system to enrich your knowledge and elaborate your management tasks Chapter 6 TroubleShooting provides extensive information about how you can help yourself when encoutering any troubles 1 7 Antrontuction s Appen
162. ap v1 and V2c e Selective event logging and notification by severity level e Support redundant multiple email server and SNMP agents s Support multiple event recipients of email and SNMP trap e Support SNMP GET commands for monitoring via SNMP manager e Redundant Controller Functions model dependent e Support dual active active controller configuration e Online seamless controller failover and failback e Cache data mirroring with on off control option e Auto background task transfer during controller failover and failback e Support simultaneous access to single disk drive by two controllers s Online manual transfer preferred controller of a virtual disk e Uninterrupted system firmware upgrade e Snapshot Functions model dependent e Support copy on write compact snapshot e Instant online copy image creation and export e Instant online data restore rollback from snapshot e Support multiple active snapshots for single LUN 1 6 introduction Support read writable snapshot Support spare volume for overflow Support online snapshot volume expansion Support snapshot configuration roaming e Miscellaneous Supporting Functions Support configurations download and restore Support configurations saving to disks and restore Support password based multi level administration access control Support password reminding email Time management by RTC and Network Time Protocol NTP with DST Support controller firmware upgrade boot code
163. apshot com mands Chapter 5 Added 5 1 8 Multi path IO solu tion on SUN Solaris Modified 5 3 Snapshot contents Appendix D Modified D 10 snapshot events xxiii Ce Version Description Release Date 1 5 Chapter 6 2008 07 03 Modified content of all Chapter 5 Modified section 5 2 Move 5 2 2 Monitor Mode to 2 2 Move 5 2 2 SAS JBOD to 2 3 2 9 2 Added SNMP agent functions Added descriptions related SNMP MIB 5 3 5 Removed 5 3 6 Removed 5 3 7 Removed 2 6 6 Added descriptions related spare COW volumes functions Added descriptions related Restore functions Appendix C Revised the subtitles 2 10 4 Added a Note Chapter 1 Modified snapshot functions content Modified system monitoring func tions content Modified management inter faces content 1 4 Added Virtual disks descriptions 1 5 Added SNMP Manager descrip tions Appendix D Updated snapshot events Chapter 4 Updated CLI commands 2 7 15 Added a Note of mirrored write cache 2 1 Added browser support XXIV ES Version Description Release Date 1 6 Chapter 5 Modified section 5 2 Inserted Multiple ID solutions in section 5 2 2 2 3 Modified redundant controller RAID pictures 2 3 1 Modified redundant controller RAID pictures Added RAID model names 2 8 2 Modified description Added Controller Failover mode description 2008 11 14 E XXV
164. ations can mitigate this problem For example on Windows system it is advised to set the registry key below to 60 or 90 seconds HKEY LOCAL MACHINE System CurrentControlSet Services Disk Time OutValue A 1 RAID Overview The controller supports eleven types of RAID RAID O 1 3 5 6 10 30 50 60 JBOD and NRAID The application s you are using will determine which RAID setup is best for you e RAID Level 0 This level offers high transfer rates and is ideal for large blocks of data where speed is of the essence Computer Aided Design graphics scientific computing image and multimedia applications are all good examples If one drive in a RAID O array fails the entire data array is lost e RAID Level 1 This level may be an appropriate choice if cost and performance are of significantly less importance than fault tolerance and reliability e RAID Level 3 This level is similar to the more commonly used level 5 Both offer a good level of fault tolerance and overall system reliability at a reasonable cost for redundancy overhead RAID 3 is useful for large file sequential writes such as video applications e RAID Level 5 This level offers high I O transaction rates and is the ideal choice when used with on line transaction processing applications such as those used in banks insurance companies hospitals and all manner of office environments These applications typically perform large numbers of concurrent reque
165. aulty LD UPS On Batt UPS On Batt Only when upsconfig is on UPS connection is lost UPS Con Lost Only when upsconfig is on UPS should be replaced UPS RB Only when upsconfig is on UPS is overload UPS Overload Only when upsconfig is on UPS is off UPS Off Only when upsconfig is on Table 3 2 List of emergent messages 3 2 4 Background task messages Background tasks and their process percentages are displayed in Line 1 Line 2 shows the disk status Message formats are listed in the following Variables xx yy xx is the DG identifier yy is the LD identifier dgx DG identifier zz HDD z HDD identifier Xx x The progress of task with percentage estimate 3 4 Using the LCD Console the LCD Consolel Background Task Message Format LD Expand xx yy EXP XX xX LD Migrate xx yy Mig Xx x DG Defragment dgx Defrg xx x DG Expanding dgx Exp xx x Disk Cloning Clone Zz Xx x Disk Initializing xx yy lnl Xx x Disk Rebuilding Reb xx XX XT Disk HDD Scrubbing Scrub Zz Xx x LD Scrubbing xx yy SCT Xx x DG Scrubbing Regenerate LD Parity dgx Scr xx x Xx yy Par xx x Regenerate DG Parity dgx Par xx x Table 3 3 List of background task messages 3 2 5 Hotkeys There are four buttons on the LCD console UP DOWN ESC and ENT In addition to their basic functions they can be used in combination
166. ber of retries when a disk IO command fails The possible values are 0 to 8 Transfer Speed Auto default 1 5GB 3GB This option specifies the transfer soeed of a hard disk When Auto is specified the transfer soeed is determined by the controller according to the best transfer mode supported by the installed hard disks The option is available only for RAID controller with SATA disk interface Bad Block Alert On Off default This option enables or disables event alerts for bad block reallocation After selecting On four blank fields are displayed for you to specify the percentages of reserved bad block reallocation space The default values are 20 40 60 and 80 Bad BlockAlert On in 20 7 40 Rien so Bad Block Clone On in 50 Figure 2 23 Specify the percentage for Bad Block Alert NOTE 1 Latter percentages must be larger than the former percentages 2 Percentages must be integers between 1 and 100 Bad Block Clone On Off default This option enables or disables disk cloning for bad block reallocation After selecting On a blank field is displayed for you to specify the percentage of reserved bad block reallocation space When the specified space is reached disk cloning will be started The default value is 50 2 57 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI Bad Block Alet On in 120 40 60 80 Bad BlockClone On in 150 Figure 2 24 Specify t
167. ble to some hosts and unavailable to other hosts Access Right Read only Read writable The access right is applied to individual LUNs in a storage group Sector Size 512Byte 1KB 2KB 4KB Select a sector size from the drop down menu as the basic unit of data transfer in a host Number of Cylinder Define a specific cylinder head and sector to Number of Head accommodate different host systems and Number of Sector applications The default is Auto Write Completion Write behind Write commands are reported as completed when a host s data is transferred to the write cache Write through Write commands are reported as completed only when a host s data has been written to disk Remove LUNs in storage group Select the LUN s you want to delete and click Remove To remove alll LUNs of a virtual disk from all storage groups check the Remove mapping virtual disk from all storage group box Modify LUN storage group Select a LUN storage group you want to change for its mask status access right or storage group name and click Modify to enter the settings screen To configure the same settings to all LUNs in a storage group check the Apply to all LUNs in this storage group box Bind host host group and storage group to host ports Now you can click Bind in the selective storage main screen Select from the HTP ID Host HGID and SG ID drop down menu for binding Unbind hosts host grou
168. both controllers ctla and ctlb information will be shown on the screen 2 10 7 Battery backup module To view battery information ensure that a battery backup module is connected Select System Management gt Battery Backup Module from the main menu and the battery information will be displayed in this page Use the BBM Control option to turn on or off the BBM icon shown in the Monitor mode Battery Information e State s Remaining Capacity e Voltage V e Temperature C F e Non critical Temperature C F e Critical Temperature C F NOTE When the redundant controller system is in use both controllers ctla and ctlb battery information will be shown on the screen 2 73 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI 2 10 8 Update system firmware boot code and external enclosure F W To update the system s firmware boot code and external enclosure firmware do the following l 2 Select System Management gt Firmware Update from the main menu Specify the firmware type the current firmware boot code version and external enclosure amount will be also disolayed on screen s For firmware update click on the System firmware radio button s For boot code update click on the Boot Code radio button s For external enclosure firmware update click on the External enclosure firmware radio button and to choose enclosure ID number Click Browse to select an update file Click Apply
169. ccusys login Description Accusys login to the controller Advice None Event ID 0x2412 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message Accusys login failed Description Accusys failed to login to the controller Advice Check if there is any unauthorized trial access to the controller Events Event ID 0x0400 Type SYSTEM Severity FATAL Parameters Message Event test with severity fatal Users have generated a simulated event to test the event han Description dling notification mechanisms The severity level of this event is fatal Advice None Event ID 0x0401 Type SYSTEM Severity ERROR Parameters Message Event test with severity error Users have generated a simulated event to test the event han Description dling notification mechanisms The severity level of this event is error Advice None Event ID 0x0402 Type SYSTEM Severity WARNING Parameters Message Event test with severity warn Users have generated a simulated event to test the event han Description dling notification mechanisms The severity level of this event is warn Advice None D 62 Appendix D 63 Event ID 0x0403 Type SYSTEM Severity NOTICE Parameters Message Event test with severity notice Users have generated a simulated event to test the event han Description dling notification mechanisms
170. ce exceeds the specified threshold an alert notification is generated If not specified the default threshold is 80 To configure the same settings to all snapshot volume pairs check the Apply to all volume pairs box e Expanding the capacity of snapshot volume pairs To expand the capacity of a snapshot volume pairs do the following 1 Click Expand and specify the following options for an secondary volume expansion task Capacity MB The capacity of a logical disk can be expanded if there is a free chunk available on the disk group Schedule Immediately The task will start immediately Once The task will start on the specified date and time Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI Starting Free This option specifies the start and end of free Chunk Ending chunks to be used for the expansion The Ending Free Chunk Free Chunk must be bigger than or equal to the Starting Free Chunk NOTE At least one free chunk must be adjacent to the logical disk Initialization Background Noinit Option Background applies only to the logical disks with parity based RAID level or mirroring based RAID level e Detailed snapshot volume pair information Click amp to display a complete list of snapshot volume pair information You will see the following details e PVID e Overflow Alert e SVID e Create Spare COW volumes S COW VOL Click Add to add a new spare COW volume where up to a maxim
171. ch or remov ing the cables If the link unexpectedly disconnects or it happens continuously Advice during host access check the host connectivity or contact local sales or support office e IO exceptions handling Event ID 0x3004 Type HOST Severity NOTICE Parameters Host Port ID Message LIP issued on host port x The controller issued LIP Loop Initialization Packet on host port x Description This is to ask host to rescan the connection and get updated of p LUN information such as capacity change or LUN mapping change Advice None Event ID 0x3005 Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message LIP detected on host port x The controller detected LIP Loop Initialization Packet on host port x This could be to recover from a transient error due to Description unstable channel command time out or unexpected host behaviors The controller will drop the command specified by the host and the host will retry the command Advice None D 38 Appendix D 39 Event ID 0x3006 Host Port ID Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host WWPN LUN ID Message Task abort on host port x from host y to LUN z The controller received task abort on host port x from host y to LUN z This could be to recover from a transient error due to Description unstable channel command time out or unexpected host behaviors The controll
172. cked C801 Tun 29 2007 6 23 14 PM CST enst PTT fan 29 0076215 PM CST amin Tun 29 2007 6 21 11 PM CST un 29 2007 6 21 11 PM CST Tun 29 2007 6 21 01 PM CST T Emr _ lt a Sis Figure 5 39 RGC GUI System Panel Click the Severity drop down menu to display the event logs according to the specified severity level You can view the event logs in different pages by either using the amp and amp buttons or entering the required page number in the page number field 5 71 Advanced Functions Functions Export event logs The Export button allows you to export all the stored event logs of the selected RAID system to a file Click the Export button and the Export Logs window appears Choose a directory where you want to save the export file type the file name and specify the file type to save it as an htm file Launch RAID system GUI The Launch GUI button allows you to monitor the status and view the configurations of each RAID system on the remote server To open the GUI of the current RAID system click the Launch GUI button NOTE The RGC Server and RGC Agent will use ports starting from 20000 to forward the transaction of web GUI access between a web browser and the RAID systems 5 6 9 Configuring MSN Event Notification 5 72 The RAIDGuard Central integrates with the MSN service to notify users of system status changes by sending instant messages Follow th
173. component failure and you lose all your data on the hard disk Another reason a hard disk is taken offline is that its reserved space for meta data RAID configurations cannot be written which means the reserved space for bad block 6 5 Troubleshooting reallocation in the hard disk has been full This is unlikely to happen because two copies of meta data are reserved and a hard disk is offline only when both areas cannot be accessed An offline hard disk might also be transiently down because of its disk controller firmware lockdown or mechanical unstableness In this case the hard disk is still accessible and you may reuse it but the hard disk might fail again 3 Verify hard disk health status To know exactly if a hard disk fails or not using SMART check or DST Device Self Test to test the hard disks in question is a good choice It s also advised to check the number of bad blocks and warning events reported by the RAID controller see 2 8 1 Hard disks on page 2 56 Another indicator to the health condition of a hard disk is its 1 O response time because out of specification response time could be caused by abnormal error recovery procedures see 2 11 1 Hard disks on page 2 76 4 Adjust hard disk settings Tweaking the hard disk related settings could help to accommodate the exceptional behaviors of hard disks see 2 8 1 Hard disks on page 2 56 The following are some common workarounds e Extend Disk I O Time
174. connect and turn on the load equipment one piece ata time to determine which piece of equipment caused the overload Event ID 0x2820 Type ENCLOSURE Severity INFO Parameters Message UPS overload solved Description The UPS overload solved Advice None D 58 Appendix D 7 System D 59 Configurations Event ID 0x2400 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters DISK ID Message RAID configurations on HDDx erased Description The RAID configurations stored on hddx were erased RAID con figurations for the disk such as JBOD disk disk group logical disk and volume is lost Re install the disk to the controller so that the controller can re ini Advice ache tialize it Event ID 0x2401 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message RAID configurations on all disks erased Description RAID configurations stored on all disks were erased All RAID con figurations are lost Advice Restart the controller so thot all disks can be re initialized all together Event ID 0x2415 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message NVRAM configurations restore to default Description The controller configurations stored on NVRAM were erased and restored to factory default Advice None Event ID Ox2416 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters DISK ID Message NVRAM configurations restored from
175. controller option and VVOL button for volumes 2 6 6 Added Virtual Volumes 2 7 15 Added the new option Mir rored Write Cache Control 2 8 2 Added a note for the FC port identifiers in the redundant controller system and descrip tions for the WWNN button xx Ce Version Description Release Date 1 4 2 9 2 Added the new option Port 2008 02 25 for the SNMP setting and a note for the OIDs used for each SNMP version 2 9 5 Added the new option Path Failover Alert Delay and a new check item Controller Failure for Auto Write Through Cache option 2 10 6 2 10 7 2 0 9 2 1 1172 11 2 2 11 3 Added a note to for the screen difference in the redundant controller system Chapter 4 Updated CLI commands Appendix B Added Features and Benefits Appendix C Added screen and descrip tions for the redundant con troller system Appendix D Updated event log messages Chapter 5 Modified Multi path IO solution on 5 1 Added 5 2 Redundant Control ler Added 5 3 Snapshot Move all related advanced functions utilities from appendices to Chapter 5 1 4 1 Chapter 4 2008 03 28 Updated CLI commands Chapter 5 Modified Multi path IO solution on 5 1 xxii ES Version Description Release Date 1 4 2 Chapter 1 2008 05 05 Added CLI In band API Features Added Snapshot function note Chapter 4 Added support CLI In band API Modified 4 12 sn
176. controller x was updated successfully Advice Restart the controller so that the new code can be effective Event ID 0x242a Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Controller ID Message Controller x failed to update boot code Description The controller x cannot update the boot code Advice Check the firmware file is not corrupt and has the correct version Email SMTP server status Event ID Ox240b Type SYSTEM Severity WARNING Parameters Message Controller x failed to send mail wigs The controller failed to send mail Both primary and secondary Description mail servers cannot be reached by the controller Advice Check if the network connection is up and check if the network and SMTP settings are correct Event ID Ox240a Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message Controller x sned mail back to normal Description The controller can reach the mail server and start to send mail Advice None D 65 unang e System start up and shutdown Event ID 0x2402 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message System to be restarted or halted Description The RAID system is going to get restarted or halted Advice None Event ID 0x2403 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message RAID system started Description The RAID system was started Advice None e Miscellaneous Event ID 0x240c
177. crubbing on dgx was started Advice None Event ID Ox2049 Type TASK WARNING DG ID Message Scrub on DGx failed to start by schedule Description Scheduled disk scrubbing on dgx failed to start Advice Check if the disk group is busy or non optimal Appendix Event ID 0x2021 DG ID Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters Sector Num Row Num Row Num M Scrub on DGw stopped with x bad sectors detected y inconsis essage tent rows found and z rows recovered Disk scrubbing on dgw was stopped manually and there were x Description bad sectors detected y inconsistent rows found and z rows recovered If the number of bad sectors or inconsistent rows grows excep Advice tionally fast or beyond a reasonable number consider to con duct diagnostics and replace with new disks Event ID 0x2023 DG ID Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters Sector Num Row Num Row Num M Scrub on DGw aborted with x bad sectors detected y inconsis essage tent rows found and z rows recovered ere Disk scrubbing on dgw was aborted and there were x bad sec Description l tors detected y inconsistent rows found and z rows recovered Advice Check if the disk group is busy or non optimal Event ID 0x2039 DISK ID Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters Sector Num Row Num Row Num R aeie Scrub on DGw completed with x bad sectors detected y incon g sistent rows
178. ctor in the bad block realloca tion table When the controller accesses the invalidated areas it Description returns media error to hosts This happens when the controller p cannot rebuild data from remaining disks This results in data loss but the area on disk is still accessible The mark could be removed when hosts writes to this area or corresponding logical disk is re created If the number of BBR table entries being allocated grows excep Advice tionally fast or beyond a reasonable number consider to con duct diagnostics and replace with new disks Event ID 0x140e Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters mai Ne Message Read from an invalidated block at sector x on HDDy The hosts read data from sector x on hddy which was previously marked an invalidated area The hosts got media error from the Description controller This happens when the controller cannot rebuild data from remaining disks This results in data loss but the area on disk is still accessible If the number of BBR table entries being allocated grows excep Advice tionally fast or beyond a reasonable number consider to con duct diagnostics and replace with new disks Apendi Event ID 0x1409 Threshold Type DISK Severity NOTICE Parameters value Disk ID Message BBR exceeds notice threshold x on HDDy The number of bad block reallocation table entries on hddy has
179. d defragment during migration L I hddx hdady expanding disk group by adding these hard disks Command Idexpand Synopsis Idexpand dgildx newcapacity i initopt f x y Description Expand the capacity of one or more logical disks in a disk group newcapacity new capacity of a logical disk Parameters i initopt initialization method f x y free chunks Command Idshrink Synopsis Idshrink dgildx newcapacity Description Shrink the capacity of a logical disk Parameters newcapacity new capacity of a logical disk Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands Command dgdefrag Synopsis dgdefrag dgi Description Defragment a disk group Command volexpand Synopsis volexpand volx dgildx dgjldy Description Expand a volume by concatenating new logical disks Command volshrink Synopsis volshrink volx Description Shrink the capacity of a volume by removing the concatenating logical disks 4 3 2 Data integrity maintenance utilities Command hddclone Synopsis hddclone hddx hdady q Description Perform disk cloning clone from hddx to hdady Parameters a automatic resume Command hddclonestop Synopsis hddclonestop hddx Description Stop disk cloning Command diskscrub Synopsis diskscrub dgx dgxldy hddx c g Description aii scrubbing in a disk group a logical disk or a Parameters ii pee Com
180. d disks and the I O statistics see 2 11 Performance Management on page 2 76 to know the system loading level and distribution A hard disk with long response time or lots of media errors reported could be in trouble e Performing online maintenance utilities Comprehensive maintenance utilities are offered for ensuring the best condition and utilization of your RAID systems all through its lifetime They include data integrity assurance capacity resource reallocation and RAID attributes migration Data integrity assurance For data long term integrity assurance and recovery you may use disk scrubbing see 2 7 9 Scrubbing on page 2 49 disk cloning see 2 7 8 Cloning hard disks on page 2 47 DST see 2 7 11 Performing disk self test on page 2 50 and SMART see s 2 8 1 Hard disks on page 2 56 For how these can help you please go to Appendix B Features and Benefits Capacity resource reallocation If you d like to add more disks for capacity expansion you can use disk group expansion see 2 7 1 Expanding disk groups on page 2 43 Resizing logical disks and volumes 2 7 4 Expanding the capacity of 1 14 introduction logical disks in a disk group on page 2 45 to 2 7 6 Expanding volumes on page 2 46 can also help you to transfer the Unused capacity of a LUN to others that are desperate for more space without any impact to other LUNs If Unused space is scattered you can use disk group defragmentation see 2 7 2 Defr
181. d Functions Functions F RAIDGuard Central GUI System Security Language Help AN o e TY fad ST N Agent 10 10 88 117 pame E unknown 10 1088 123 TP Range unknown 10 10 88 166 T e ior IP Miss SytemName Model Name 101088 107 aowa ng 1010 88 10 unknown anp D 101088123 unknown T jio1088 166 jnknown GW z oom mi 00000000000000005003082 None jpooonnodoe0onnonso002e2 None 00000000000000005001492 Morral BR Rana ae Remove this agent Figure 5 38 Registering a RAID system to an agent Remove a RGC Agent To remove an agent from the RGC Server do the following 1 Select the agent you want to remove from the structure tree 2 Click the Remove this agent button in the system panel and the selected agent is removed from the RGC Server NOTE To clear the records of all RAID systems registered to a removed agent you need to remove all RAID systems registered to this agent first before removing a RGC Agent See the next section Unregister a RAID system for more information Unregister a RAID system To remove a registered RAID system uncheck the checkbox in the Monitor column for the RAID system you want to unregister from the RGC Agent NOTE 1 You can have a maximum of four users logged into a RAID system at any one time irrespective of the service they are using It means that a RAID system can be reg
182. d check Advice None Event ID 0x3021 Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x EEDP Reference Tag Error The logical block reference tag in the data protection informa Description tion block of an end to end data protection I O did not match the expected value Advice None Event ID 0x3022 Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x EEDP Application Tag Error The logical block application tag in the data protection informa Description tion block of an end to end data protection I O did not match the expected value Advice None D 46 Appendix e Port and chip D 47 Event ID 0x3023 Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message IOC Bus Reset on port x Description A bus reset has occurred on port x that was initiated by the IOC Advice None Event ID 0x3024 Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message Ext Bus Reset on port x Description A bus reset has occurred on port x that was initiated by an exter nal entity Advice None unang D 5 Controller hardware e Memory Event ID Ox241le Controller Type CONTROLLER Severity WARNING Parameters ingle bit address Message Memory ECC single bit error in controller x y The controller x has detected and corrected single bit error in the
183. d the descriptions for the DHCP method Added the Authentication option for the SMTP server configuration Appendix C Updated event log messages 1 1 s Changed all name lengths from 2007 02 26 characters to bytes e Modified the descriptions for the Force to delete LUN mapping s option e Changed RAID array to array 1 1 Updated key features 1 3 Modify volume definition add SSL definition 2 1 1 Added browser language set ting 2 1 2 Added multiple system viewer 2 2 1 Updated Figure 2 5 2 3 Added SAS enclosure display xviii ee paras Version Description Release Date 1 1 2 4 Added Figure 2 10 Overview 2007 02 26 screen and modified the related descriptions 2 5 2 Modified the hard disk state for quick setup 2 6 1 Added one category mode and its definition Added a note for the Modify button 2 6 4 Added options to LD read algorithm 2 6 6 Updated the Figure 2 11 2 7 5 Modified the note for LD shrink 2 7 6 Added expanding volumes 2 7 7 Added shrinking volumes 2 7 11 Added the contents for the Schedule option 2 7 13 Added a note for the Force to recover disk option 2 7 14 Add DST to the scheduled task 2 7 15 Added spare restore control and task notify 2 8 1 Added disk standby mode added the range for the Delay Time When Boot Up option 2 8 2 Added the connection mode displayed on the FC ports page added the configura tion steps
184. derived from our field experiences of more than one decade in all kinds of real world environments dealing with host computers disk drives and hardware components One of the best parts in the design is that the administrator can use the online utilities provided by the firmware to solve his problems without calling the services from the vendors B 9 O Apendi e Seasoned redundancy design The storage system availability is achieved by the redundancy design to eliminate single point of failure The controller is equipped with redundant flash chips with advanced algorithms for error checking and bad block reallocation in the firmware to protect the controller from defect flash blocks and ensure longer life time of the controller The firmware stores two copies of RAID meta data as well as bad block reallocation map on disk drives to avoid any data or RAID loss resulted from bad sectors e Support multi path Supporting multi path solutions at host side such as Microsoft MPIO system continuity can be achieved because the storage system can tolerate failures on the IO path such as host bus adapters switches or cables by distributing IO over multiple IO paths This also improves performance by the dynamic load balancing as well as simplifies the storage presentation process e Support active active redundant controller The controller supports dual active active configuration to tolerate controller failure The host IO access and bac
185. dices describe supporting information for your references If you are an experienced user you may quickly go through the key features to know the capabilities of the RAID system and then read only the chapters for the user interfaces you need Because this RAID system is designed to follow the commonly seen conventions in the industry you will feel comfortable when dealing with the setup and maintenance tasks However there are unique features offered only by the RAID system and the RAID systems may be shipped with new features Fully understanding these features will helo you do a better job If you are not familiar with RAID systems you are advised to read all the chapters to know not only how to use this RAID system but also useful information about the technologies and best practices A better starting point for your management tasks is to get familiar with the GUI because of its online help and structured menu and web pages You also need to know the LCD console because it is the best way for you to have a quick view of the system s health conditions If you live in an UNIX world you probably like to use the CLI to get things done more quickly To avoid having an ill configured RAID system please pay attentions to the warning messages and tips in the manual and the GUI If you find mismatch between the manual and your RAID system or if you are unsure of anything please contact your suppliers 1 4 RAID Structure O verview The st
186. e The performance of single logical device will not be limited to the upper bound of bandwidth provided by single path and it is improved by aggregating the bandwidth of multiple paths It also outperforms host 5 1 Advanced Functions Functions side software RAIDO because RAIDO forces I O to be truncated into data stripes resulting in overhead and limited size of per transaction data transfer e Higher bandwidth utilization With statically assigning paths to logical devices on a controller the bandwidth of all connections cannot be fully utilized if the loading on different logical devices is uneven By transferring data over all paths bandwidth utilization is more efficient and ROI is improved s Easier management With dynamic load balancing the users need not to worry about either bandwidth planning during the installation or the reconfiguration for performance tuning When there is new HBA or new connection is added the bandwidth created can be utilized easily Therefore MPIO largely reduces the management efforts and the TCO Total Cost of Ownership 5 1 3 Configuring MPIO Hosts and RAID Controller A path is defined as the link from host to a virtual disk presented by the RAID controller and it includes the HBA cables and optionally a storage switch To build multiple I O paths there have to be multiple links between the host computer and the RAID system and the virtual disks in the RAID system have to be expor
187. e disk drives enterprise class near line or desktop and management networks Extra cares are needed if you are installing the RAID systems to an existed infrastructure under operations Check your RAID system supplier to ensure good interoperability between the RAID system and the components in your environments You will also need to know the potential changes in the future like capacity growth rate or adding host systems such that you can have plans for data migration and reconfigurations The quality of your configurations will largely depend on the information you collect It is advised to write down the information of users needs and environments as well as the configurations in your mind which can be very helpful guidance through the all the lifetime of the RAID systems 1 11 Antrontuction e Configuring the hardware settings and doing health check After installing your RAID systems with necessary components like hard disks and transceivers to your environment enabling the user interfaces is a prerequisite if you want to do anything useful to your RAID systems The only user interface that you can use without any tools is the LCD console by which the settings of the RS232 port and the management network interface can be done to allow you to use the GUI and CLI see 3 3 Menu on page 3 6 Now do a quick health check by examining the GUI monitoring page to locate any mal functioning components in the chassis or suspici
188. e jar executable file RGC jar or RGCAgent jar in the folder it belongs to Ensure that the application connection has been set so that you can open the file For more information on setting up the connection between the jar executable file and the java application see the instructions provided by your Linux operating system RGC Jjar RGCAgent jar Advanced Functions Functions NOTE If you want the RAIDGuard Central loading at startup each time the host computer is turned on refer to your operating system documentation to find out how to add the startup programs e RGC Server and RGC Agent Monitor Screens The RGC Server monitor screen based on Windows platform is displayed as below System Language Help Web Server Status Listening at 8080 Stop Server Web Server Port 8080 Change Port Connectng Users admin 0 Launch RGC GUI Figure 5 32 RGC Server monitor screen The following table describes the function of each menu bar item buttons and listed information in this screen Menu Bar System Exit Exit the program Specify the desired GUI language Language The language options will differ according to the language support on your operating system T Help Contents Open the online help web page e p About Display the program version Buttons Start or stop the web server at the specified port Start Server If the web server is stopped the RGC GUI cannot be Stop Server u
189. e Disk group dgx s Logical disk dgxldy e Volume volx e Host hostx e Storage group sgx e Host group hgx e Logical unit lunx e Fiber port fcpx e Serial SCSI port sasx e Controller ctlx s Management network port ethx e Enclosure encx Options Options are expressed in the form of x where x is the identifier of the option Selectable arguments When more than one value can be used in an argument they are listed with in between Users may choose one among them Controller modifier In a dual controller system hardware such as the host interface ports is exactly the same on the two controllers To specify which controller the hardware to be selected in CLI a controller modifier is added For example to refer to the first FC port in controller A the identifier is Bfcpal Without the modifier all identifiers are referring to local controller the controller that user logs in currently See all the CLI commands and the descriptions in the following sections 4 6 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands 4 2 Basic RAID Management 4 2 1 Hard disks Command hddadd Synopsis hddadd hddx hday Description Add hard disks Command hddremove Synopsis hddremove hddx hddy p Description Remove hard disks Parameters P permanent remove Command hddlist Synopsis hddlist hddx all h Description List the status of one or all hard
190. e None Event ID 0x281 1 Type ENCLOSURE Severity INFO Parameters Message Dirty boot data flush completed Description The data flush was completed and the controller will restart and return to normal state Advice None Event ID 0x2812 Type ENCLOSURE Severity INFO Parameters Controller ID Message BBM in controller x is charging Description BBM in controller x was not fully charged and it started charging Advice Start host access or operations after the BBM at fully charged state Event ID 0x2813 Type ENCLOSURE Severity NOTICE Parameters Controller ID Message BBM in controller x charging completed v ie BBM in controller x charging was done and BBM wos fully Description charged Advice None D 55 unang Event ID 0x2814 Type ENCLOSURE Severity WARNING Parameters Controller ID Message BBM in controller x absent Description The controller x cannot detect BBM Advice Check if the BBM is properly installed or replace with a new BBM Event ID 0x2815 Type ENCLOSURE Severity NOTICE Parameters Controller ID Message Temperature of BBM in controller x back to normal Description The temperature of BBM in controller x returned to normal work ing temperature range Advice If the temperature is very unstable contact local sales or support office
191. e connection perform these tasks in the RAID GUI e Create DGOLDO with preferred controller A create DG1LDO with preferred controller B e Specify the storage provisioning method e Assign the WWPN for the HBAs in the server hosts and group them into a host group e Bind the two logical disks to the host group In this configuration for DGOLDO the green path is the active path while the red path is the standby path when the green path fails the link transfroms and access will be continued by the red dotted path for DGI1LDO the condition is reversed Please check other similar description in section 5 3 5 25 Advanced Functions Functions The Configuration Tasks table shown below details each configuration task according to the example given in Figure 5 6 Configuration Tasks Using Symmetric Provisioning method Tasks Instructions Create Virtual volumes and RAID Management gt Disk Groups gt specify the preferred Create DGO and DG1 controller RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DGOLDO gt Specify the preferred controller as ctla RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DG1LDO gt Specify the preferred controller as ctlb Select Storage Provisioning RAID Management gt Storage method Provisioning gt Symmetric Add WWPN of HBAs to hosts HBAO WWPN gt Host 0 gt Host Group 0 HBA WWPN gt Host 1 gt Host Group 0 Map LUNs to host groups DGOLDO and DG1LDO gt Host Group 0
192. e data rate like 1 5 Gbps or 3 Gbps for SATA disks please make sure the setting is correct by checking the jumpers on the hard disk You need also to make sure the on disk cache is turned on see 2 8 1 Hard disks on page 2 56 Lastly the performance of hard disks varies from model to model and even the hard disk firmware revision could also cause differences having the latest revision helps you to get better performance 9 Add memory at host computer or RAID controller Adding more memory to your motherboard or RAID controller helps to cache more data at memory to so as to reduce the number I O access to hard disks especially helpful for data being accessed frequently Bigger memory also helps to avoid the performance glitch because more data can be buffered for write commands or pre fetched for read commands especially helpful for multiple video streams 10 Check data layout on hard disks A hard disk can deliver its best performance when servicing I O access on the inner tracks of disks which provides data of lower block address LBA As a result to deliver high throughput performance place the data in the beginning area of disk groups To retain the performance of data at the second half area of disk groups you may use more hard disks with striping 11 Make the I O workload distribute evenly Check below to ensure the I O workload are distributed evenly s Data is transferred evenly through multiple host interface connections
193. e disks attached to the disk port Advice If this event occurs often check the disk connectivity check power supply to disks or replace with a new disk Event ID Ox081c A Chip ID Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Controler ib Message Reset disk i f chip x in controller y The controller y resets chip x that failed to execute commands properly This could be a transient error due to unstable channel Ink heavy traffic or malfunctioning hard disks The controller will Description S resume normal operations of the chip after reset however this could result in performance drop of the disks attached to the disk ports of this chip Advice If this event occurs often check the disk connectivity check power supply to disks or replace with a new disk unang Event ID 0x081d Chip ID Type DISK Severity FATAL Parameters Controller ID Message Disk i f chip x in controller y failed The controller y cannot execute commands properly on chip x after all appropriate recovery procedures were conducted This could be the result of unstable power supply to the system All disks controlled by the chip will fail Description Check power supply replace with a new controller or contact Advice E local sales or support office Event ID 0x08 1 f Disk Chan nel ID Con Type DISK Severity ERROR Parameters troller ID Register value Message Disk channel x
194. e length is 63 bytes HG ID Select a Host Group ID from the drop down menu You can select from hgO to hg31 or No group That is must to set for symmetric method Remove hosts Select the host s you want to delete and click Remove Check the Only remove from host group box if you want to remove the host s from the host group only Modify hosts host group Select a host you want to change for its host name host group ID or host group name and click Modify to enter the settings screen Add LUNs in Host Group After setting the host s click Back to return to the symmetric storage main screen Then click Add to add LUNs in the HG s HG ID Select a HG ID from the drop down menu A maximum of 32 hosts can be added to the controller LUN ID Select a LUN ID from the drop down menu where up to 128 IDs are available for the selection Mapping Virtual Disk Select a virtual disk from the drop down menu for LUN mapping Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI Sector Size 512Byte 1KB 2KB 4KB Select a sector size from the drop down menu as the basic unit of data transfer in a host Number of Cylinder Number of Head Number of Sector Define a specific cylinder head and sector to accommodate different host systems and applications The default is Auto Write Completion Write behind Write commands are reported as completed when host s data is transferred to the write cache Writ
195. e password of RAID systems is changed you need also update the password for the VDS Provider by the Configuration Utility 5 75 Advanced Functions Functions 5 7 5 VDS Based RAID Management Software Microsoft DiskRAID DiskRAID is scriptable command line RAID management software supplied by Microsoft After entering DiskRAID command prompt you may use the list provider command to verify if the VDS Provider is properly installed and use list subsystem Command to see all RAID systems registered See below for an example of using these two commands DISKRAID gt list provider Prov HIH Name Accusys UDS Provider DISKRAID gt list subsystem Subsys Name Subs ys ACS82416 i Healthy Please follow the links below and enter diskraid to find more information Microsoft Web Site Links Search link http search microsoft com mkt en US Microsoft Storage Manager for SANs The Storage Manager for SANs SMfS is RAID management GUI introduced in Windows Server 2003 R2 by Microsoft You may follow the steps below to install it 1 In Control Panel click Add or Remove Programs Then click Add Remove Windows Components 2 From the list of components in the Windows Components Wizard dialog box select Management and Monitoring Tools and click Details 3 From the list of subcomponents select Storage Manager for SANs and then click OK 4 Click Next and after the configuration of the new component has
196. e path is restored the MPIO driver routes the traffic back to the active path automatically No user intervention is needed for the path failback process e Controller Failover and Failback Scenarios When doing the controller failover and failback in the redundant controller systems the two controllers must meet the following hardware and software requirements Hardware 1 Both controllers are of the same model and PLD version 2 Same number and model of daughter boards installed on both controllers 3 Same BBM battery backup module number and state 4 Same memory size Software Some software requirements can be updated synchronously during the controller failoback Users need to check and confirm the pop up message shown on the LCD panel so that the automatic synchronization can continue 1 Same boot code 2 Same firmware version 3 Same BBM control options 4 Same enclosure serial number 5 35 Advanced Functions Functions Controller Failover When one of two controllers is failed the survival controller turns off the power of the failed one taking over all interrupted tasks The host I O is redirected to controller B by MPIO driver Figure 5 12 shows the path switching while controller failover Host Group Q Host Group Q 7 7 7 Host N 7 Host N fa C sog EOD EDD Controller B Controller A Controller B Controller A
197. e standby path when the green path fails the link transfroms and access will be continued by the red dotted path for DGT LDO the condition is reversed The steps to configure the LUN mappings is the same as the dual channel configuration of redundant single MPIO host See the following Configuration Tasks table for the quad channel configuration according to the example given in Figure 5 7 5 27 Advanced Functions Functions Configuration Tasks Tasks Instructions Create Virtual volumes and RAID Management gt Disk Groups gt specify the preferred Create DGO and DG1 controller RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DGOLDO gt Specify the preferred controller as ctla RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DG1LDO gt Specify the preferred controller as ctlb Select Storage Provisioning RAID Management gt Storage method Provisioning gt Symmetric Add WWPN of HBAs to hosts HBAO WWPN gt Host 0 gt Host Group 0 HBA WWPN gt Host 1 gt Host Group 0 HBA2 WWPN gt Host 2 gt Host Group 0 HBA3 WWPN gt Host 3 gt Host Group 0 Map LUNs to host groups DGOLDO and DG1LDO gt Host Group 0 5 28 Aulvanced Functions Functions e Active Active Redundant Dual Independent MPIO Hosts As Figure 5 8 shows the redundant RAID system is operating in a dual independent MPIO hosts environment using the selective storage method All LUNs are formed into storage groups used
198. e steps below to configure this function 1 From the Tool bar in RGC GUI click the MSN tool button A or A to open the MSN Login and Configure screen 2 Select the Login tab to enter the MSN account and password to be used by RAIDGuard Central to login to MSN server and send out messages 3 Select the Configure tab to set up message recipients and severity level of the event logs to be sent Up to 3 recipients can be configured 4 After the MSN account and the recipients are configured properly RAIDGuard Central will connect to MSN server and remain online You may check the icon on the MSN button to see if the RAIDGuard Central is online Green or not Red For every 5 seconds RGC will send out one message to notify the recipients of the latest events Note that the messages will carry the events that happened in the past 30 minutes NOTE RAIDGuard Central leverages TJMSNLib to support MSN notification and it currently supports MSN Protocol MSNP version 11 and MSN clients version 7 0 or earlier It does not support offline message so the recipient has to be online to get event notification messages RAIDGuard Central uses TJMSNLib 5 0 as the MSN Messenger client library TJMSNLib is an MSN Messenger client library which is licensed under GPL General Public License For more information about TJMSNLib please visit the TjJMSN website at http tjmsn tomjudge com Aulvanced Functions 5 7 VDS Provider
199. e synchronized the next time you start the RAID system 2 8 3 COM port In this section you can configure the terminal settings on the COM port as instructed below Select Terminal port and click Modify to open the configurations window Terminal port The terminal port serves as one of the mechanisms to manage the controller on site The configurations for the terminal ports are baud rate stop bit data bit parity check and flow control To change the settings specify the following options Baud Rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 default Stop Bit 1 default 2 Data Bit 7 8 default Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI Parity Check None default Even Odd Flow Control None default HW NOTE In a redundant controller system the two controllers use the same configuration for the terminal port 2 9 Event Management Event Management enables or disables event notifications When an event is detected the controller will alert you by the specified notification methods All the events will be recorded in the controller You are allowed to erase and download the log and send a test email of events 2 9 1 Setting up the SMTP The controller can notify you when an event occurs by sending a mail to the specified user account Specify the following options for event configurations Notify State On Off default This option enables or disables the SMTP event
200. e through Write commands are reported as completed only when host s data has been written to disk Remove LUNs from host Select the LUN s you want to remove and click Remove To remove alll LUNs of a virtual disk from one or all hosts check the Remove mapping virtual disk from all host box Selective method Selective storage is used in complicated SAN environments where there are multiple hosts accessing the controller through an FC switch This method provides the most flexibility for you to manage the logical connectivity between host and storage resources exported by the controller As the illustration shows the HG Host Group can be a host or a group of hosts that share the same access control settings in the controller SG represents the LUNs as a storage group Bind the host host group and storage group to the same host port Kre maeri ee es LUNT LD1 FC Switch Environment inara IU TH UU HOST6 UU HOSTS Figure 2 22 Selective storage Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI Add hosts In the selective storage main screen click Host gt Add Host ID Select a Host ID from the drop down menu A maximum of 32 hosts can be added to the controller WWPN Each FC port needs a WWPN for communicating with other devices in an FC domain Users can
201. ease use hard disk diagnostics utilities to identify the problematic hard disks and remove them 5 Some pages in the System Management menu are not viewable The RAID controller offers two levels of administration access right If you login as a user Username user you are restricted to read only web GUI pages Login as administrator username admin allows full function management and access to all pages 6 No display or response on the LCD If your RAID system is capable of redundant controller configuration the LCD can be managed by only one of the two controllers at a time and you need to use LCD hot keys see 3 2 5 Hotkeys on page 3 5 to choose a controller to control the LCD 6 6 RAID Configuration and Maintenance 1 2TB limitation and how to choose sector size Because of 32 bit logical block addressing 2432 x 512 bytes 2TB used by the MBR based partition table and by the host operating systems like Windows 2000 Windows XP 32 bit and Linux 2 4 x kernel the maximum size of single partition or logical drive is limited to 2TB size You can use logical volume management LVM software to aggregate multiple LUNs For Windows above to work around the 2TB limitation choose bigger sector size of a LUN see 2 6 7 Storage provisioning on page 2 36 However you cannot use dynamic disk in Windows for the LUN with non 6 8 Troubleshooting 512B sector size and your data will be lost if you change the sector si
202. ed for the controller to record events and to schedule maintenance tasks There are two time modes for selection static and NTP settings For network settings do the following 1 Select System Management gt Time from the main menu 2 From the Time Mode drop down menu select either static or NTP e If you select the static mode specify the date and time The data and time is set in form as MM DD YY and hh mm 2 71 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI e If you select the NTP mode specify the IP address or the domain name of the NTP server The NTP server automatically synchronizes the controller clock at 23 59 every day 3 Click Apply and the settings are effective immediately Setting up the Time Zone 1 Select System Management gt Time from the main menu 2 From the Time Zone Mode drop down menu select location of country 3 From the DST Daylight saving time Status Mode drop down menu select On Off default 4 Click Apply and the settings are effective immediately NOTE If the NTP server is located outside your LAN make sure the gateway and domain name server is configured properly for the RAID controller to conect to the NTP server 2 10 5 Security control The settings in the Security page allows you to change the password and login related settings User setting To change the password of a specified user do the following 1 Specify either Administrator or User from the Specified User drop
203. educes the potential risk of software interoperability The RAIDGuard also features online help by which the administrator can learn the system more easily s Command line interface CLI The command line interface provides shortcuts for power users who want to complete tasks by quickly entering a few lines of text commands People at testing labs can build the test configurations in seconds and there is virtually no effort to repeat the commands IT staff can also leverage the command Appendix line interface to deploy single configuration over multiple storage systems by replaying the CLI scripts predefined by the administrator e Support LCD panel The LCD panel provides a quick overview of the system status as well as a simple way for setting basic configurations It is very convenient for people who don t have or don t want to have the knowledge about the detailed operations of a storage system The system operators like the staff in a security control center can also easily communicate with the administrators by reporting the messages shown on the LCD panel e Remote management by Web TELNET and SSH The administrator can connect to multiple storage systems by the networks from one computer to remotely monitor the system status and execute management tasks The GUI can be accessed by web browsers and the CLI can be accessed by the console of TELNET or secure shell SSH As there are more and more chances that the administ
204. em Management menu eee eee eee eee 2 70 LCD manipulation procedure sees eee 3 1 XV Coments xvi Figure 3 2 Figure 4 1 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 5 23 Figure 5 24 Figure 5 25 Figure 5 26 Figure 5 27 Figure 5 28 Figure 5 29 Figure 5 30 Men tee sitet te cetincticetniny agian basabeadeuobitedds Aickaine nbelnanisesnbntenencns teceiven tes 3 6 Interfaces t ACCESS CUl dic ciscsrasstnapens pan onipun peas tigreen oriri rn EEE 4 1 Dual independent MPIO hosts sss eee eee 5 4 Clustered server environment eee eee eee 5 6 Computer Management screen Device Manager essere 5 9 MPIO device screen eee eee eee 5 10 MID environmen T 5 19 Redundant Single MPIO host dual Channel sese 5 25 Redundant Single MPIO host quad channel sees 5 27 Redundant Dual Independent MPIO hosts sss esse eee 5 29 Dual clustering MPIO hosts eee eee eee eee 5 31 Active Passive Redundant Single MPIO host see eee 5 33 Controller failover scenario eee eee ee 5 35 Controller failover scenario eee eee eee eee 5 36 Controller failover and the page redirection message 0 5 37 Controller failback message sse 5 37 Error message indicates both controller failures 2 0 0 0 cece 5 37 Relationship of
205. ent Up to 256 RAID systems can be displayed per scan If you have more RAID systems on single subnetwork you need to carry out multiple scans using different IP ranges Fy RAIDGuard Central GUI System Security Language Help jal 10 10 88 107 RIR L unknown I __ 1 21 00__ TENS L oO 10 10 88 123 FAE_test ACS92000 1 22 Betal 102 00000000000000003001492 No 10 10 88 166 junknown ACS93000 71 21 00 1 03 None Figure 5 37 Scanning the online RAID systems in the selected agent s domain Figure 5 37 shows the RAID system scan screen The System Panel contains the following columns to display the information of each RAID system discovered e Monitor e F W Version P Address BIC Boot Code Version System Name Serial Number e Model Name e Status 5 68 Aulvanced Functions Functions Table F 1 shows the meaning of the text displayed in the Status column and the corresponding RAID system icons in the Structure tree section Table 5 2 System status information Icon Status Description None Unregistered RAID system with unknown status Registered online RAID system functioning normally Query thread queries the registered systems every a Mon ten seconds Their statuses will be changed accordingly Registered offline RAID system The RGC cannot reach 2 Offline the RAID system because the RAID system or its network link
206. ent IO command processing while its low latency system bus streamlines large block data transfer In addition to the elaborated RAID algorithms the controller implements also sophisticated buffer caching and IO scheduling intelligence Extensive IO statistics are provided for monitoring the performance and utilization of storage devices Users can online adjust the optimization policy of each LUN based on the statistics to unleash the most power of the controller e Comprehensive and Effortless Management Users can choose to manage the RAID systems from a variety of user interfaces including command line interface over local console and secure shell SSH LCD panel and web based graphical user interface GUI Events are recorded on the NVRAM and mail is sent out to notify the users without installing any software or agents Maintenance tasks like capacity resizing and disk scrubbing are online executable and can be scheduled or periodically executed With the comprehensive management utilities users can quickly complete the configurations and perform reconfiguration effortlessly 1 2 Key Features e Basic RAID Construction e Multiple RAID levels O 1 3 5 6 10 30 50 60 JBOD and NRAID e Multiple stripe sizes KB 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 and 512 e Independently selectable strip size for each logical disk e Independently selectable RAID level for each logical disk e Support Quick Setup for effortless and quick RAID config
207. er controller and the other controller will follow the configurations of the master controller The negotiation cannot be done if there is configuration conflict between the two controllers see 5 3 Redundant Controller on page 5 21 The controllers will stop boot up to show messages on the LCD The messages and corresponding resolutions are the same as failure of replacement controller If the two controllers have different versions of boot code or firmware you need to choose between the versions If the two controllers have different BBM option you need to choose to enable or disable it If ENC SN UNEQ is displayed the two controllers came from different chassis and you need to boot up first with only one controller as the master controller and install the other controller later 3 Host computer reports I O errors during path controller failover If you use MPIO against path or controller failure it is essential to check if your MPIO driver is installed properly Below are the checking items you need to do e A virtual disk has been mapped to LUNs of all host interface ports in simple storage presentation configuration Or a virtual disk has been mapped to a host or host group in symmetric storage presentation configuration Troubleshooting e Because a LUN is not accessible during regular initialization Install the MPIO driver after the regular initialization of a virtual disk is done or use background initialization
208. er sender Synopsis password n name smtpconfig reset primary secondary Description Configure or clear the primary or secondary SMTP servers set reset set or reset SMTP server server the SMTP server address Parameters sender the account on SMIP server password the password of the account on SMTP server n name name to be shown on the sender field Command smtplist Synopsis smtplist Description List the SMTP configurations Command smtptest Synopsis smtptest primary secondary receiver Description Send a test mail via primary or secondary mail server to a mail account Parameters receiver mail address of receiver Command ethlist Synopsis ethlist Description Show the control settings of all management network interface ports 4 5 6 Local terminal ports Command termconf Synopsis termconf baud_rate stop_bit data_bit parity flow_ctrl Description Review or set the terminal baud_rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 stop_bit 1 or 2 Parameters data_bit 7 or 8 parity parity check none even or odd flow_ctrl flow control none or hw 4 27 Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands 4 5 7 Enclosure Command encpoll Synopsis encpoll xxsec Specify the polling interval at which the controller polls the Description enclosure controller in the external enclosure to acquire the status
209. er will drop the command specified by the host and the host will retry the command however this could result in LUN performance drop If this event occurs often check the host connectivity check Advice LUN s IO statistics to see if the maximum response time is reason able for the hosts connected or contact local sales or support office Port and chip Event ID 0x3007 Type HOST Severity INFO Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x started Description The controller has started the host port x successfully and link up p can be started Advice None Event ID 0x3008 Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message Port reset detected on host port x The controller detected port reset on host port x This could be to recover from transient error due to a unstable channel com Description mand time out or unexpected host behaviors The controller will drop the command specified by the host and the host will retry the command however this could result in performance drop of the LUNs exported to the host ports of this chip If this event occurs often check the host connectivity check Adis LUN s IO statistics to see if the maximum response time is reason able for the hosts connected or contact local sales or support office unang Event ID 0x3009 Chip ID Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters CohiroleriD
210. erity WARNING Parameters DG ID LD ID Message Migration on DGxLDy failed to start by schedule Description Scheduled migration on dgxldy failed to start Advice Check if the logical disk or the disk group is busy or non optimal when starting the task D 9 unang Event ID Ox2007 Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID LD ID Message Migration on DGxLDy paused Description Migration on dgxldy was paused Advice Check if the logical disk or the disk group is non optimal during the task Event ID Ox2008 Type TASK NOTICE DG ID LD ID Message Migration on DGxLDy resumed Description Migration on dgxldy was resumed Advice None Event ID Ox2006 Type TASK Severity WARNING Parameters DG ID LD ID Message Migration on DGxLDy aborted Description Migration on dgxldy was aborted Advice Check if the logical disk is faulty Event ID 0x2005 Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID LD ID Message Migration on DGxLDy completed Description Migration on dgxldy was completed Advice None Event ID 0x2061 Migrate progress Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Notify threshold Message LD migrate progress y on DGx reach to the notify percent z Description ae progress of LD migration has reached the pre define thresh Advice None Appendix
211. ersion community severity snmptraprcv reset rcvx Description Enable or disable the specified SNMP server for SNMP trap notification receiver set reset set or clear receiver rcvx receiver identifier server SNMP server address Parameters port SNMP server port number version SNMP protocol version community SNMP community name severity severity level to notify Command snmptraptest Synopsis snmptraptest rcvx Description Send a test SNMP trap to the specified server Command snmpagent Synopsis snmpagent on p port c community en ee Poraniaiers p port SNMP agent port number c community SNMP community name 4 8 3 Event handling Command autowritethrough Synopsis autowritethrough on off ctl bbm pow fan ups Description Review or set the auto write through function ctl bbm pow fan ups controller failure battery backup Parameters aes failure power supply unit failure fan failure or UPS 4 33 Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands 4 9 4 9 1 Command autoshutdown Synopsis autoshutdown on off e upsac fan temp t xxmin Description Review or set the auto shutdown function on off enable or disable the auto shoutdown function e upsac fan temp event to trigger auto shutdown UPS Parameters AC power loss and then low battery or UPS connection loss all fan failure or over temperature
212. ess Enter 3 Set the Local IP mask address and press Enter 4 Set the Gateway address and press Enter C 2 unang C 2 L Load Image by TFTP Before a Boot ROM or System ROM update you need to set up the TFTP server for loading a new firmware image Follow the steps below to load an image 1 Open the TFTP Server click the Browse button fo set the boot code or firmware image directory You can use the Show Dir button to see the files in the directory Tftpd32 by Ph Jounin Current Directory F tftp Browse Server interfaces 40 10 100 118 Show Dir Titp Server Tftp Client Syslog server Current Action Listening on port 69 Settings 2 Press L in the Boot Utility and enter the file name of boot code of firmware Set IP address Load Image by TFIP Update Boot Update System ROM Utility menu Set Password Restart system Quit amp Boot RAID system File name _ 3 The TFTP server starts loading When the loading is complete you can proceed to update the Boot ROM or System ROM C 3 Appendix C 3 ftpd32 by Ph Jounin B See Browse Show Dir File size 16777216 6564352 Bytes sent 1094058 Bytes sec 0 lt o ACK S 5 gt Current Action OACK lt timeout 5 gt About Settings Help B Update Boot RO M Press B to update the Boot ROM The firmware versions and the Update download boot firmware message are d
213. essage Primary metadata checksum error on HDDx failed Description The primary RAID metadata stored on hddx was non trustable p However the secondary RAID metadata still works Advice None Event ID 0x0824 Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message Secondary metadata checksum error on HDDx failed Description The secondary RAID metadata stored on hddx was non trust p able However the primary RAID metadata still works Advice None Event ID 0x1405 Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message Primary BBR table on HDDx is corrupt The controller failed to access the primary BBR table on hddx Description and the table was invalid However the secondary BBR table still works Advice Start to monitor the status of the secondary BBR table on this disk Event ID UX 1 406 Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message Secondary BBR table on HDDx is corrupt The controller failed to access the secondary BBR table on hddx Description and the table was non trustable However the primary BBR table still works Advice Start to monitor more carefully the status of the primary BBR table on this disk unang Event ID 0x1407 Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message Both BBR tables on HDDx are corrupt The controller failed to access both primary and secondary BBR Description tables on hddx and the tables were non trustable In this case the BBR functi
214. everity INFO Parameters olden Message Spare COW volume x is added Description Soare COW volume x was added Advice None Event ID Ox3C09 Type SNAPSHOT Severity INFO Parameters pao volume Message __ Spare COW volume x is removed Description Snapshot volume pair x was removed Advice None Event ID Ox3COB Primary vol Type SNAPSHOT Severity INFO Parameters ume Snap shot volume Message Primary volume x is restoring to SVOL y Description Primay volume x was restoring to SVOL y Advice None Event ID Ox3CO0C Primary vol Type SNAPSHOT Severity INFO Parameters ume Snap shot volume Message Restoring task from primary volume x to SVOL y is done Description Restoring task from primary volume x to SVOL y was done Advice None D 70 ince rrr Index A accessing the RAID GUI 2 1 add LUNs in host 2 39 add LUNs in storage group 2 41 array recovery 2 52 faulty 2 52 optimal 2 52 partition state transition 2 53 array roaming 2 51 auto logout setting 2 72 auto spare 2 55 auto write through cache 2 67 automatic resume 2 48 AV streaming 2 19 B background task messages 3 4 bad block alert setting 2 57 bad block clone setting 2 58 beeper alarm 6 1 beeper control 2 67 bind host host group and storage group 2 42 boot utility C 1 set IP address C 2 set password C 5 update boot ROM C 4 update system ROM C 4 C change pass
215. expand the capacity of a logical disk do the following 1 Select Maintenance Utilities gt LD Reconfiguration from the main menu 2 Click Expand and specify the following options for an LD expansion task DG ID LD ID Select a DG ID and an LD ID from the drop down menu for expansion Capacity MB The capacity of a logical disk can be expanded if there is a free chunk available on the disk group NOTE 1 The new capacity must be bigger than the current capacity 2 The sum of increased capacity of all logical disks on the disk group must be less than or equal to the sum of capacity of all selected free chunks Schedule Immediately The task will start immediately Once The task will start on the specified date and time Starting Free This option specifies the start and end of free Chunk Ending chunks to be used for the expansion The Ending Free Chunk Free Chunk must be bigger than or equal to the Starting Free Chunk 2 45 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI NOTE At least one free chunk must be adjacent to the logical disk Initialization Background Noinit Option Background applies only to the logical disks with parity based RAID level or mirroring based RAID level 3 Click Apply to view the current settings 4 Click Confirm The task is created 2 7 5 Shrinking logical disks The shrink operation conducts without background task it simply reduces the capacity of the logica
216. expansion port By specifying the polling interval the controller polls the external enclosure to acquire its status periodically When disabled the controller cannot obtain the status of the enclosures GUI Refresh Rate second 5 default By default the GUI refreshes itself every 5 seconds You can specify a new refresh rate The range is from 2 to 15 Memory Testing When Boot Up On default Off Select this option to enable or disable memory testing when controller boot up Management Device for In band API Off default LUN ID 0 127 Select this option to enable or assign LUN ID when user want to use In band API Utility NOTE Faster GUI refresh rates may degrade the performance of controller 2 75 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI To make the settings effective click Apply 2 11 Performance Management 2 11 1 Hard disks This feature allows you to enable disable or reset disk IO logging for alll hard disks When hard disk IO logging is enabled the following data will be displayed You can press the Reset button to clear all statistics except outstanding IO and disk utilization to zero Category Display HDD ID Hard disk identifier The number of read commands executed since the Read disk was powered on Command sector The accumulated transfer size of read commands since the disk was powered on The number of write commands executed since the Write disk
217. expansion process is complete Do not change or select any functions during the expansion process 2 7 2 Defragmenting disk groups Except defragmenting disk groups during expansion there is another way to perform the task 1 Select Maintenance Utilities gt DG Reconfiguration from the main menu 2 43 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI 2 Click Defragment and specify the following options for defragmenting DG ID Select a disk group to defragment from the drop down menu Schedule Immediately The task will start immediately Once The task will start on the specified date and time 3 Click Apply to view the current settings 4 Click Confirm The task is created After defragmentation is complete all free chunks will be consolidated into the one free chunk located in the space at the bottom of member disks NOTE 1 Defragmentation does not support NRAID disk group 2 There must be free chunks and logical disks on disk groups 2 7 3 Changing RAID level stripe size for logical disks LD Reconfiguration supports stripe size and RAID level migration for logical disks You can conduct disk group expansion with migration at the same time To change the RAID level or stripe size of a logical disk do the following 1 Select Maintenance Utilities gt LD Reconfiguration from the main menu 2 Click Migrate and specify the following options for an LD migration task DG ID LD ID Select a
218. for a host or a host group Command htpunbind Synopsis htpunbind fcpx sasx all hostz hgz Description Unbind a host or a host group from one or all FC ports Command htplist Synopsis htplist fcox sasx all Description List all storage groups bound to one or all FC ports 4 20 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands 4 4 6 Simple storage presentation Command htpaddlun htpaddlun fcpx sasx jody dgyldz voly vvoly lunz s Synopsis 512b 1 S g cylinder head secret w wt wb htpaddlun scpx jody dgyldz voly vvoly i scsi_id J lunz s 512b 1kb 2kb 4kb g cylinder head sector w wt wb Description Add a LUN in a FC port with a virtual disk Parameter i sesi_id SCSI ID Refer to sgaddlun for other parameters Command htpremovelun mar ae Description Remove one or all LUNs in a host port Command htpremovedisk Synopsis htpremovedisk fcpx sasx scpx all jody dgyldz voly vvoly Description Remove all LUNs of a virtual disk from one or all host ports Command htplistlun Synopsis htplistlun fcpx sasx scpx alll Description List LUN information in one or all host ports 4 4 7 Symmetric LUN storage presentation Command hgaddlun Synopsis hgaddlun hgx jbdy dgyldz voly vvoly l lunz s 512b 1kb 2kb 4kb g cylinder head sector w wt wb Description Add a LUN in a host group with a virtual disk Parameters
219. for new logical disks discontinuous free chunks on a disk group can be consolidated into one big free chunk This is accomplished by a background task to move the data on the disk group Without the online de fragmentation the administrator needs to manually move the data of logical disks and unacceptable system downtime is thus introduced e Online volume expansion and shrink The capacity of a volume can be online expanded by adding the logical disks to the volume which concatenates the space of each logical disk to form a larger capacity Because the expansion is done instantly without incurring any background tasks users can quickly start using the added capacity without waiting Users can also reduce the capacity of a volume by removing the concatenated logical disks Freely expanding and shrinking a volume enables efficient storage resource management B 7 Adaptive Performance O ptimization The performance is one of the most important values of a storage system because higher performance means the capability to support larger organization more transactions and higher productivity The RAID controller firmware fully utilizes the state of art storage hardware technologies to deliver the best of breed performance The administrator can further enhance the performance by setting the extensive configurable performance parameters offered by the firmware and monitor the performance regularly The firmware also provides adaptive optimization
220. g ZIP 100088 China http www accusys com cn Ftp ftp accusys com cn E mail sales accusys com cn Tel 86 10 82800080 8 1 82 83 Fax 86 10 82800784 E mail kevinilee accusys com cn Accusys China Shanghai Inc Room 701 No 666 Kirin Tower Gubei Road Changning Area Shanghai ZIP 200336 China Tel 86 21 6270 8599 Fax 86 21 6270 8580 E mail sales accusys com cn Accusys EU B V Orionweg 6 4782 SC Moerdijk The Netherlands Tel 31 0 102995758 Fax 31 0 168358621 http www dccusyseu com Preface N fto ftp accusyseu com N E mail sales accusyseu com support accusyseu com _ si aattti C Conienis Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction US OVEIVIGW lat orcs ierann lids Meee lank erie Matin nd OREN a Rete 1 1 Tez ROY Feature Sinn a seep acd tele asses sng ad ae eee eee 1 2 1 3 How to Use This Manual sse 1 7 1 4 RAID Structure Overview sse eee 1 8 1 5 User Interfaces to Manage the RAID System sse eee eee eee 1 10 1 6 Initially Configuring the RAID System eee eee eee eee eee eee 1 11 1 7 Maintaining the RAID System ooo eee 1 14 Chapter 2 Using the RAID GUI 2 1 Accessing the RAID CU ceases cs ake led eze Te ta nls ante eee eres od en aes ak 2 1 2 1 1 Browser Language Setting essere eee eee 2 1 2 1 2 Multiple System Viewer see 2 3 2 2 Monitor Mode sss sese 2 5 2 2 B lS 2 6 2 2 2 Information ICONS eee eee ee 2 7 22 SN T Ile LL 2 9 2 2A OGM ict cece te ah tes ch dds ra oleh ee inn tea
221. ge presentation eee eee eee 4 21 4 4 7 Symmetric LUN storage presentation eee eee 4 21 4 5 Hardware Configurations and Utilities eee eee ee eee eee 4 22 4 5 EIZ hard diS ke T 4 22 AIZ Sel 525 cok ies Souci ie bi wh ad Pare fell aetna batucy wat gr a taunts hab russ 4 24 G OOM PONG patri Geena E ere aie 8 anaes ie FASO Ged A ETE e 4 24 4 SAFO PONS ss as cing ee sas iu adv a stad ov Semen do umd sed cat caveat ae a 4 25 4 5 5 Management network interface esse 4 26 4 5 6 Local terminal eel C 4 27 4 5 7 ENCIOSUIC eaea itech renee i Rae et aoe 4 28 4 5 8 Uninterruptible power supply eee eee eee 4 28 4 6 Performance management sese eee eee 4 29 4 61 PHAM CG Sei ct eel hae td leh dhl Na don Ue arto Ie 4 29 cle nL 4 29 ALGO LION ave cedtin distal tn altar hatha tes eats dla helt aloha he 4 29 4 04 Stor ge Poms n se nii E r een 4 30 4 7 Redundant Controller Configurations sss eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 4 31 4 7 1 Mirrored write cache control sss sese 4 31 4 7 2 Change preferred Controller sss 4 31 4 7 3 Path failover alert delay sss 4 31 4 3 Event Management cce 2 YE OH gae 27 L LOT edr he 212 VOTE SE ees ea ie gaT 4 31 4 8 1 NVRAM event logs see eee eee 4 31 4 8 2 Event notification sussen seere erer 4 32 4 8 3 Event handling eee cite Sate eds err ee Ee cea cuted 4 33 4 9 System Management sse eee eee ee eee 4 34 4 9 1 Configurations management sse eee 4 34 d 9 2 Time management faceted tad rested nd bedi aneaeind oere 4 35 4 9 3 Administra
222. gent 5 59 Advanced Functions Functions to a computer may be the same as the one of RGC Server in the same network of RGC Server if there are RAID systems in that network RAID Systems a ooo Host Host mE Server Host3 2 RAID Systems z ao RGC Server Agent Host2 E Agent S S RAID Systems 2 gt Agent Se 2 Agent gt gen e Figure 5 31 Deployment example of RAIDGuard Central components You may follow the steps below to deploy the RGC components 1 Install RAID systems and connect them to the networks 2 Install one RGC Server and conduct the necessary configurations you need to start web server if you would like to use RGC GUI 3 Install RGC Agents one for each network segment 4 Launch RGC GUI you will need to enter a password 5 Use RGC GUI to add RGC Agents by keying the IP address of the RGC Agents Use RGC GUI to discover the RAID systems for each RGC Agent Use RGC GUI to register the discovered RAID systems you need to present the administrator s password of the RAID systems for registration 8 Configure MSN accounts for event notification optional Now you may freely read the status and events of all registered RA
223. h enables data transferring Fabric This is a point to point connection mode without a switch Default SCSIID For SCSI port Select a fixed SCSI ID for each SCSI port from the drop down menu The ID range is from 0 to 15 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI Data Rate Auto 1GB 2GB 4GB Select a preferred data rate for an FC port or all FC ports For SCSI port Async Fast Fastwide Ultra Ultrawide Ultra2 Ultra2wide Ultra3 Ultra320 Select a preferred data rate for an SCSI port or all SCSI ports The default setting is Ultra320 3 Check the Apply connection mode and data rate to all FC ports option if necessary Check the Apply data rate to all SCSI ports option if necessary SCSI port 4 Click Apply and the Restart to Apply prompt box appears Click Restart to restart the controller immediately or OK to restart later 5 All settings except FC SAS SCSI port name are effective after you reconnect the controller Setting FC Worldwide Node Name The default worldwide port name WWPN of each FC port should be different The assignment of worldwide node names WWNN to all FC ports help the RAID system recognize all the FC ports with the same WWPN as one device To set FC worldwide node name click the WWNN button Then select Distinct to use different FC WWPNs or Identical to synchronize all FC ports using the same WWNN Click Apply to save The WWPN of all FC ports will b
224. has reached the pre define threshold Advice None D 24 Appendix D 3 Disk Disk status D 25 Event ID 0x0811 Type DISK Severity INFO Parameters Disk ID Message HDDx powered on off Description hddx was powered on or off Advice None Event ID 0x08 17 Type DISK Severity ERROR Parameters Disk ID Message HDDx failed Description hddx failed to respond to the controller Advice Check if the disk is corrupt or the disk interface connection is unstable Event ID 0x0810 Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message _ HDDx issued SMART warning Description Controller detects that hddx is signaling SMART warning Advice The disk is failing or will fail in the near term replace the hard disk Disk IO exception handling Event ID 0x0818 i Controller Type DISK Severity NOTICE Parameters ID Disk ID Message Controller x detected CRC error on HDDy The controller x detected a CRC error when transferring data with hddy This could be a transient error due to unstable chan Description nel electronic interference heavy traffic or malfunctioning hard disks The controller will invalidate the data and retry the com mand Advice If this event occurs often check the disk connectivity check power supply to disks or replace with a new disk unang
225. hat remote host and the corresponding password And you can click the Login button to proceed 5 If the authentication procedure above is done to get the access right you can see all the MPIO disks on the login host 5 9 Advanced Functions e MPIO Device Information When logged in the PathGuard MPIO Utility GUI shows all connected MPIO disks MPIO Disko 2 0007f458d7e5dacStc259c0 Dynamicb lt MPIO Disk1 2 colin 123456 Accusys ACS920001d344127274a4bebdb1 F MPIO Disk2 2 colin 123456 Accusys ACS920002f9b96 5709b198575a3 Fall over Figure 5 4 MPIO device screen Category Display Device Name MPIO Disk name Available Path The available number of paths on the MPIO disk The host name or IP address of host where the MPIO HOST Name device is located Serial Number The RAID controller model name and serial number Path Policy The path policy of the selected MPIO Disk Table 5 1 MPIO device information e Detailed MPIO device information Click amp to display a complete list of MPIO disk information You will see the following details e Selected MPIO disk name s Path Status weight mode and switch Read Write Byte counter e Read Write I O e Queue e Physical Path ID e Adapter Name e LUNID Aulvanced Functions Functions e Configure MPIO Policy Settings Select the MPIO disk you want to configure then click Modify to open the configurati
226. he following section 3 2 LCD Messages 3 1 1 Confirm password To enter the menu a password may be required depending on your settings The default password is 0000 Use the buttons for password input See the use of buttons as below UP DOWN Select the numbers 0 to 9 characters a to z ENT Enter the selected character or confirm the Ea if no character is selected Using the LCD Console the LCD Console ESC Backspace or go back to the status info if password is empty 3 2 LCD Messages 3 2 1 LCD layout Line 1 INFO1 k Line 2 INFO2 DISK Where x Heart Plus The heart plus icon flashes when the controller is working normally When not flashing this indicates a controller failure has occurred INFO1 Information including status info emergent info and background task messages display area at line 1 the maximum string length is 15 INFO2 Information display area at line 2 the maximum string length is 16 DISK Disk status display area at line 2 The format is xxxxxxxxXxXXXXXXxx Each a is the HDD status which are represented as following 1 2 9 a b V Disk group number and a means the 10th disk group Unknown error A Adding disk B Faulty disk C Conflict F Foreign disk G Global spare disk I Initializing J JBOD disk L Local spare disk N Foreign Conflict disk S Local spare disk T Clone target disk U Unused disk W SMART
227. he Enter button to confirm the change You can now re install the MPIO driver and reboot the host computer to make It effective Install and Uninstall MPIO Driver You need to install MPIO driver only on a host computer connected with RAID systems If you use PathGuard GUI only for managing MPIO of remote sites you need not to install the MPIO driver To install the MPIO driver click Start gt Programs gt PathGuard gt Driver gt Install MPIO Driver and to uninstall it click Start gt Programs gt PathGuard gt Driver gt Uninstall MPIO Driver Reboot the host computer and you have completed the installation or un installation Check the MPIO disk status on the host computer After the MPIO driver has been installed you can find the new multi path disk device s eg ACS82410 Multi Path Disk Device and the Multi Path Support displayed in the following screen Computer Management gt Device Manager Right click the My Computer icon on the desktop gt select Manage Aulvanced Functions Functions Computer Management PEZ T j S File Action View Window Help Let x e Am 19 S Computer Management Local a F System Tools Y 9 Event viewer fg Shared Folders Ej ra Local Users and Groups Ej Ee Performance Logs and Alert Device Manager IS amp Storage Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter 9 Disk Management El To Services and Applications TEMP 3NG2M9NSKQ 72 Computer Disk drives fae
228. he RAID controllers are equipped with extensive utilities to support the system administrator to conduct maintenance tasks which may be to fortify the RAID protection by disk scrubbing to reconfigure RAID attributes by migrating RAID level or stripe size or to expand LUN capacity There are also other tasks like disk rebuilding or disk cloning that are started by the firmware automatically These tasks are done in the background and possess more or less performance impact to applications accessing the storage system To avoid the unwanted downgrade of service levels the background tasks are required to be manageable and the administrator needs to have the flexibility to control the tasks e Schedulable task execution The administrator can schedule the background tasks with appropriate parameters to be started at a specific point of time which may be off peak hours to avoid degrading the performance of the system Without this function the administrator might be forced to run the task during business hours or they have to wait till the end of business hours so as to execute the tasks manually e Periodical task execution Periodical schedule can be set for the maintenance tasks with appropriate parameters This frees the administrator from keeping records of when the tasks have been done and when to run the tasks again e Task execution logging and notification Logs of task execution are recorded in the non volatile memory on the contro
229. he following options for configuration DG ID Select a DG ID from the drop down menu Name Use the system default name as dgx x is the DG identifier OR Uncheck the Use system default name box and enter the name in the Name field The maximum name length is 63 bytes Members and Select member disks and spare disks to be Spares grouped Capacity to Specifies the capacity to be truncated for the Truncate GB smallest disk of this disk group This option is useful when the replacement disk that is slightly smaller than the original disk Without this option the capacity to truncate is OGB LD Initialization The initialization mode defines how logical disks of Mode a disk group are initialized Different disk groups can have different initialization modes Parallel The initialization tasks of logical disks are performed concurrently Sequential Only one initialization task is active at a time Write zero When enabled this function will start a immediately background task to write zero to all member disks of the created disk group The disk group can be used for logical disks only after this process is completed NOTE The minimum number of member disks in a disk group is two Different disk groups may have a different number of member disks The number of member disks also determines the RAID level that can be used in the disk group 2 25 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI e Dele
230. he percentage for Bad Block Clone NOTE 1 Percentages must be integers between 1 and 100 2 Cloning can only be started when there are local or global spare disks Bad Block Retry On default Off Select this option to enable or disable retrying when bad block reallocation fails IO Queue On default Off Select this option to enable or disable Negative Command Queue NCQ which enhances hard disk read performance The option is available only for RAID controller with SATA disk interface Disk Standby Mode On Off default Select this option to enable or disable disk standby mode after a period of host inactivity Disk Access Delay Time second 15 default Specify the delay time before the controller tries to access the hard disks after power on The range is between 15 and 75 Delay Time When Boot Up second 40 default Specify the delay time before the controller automatically restarts The range is between 20 and 80 CAUTION The boot up delay time must be longer than the disk access delay time plus 5 seconds 2 8 2 FC SAS SCSI ports This shows information about FC SAS SCSI ports For FC ports including Controller Failover Mode for redundant controller only each port s ID name WWN Hard loop ID connection mode private loop public loop or point to point and data rate For SAS ports including each port s ID name and SAS address For SCSI ports including each port
231. help command display the full documentation 4 11 Configuration shortcuts 4 11 1 RAID quick setup Command raidquick Synopsis raidquick r raidlevel i initopt s spare_no Description Initialize RAID configurations and LUN mapping according to the specified r raidlevel RAID level Parameters l i initopt initialization method s spare_no the number of global spare disks 4 39 Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands 4 11 2 Performance profile Command perfprofile Synopsis perfprofile avstream maxiops maxthruput off Description Select the performance profile to apply Parameters avstream maxiops maxthruput off AV application maximum IO per second maximum throughput or off 4 12 Snapshot Command svpcreate Synopsis svpcreate pdevice sdevice Description Create a snapshot volume pair pdevice and sdevice must not be a private virtual disk sdevice must not be used by any LUN Restrictions pdevice and sdevice must not be in faulty and regular initialization state The capacity of sdevice must be greater than 10 of the capacity of pdevice Command svpdelete Synopsis svpdelete pdevice Description Delete a snapshot volume pair Restrictions There must be no snapshot volume on the volume pair Command svolcreate Synopsis svolcreate pdevice svolx n name Description Create a snapsh
232. imported Description Foreign volume has been imported to be volx Advice None e Recovery Event ID Ox2052 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters DG ID Message DGx is recovered Description Disk group dgx has been recovered Advice None D 6 Appendix Event ID 0x2053 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters DG ID LD ID Message DGxLDy is recovered Description Logical disk dgxldy has been recovered Advice None Event ID 0x2054 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters VOL ID Message VOLxis recovered Description Volume volx has been recovered Advice None unang D 2 Task e Disk group expansion Event ID Ox2009 Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters DG ID Message _ Expansion on DGx started Description Disk group expansion on dgx was started manually Advice None Event ID Ox202d Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Message Expansion on DGx started by schedule Description Scheduled disk group expansion on dgx was started Advice None Event ID 0x2043 Type TASK Severity WARNING Parameters DG ID Message Expansion on DGx failed to start by schedule Description Scheduled disk group expansion on dgx failed to start Check if the disk group is busy or non optimal when starting the Advice ad Event ID Ox200c
233. in a disk group The Disk Identify can let controller correctly identify a hard disk even when they are moved from one slot to another at system power off time and the configurations for the disks can be restored G Spare To add or remove global spare disks click this button to enter the settings screen Detailed hard disk information Click amp to display a complete list of hard disk information You will see the following details s HDD ID e NCQ Supported e UUID e NCQ Status e Physical Capacity KB e Command Queue Depth e Physical Type e Standard Version Number e Transfer Speed e Reserved Size of Remap Bad e Disk Cache Setting Seciors PiseCache Status e Bad Sectors Detected s Bad Sectors Reallocated e Disk Identify s Firmware Version s Serial Number s WWN Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI 2 6 2 JBOD This feature allows you to create delete and modify your JBOD settings e Create JBOD disks Click Create to add a new JBOD disk where up to a maximum of 16 JBOD disks can be created Specify the following options for the configuration JBOD ID Select a JBOD ID from the drop down menu Name Use the system default name as jbdx x is the JBOD identifier OR Uncheck the Use system default name box and enter the name in the Name field The maximum name length is 63 bytes Member Disk Select a corresponding hard disk to be used for JBOD from the drop down menu Preferred This
234. in controller y PCI Error cause register z Description The controller y has detected error in the disk channel Check if the power supply is stable Contact local sales or sup Advice port office e SMART disk self tests Event ID Ox0807 Type DISK Severity INFO Parameters Disk ID Message SHT DST on HDDx started Description hddx started SMART short device self test routine Advice None Event ID Ox0806 Type DISK Severity INFO Parameters Disk ID Message EXT DST on HDDx started Description hddx started SMART extended device self test routine Advice None D 28 Appendix D 29 Event ID Ox0808 Type DISK Severity INFO Parameters Disk ID Message DST on HDDx stopped Description S on hddx was stopped by the controller or from the user inter ace Advice None Event ID Ox0809 Type DISK Severity NOTICE Parameters Disk ID Message DST on HDDx completed without error Description DST on hddx completed without error Advice None Event ID Ox080a Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message DST on HDDx unable to complete due to fatal error Description DST on hddx unable to complete due to fatal error Advice The disk failed
235. ing SATA drives to SAS systems An AAMUX board is required SATA hard disks installed in SAS JBOD systems and for redundant controller systems AAMUX provides dual paths for controllers to access single ported SATA drives Check your RAID system hardware manual for more details and contact your RAID system supplier to get the AAMUX boards 8 Regular maintenance helps to avoid disaster To avoid performance degradation or data loss caused by failed hard disks it s advised to enable periodical SMART checking automatic disk cloning and periodical disk scrubbing Please also set up spare disks for such that disk rebuilding can be started right away when any hard disks fail 6 5 User Interfaces 1 The Web GUI cannot be connected You can use the Web GUI and other network related management features including the host side management software only when the management network interface is configured properly Please check if the LED indicators of the Ethernet port are lit up properly refer to the hardware manual for details and the IP address has to be set to enable the network interface You can manually set the IP address by the LCD or local CLI or use a DHCP server on the network 2 Some user operations are prohibited Each user operation can be executed assuming some sort of conditions please check Chapter 2 to find out the restrictions of your operations The web GUI will also offer information and suggestions when a user operati
236. introduction Chapter 1 Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of our RAID controller Aiming at serving versatile applications the RAID controller ensures not only data reliability but also improves system availability Supported with cutting edge IO processing technologies the RAID controller delivers outstanding performance and helps to build dependable systems for heavy duty computing workgroup file sharing service oriented enterprise applications online transaction processing uncompressed video editing or digital content provisioning With its advanced storage management capabilities the RAID controller is an excellent choice for both on line and near line storage applications The following sections in this chapter will present an overview of features of the RAID controller and for more information about its features and benefits please see Appendix B 1 1 Overview e Seasoned Reliability The RAID controller supports various RAID levels O 1 3 5 6 and including multi level RAID like RAID 10 30 50 and 60 which perfectly balances performance and reliability To further ensure the long term data integrity the controller provides extensive maintenance utilities like periodic SMART monitoring disk cloning and disk scrubbing to proactively prevent performance degradation or data loss due to disk failure or latent bad sectors The controller also supports multi path I O MPIO solutions tolerating path failure
237. ion Administrator login to the controller Advice None D 60 Appendix D 61 Event ID 0x2410 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message Admin login failed Description Administrator failed to login to the controller c Check if there is any unauthorized trial access to the controller or Advice c b there are multiple administrator logins Event ID 0x2427 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message User login Description User login to the controller Advice None Event ID 0x2428 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message User login failed Description User failed to login to the controller Advice Check if there is any unauthorized trial access to the controller Event ID 0x240e Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message Service login Description Service login to the controller Advice None Event ID 0x2411 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message Service login failed Description Service failed to login to the controller Advice Check if there is any unauthorized trial access to the controller unang Event ID Ox240f Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Message A
238. ion E stride N of Linux ext3 file system and you can set the N as 64 for a ext3 LUN with 4KB allocation size on a 4 disk RAIDO LUN with 64KB stripe size 64 4x 64k 4k 6 Check RAID system health status Browse the monitoring web page see 2 2 Monitor Mode on page 2 5 and the event log see 2 9 Event Management on page 2 61 to make sure your systems are in a good shape Problems like bad blocks bad hard disks poor cabling or incompatible devices hurt performance because the RAID controller wastes its energy doing error recovery Also note that when the auto write through option see 2 9 5 Miscellaneous on page 2 66 is turned on failure of power supply units BBM or so would force the delayed write option to be off 7 Check I O path connections You have to make sure the bandwidth of I O path can deliver the performance you need For example if you install a quad port 4Gbps Fibre Channel HBA to a 4 lane PCle 1 0 slot your bandwidth will be limited 6 3 Troubleshooting to 1GB s bandwidth of the PCle slot You need also to check the data rate of I O paths is configured properly without degradation For example your 4Gbps Fibre Channel channels are configured to run at 2Gbps rate you need to check HBAs switch host interface ports and disk interface ports of the RAID system 8 Check hard disk settings Hard disks are the destination of all I O and thus also important to performance For hard disks that have variabl
239. ion is lost the member disk is removed or faulty and it results in a faulty logical disk The data on the faulty partition will be still in sync with data on other partitions The data on the faulty partition can be used after recovery e BANISH The partition is lost the member disk is removed or faulty and it results in a degraded logical disk The data on the banish partition will be out of sync with data on other partitions The data on the banish partition can t be used after recovery e REBUILD The member disk of the partition has been added to the logical disk and the partition is rebuilding the data e UNTRUST The member disk of the partition has been added to the logical disk but the data on the partition cannot be trusted It can become trusted if the logical disk can rebuild the data on the partition Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI e Partition state transition The corresponding events and state transitions of a partition are shown in the table below From To Disk is failed or removed FAULTY for faulty logical disk CRIM BANISH for degraded logical disk REBUILD BANISH UNTRUST BANISH Lost member disk is replaced by a new disk for disk rebuilding FAULTY UNTRUST The logical disk is not recoverable BANISH UNTRUST and later to REBUILD Lost member disk is restored to a disk group by the ARU FAULTY OPTIMAL UNTRUST and later to REBUILD Force to recover a logical disk by the
240. is down The system status will be returned back when it is restarted Registered defective RAID system The RAID system E Trouble requires your attention The system will be changed to Normal after the beeper is disabled Register a RAID system 1 Login to RAID systems with admin is required for the registration RAIDGuard Central will attempt to use the default admin password 0000 to login the selected RAID system If the password is incorrect it will Pop up a window to request for your input NOTE 1 If you register the selected RAID system three times with the wrong password the pop up password request window will close Re select the RAID system you want to register and the pop up window appears again If you have checked the checkbox to remember your password on the pop up password request window Once entered the correct password of each RAID system is automatically stored on your computer so that you do not need to retype it every time you register and unregister the corresponding RAID systems However the changed password will be discarded the next time you launch the RAIDGuard Central 3 After the registration is completed successfully a RAID system icon together with the IP address of the RAID system will be added to the RGC Agent branch in the Structure tree section Figure 5 38 shows the updated screen after the registration of two RAID systems is complete 5 69 Advance
241. isks 3 Click Apply The task will start according to the specified time To cancel hard disk cloning do the following 1 Select the task s and click Stop to abort disk cloning A confirmation prompt displays Click Confirm to cancel the cloning task Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI The target disk will become an unused disk If there is a degraded disk group and auto spare option is on the target disk will be used for rebuilding 2 7 9 Scrubbing This feature supports parity check and recovery for disk groups logical disks and hard disks Bad sectors will be reported when detected To perform disk scrubbing on a disk group do the following 1 Select Maintenance Utilities gt Scrubbing from the main menu 2 Click Scrub and specify the following options for a disk scrubbing task Target Type Select either HDD or DG as the scrubbing disk type HDD Specify an HDD ID for scrubbing DG Specify a DG ID and an LD ID AIl LDs for scrubbing Parity Check This option is only available for parity based RAID level LDs None No parity check is performed Check Only The controller checks the parity for logical disks Regenerate Any parity inconsistency detected is regenerated by the controller Schedule Immediately The task will start immediately Once The task will start on the specified date and time Weekly The task will start on the specified day and time every week Monthly The task will s
242. isplayed Press Y to start the Boot ROM update You can see the process percentage on the screen C 4 N Set IP address Load Image by TFTP Update Boot ROM Update System ROM H Utility menu Set Password R Restart system Q Quit amp Boot RAID system Cmd gt B Boot version 0 22 Download version 0 22 Update download Boot firmware Y N Y Boot ROM update S Update System RO M Press S to update the System ROM The firmware versions and the Update New System firmware message are displayed Press Y and the system starts to update the System ROM with the primary flash and backup flash You can see the process percentages on the screen C 4 Apendi N Set IP address L Load Image by TFIP B Update Boot ROM S Update System ROM H Utility menu P Set Password L L L L L R Restart system Q Quit amp Boot RAID system Cmd gt s System version 0 10 Beta 1 Download version 9 10 Beta 1 Update New System firmware N y Primary flash WRITE 100 Backup flash WRITE 3 _ NOTE Before a Boot ROM or System ROM update make sure you have loaded the image by TFTP server If not the following message displays Invalid image size load firmware first C 5 H Utility menu Press H to clear the Utility screen and recall the Boot Utility menu C 6 P Set password Press P to set or change the password for the Boot Utility login N Set IP address L Load Image by TFTP
243. istered to up to a maximum of four agents if the RAID system is not logged in for other services When the removed agent is registered to the RGC Server again all previously registered RAID systems will be also restored to the agent 5 70 Aulvanced Functions Functions NOTE 3 Each RAID system has a default administer password which is 0000 This password is required when registering and unregistering a RAID system If the password is changed a password request window appears 5 6 8 RAID System Monitoring After the RAID systems are registered the RAIDGuard Central will download the event logs from the RAID controller to local database RAIDGuard Central will also start sending out query packets every ten seconds to check the status of the RAID systems You may now do the following tasks by the RGC GUI 1 View the event logs of a RAID system 2 Save the event logs of a RAID system to a file 3 Launch the web GUI of a RAID system e View the event logs of a RAID system Click a registered RAID system on the structure tree The retrieved system information and existing event logs are displayed in the system panel Fy RAIDGuard Central GUI System Security Language Help 10 10 88 117 faa System Name unknown IP Address fing tot0get17 eet 10 1088 123 RW Version V1 22 Betal E unknown 10 10 88 166 jun 2 A ST un 29 3007 6 28 14 PM CST ot 0 i Ki
244. ive RAID levels The firmware supports a variety of RAID levels RAID O 1 3 5 6 10 30 50 60 NAND and JBOD You may freely choose the RAID levels that fit your applications well with a balanced set of performance capacity and reliability e Selective stripe sizes The firmware supports stripe sizes of 4KB 8KB 16KB 32KB 64KB 128KB 256KB and 512KB To serve small sized access smaller stripe sizes are advised to shorten the response time and increase the number of accesses processed On the other hand for bulky data access bigger stripe sizes are advised to improve the throughput B 3 O Apendi e Selective initialization method and mode To initialize a logical disk either data zeroing or background parity regeneration can be used The administrator can choose to execute the background initialization for all logical disks simultaneously or one by one sequentially To avoid confusing the operating systems the background initialization will also clean up the data on the first few sectors to erase the file system super blocks To speed up the initialization the administrator can also choose to initialize the disk group and skip the initialization of logical disks e Selective rebuild mode The rebuild mode of a disk group determines the rebuilding order of logical disks on the disk group Three rebuild modes are available parallel sequential and prioritized by which the rebuilding will be done simultaneously for
245. ized Similar to sequential rebuild mode this rebuilds one logical disk at a time but the order of logical disks to be rebuilt can determined by users Rebuild Task Priority Low Medium High This option sets the priority of the background task for disk rebuild of disk groups Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI Initialization Low Medium High Task Priority This option sets the priority of the background tasks for logical disk initialization of disk groups Utilities Task Low Medium High Priority This option sets the priority of the background tasks for utilities of disk groups These include RAID reconfiguration utilities and data integrity maintenance utilities NOTE 1 Progress rates increase in proportion to priority i e A high priority task runs faster than a low priority one 2 When there is no host access all tasks regardless of priority run at their fastest possible speed 3 When host access exists tasks run at their minimum possible speed e Detailed disk group information Click to display a complete list of disk group information You will see the following details e DGID e LD Rebuild Order e UUID e Rebuild Task Priority e Created Time and Date e Initialization Task Priority e Disk Cache Setting e Utilities Task Priority e LD Initialization Mode e Member Disk s Layout e LD Rebuild Mode e Original Member Disks 2 6 4 Logical disks This feature allows
246. k group expansion to expand the last existing free chunk If the disk group has free chunks in the end space the capacity of the free chunk will be increased after the expansion The capacity of existing logical disks will not be affected 5 53 Advanced Functions Disk group before Disk group after MDO MD1 MD2 MDO MD1 MD2 MD3 MD4 Figure 5 25 Disk group expansion by adding new member disks and enlarging the last free e Disk group expansion to create a free chunk If the disk group has no free chunks in the end space before expansion a new free chunk will be created Disk group before Disk group after MDO MD1 MD2 MD3 MD4 Figure 5 26 Disk group expansion by adding new member disks and creating a new free chunk e Disk group expansion to consolidate free chunks When disk group expansion is executed in a disk group where free chunks between logical disks exist the free chunks are consolidated and placed in the end space of the disk group after expansion Disk group before Disk group after DO MD1 MD DO MD1 MD2 MD3 MD4 Figure S 27 Disk snub Bu to consolidate free NOTE It is suggested that defragmentation should be performed during disk group expansion In the cases shown in Figures 5 24 5 25 and 5 26 defragmentation forms an organized collocation for all logical disks and free chunks after expansion 5 5 5 Volume expansion and shrink 5 54 Adlvanced Functions Fu
247. k thes Said Ack cia had Cs 2 11 2 3 SAS JBOD Enclosure Display for SAS expansion controller only 2 12 2 3 1 Rear side monitor of the SAS JBOD chassis sss 2 13 2 3 2 SAS JBOD Installation with RAID subsystem essere 2 13 2 3 9 M nitor Mode e E a O E E ea E t ea EEE aa Ea ataa 2 16 2 3 4 Information ICONS sse eas eee 2 17 2 3 0 SAS SATA TDD information sneen eleven e ads lessee 2 17 24 Config es stot es ei is Fare eh hr or aed ee i ti nd eh ad ms eek a ol a 2 18 20 QUICK SOWIPS s TT 2 19 2 5 1 Performance eie 2 19 2 9 2 RAID SO UU eaaa e re E e a A eti aa aeaii da 2 20 2 0 RAID Manage ment reeet tenei aeee E 25 seme 92T RENET EE eE 2 21 26 Haele bel er ea etc eae ee aa ESE E E eet A AaS teat ta ee 2 21 2 02JBOD T 2 23 2 0 3 DISK JroUPS its e e a aeda 2 25 2 6 4 LogicaldisSkS sege a a ee a E a ae e E A E AE E a a 2 27 209 VOlUMES ee a a edad Mane t ates 2 31 2 6 6 Snapshot Volumes eee 2 34 2 6 Storage PrOVISIONING scec2sccsanexesecescuue teccar tieteiden penent tintua e rege EK 2 36 2 7 Maintenance Utilities eee eee eee 2 43 2 7 H Expanding diSK QrOUpS rerien inedi a diaaa a 2 43 vii 2 1 2 Defragmenting disk groups sss eee eee 2 43 2 7 3 Changing RAID level stripe size for logical disks eee 2 44 2 7 4 Expanding the capacity of logical disks in a disk group sese 2 45 2 7 5 Shrinking logical disks sss 2 46 2 1 20 EXPaliGinG Volumes assire erie e e a Reet 2 46 2 7 7 Shrinking volUMeS 2500 28th dent ant inl deter det
248. ke back all the background tasks e Multi path IO MPIO and controller preference When using SAS host interface or using FC host interface without a switch the redundant controller system requires MPIO driver installed at host side 5 21 Advanced Functions Functions for I O redirection during controller failover and failback You have to symmetrically export the same LUN mappings for all host interface ports such that a virtual disk can be seen by all I O paths of both controllers and controller failover failback can work After LUN configurations and host interface connections are done please install the MPIO drivers provided by your RAID system supplier to set up the redundant controller configurations The redundant controller solution is compliant with T10 TPGS Target Port Group Standard architecture When a virtual disk is created one of the two controllers is assigned to it as the preferred controller see the Preferred Controller option in Section 2 6 2 2 6 4 and 2 6 5 for creating JBOD disk logical disk and volume respectively When the I O paths from host computers to the virtual disk are available and the preferred controller is online the MPIO driver will dispatch the I O to the paths of the preferred controller for the virtual disk Owner controller and preferred controller The controller implements the ALUA Asymmetric Logical Unit Access algorithm to ensure that only one controller is allowed to access
249. kground tasks of a failed controller can be online taken over by the survival controller And when the failed controller is replaced by a new controller the system will return to optimal operation by redistributing the host IO access and background tasks back to the original controller e Support UPS monitoring The firmware can monitor the attached UPS by the SMART UPS protocol through the RS232 ports When the AC power is gone the firmware will conduct the graceful shutdown to avoid unwanted data loss The administrator can also configure the UPS to determine the shutdown and restart policies e Online array roaming When a storage system cannot be recovered in a short time the best choice to put the data on disk drives back online is to conduct the array roaming by which the disk drives can be installed in another storage system and the RAID configurations are recovered instantly Besides the background tasks previously running on the disk drives are also resumed With the online array roaming the administrator can online install the disk drives one by one to the system and import the disk groups later This avoids disrupting the running storage system and simplifies the roaming process e Online array recovery There are chances of RAID crash resulted from the transient failure of multiple disk drives and the disk drives can still be working after being re powered The drives might stall when its firmware is locked or be unstable
250. ks to speed up the task execution or to prevent the task from disturbing the host accesses For more flexibility the priority control is independently set for different types of background task B 12 Extensive Supportive Tools In addition to the fundamental storage functions the RAID controller firmware also provides extensive supportive tools that help the administrator to do a better job when managing the storage resources These tools are aimed to offer full control to the storage devices so as to make the most of the storage system as well as to simplify the management tasks Most of these features are derived from the feedback of our customers or users who are experts of storage and servers They might not be considered when doing specification comparison but the administrator will definitely discover their usefulness when doing the real world jobs e Object names and creation time Most of the major manageable logical objects like disk groups logical disks or host groups can be labeled with text as their names or memos The administrator is then freed from memorizing those identifiers The creation time is also recorded so that the administrator can easily trace the age of the objects e Augmented RAID parameters In addition to frequently used RAID configurations like RAID levels the firmware provides also alignment offset and disk group size truncation The former is to improve IO performance by shifting the starting LBA so as
251. l disk To release free space of a logical disk on a disk group do the following 1 Select Maintenance Utilities gt LD Reconfiguration from the main menu 2 Click Shrink and specify the following options for an LD shrink task DG ID LD ID Select a DG ID and an LD ID from the drop down menu for shrink Capacity MB Enter the new capacity for the specified logical disk to be shrunk Note that the new capacity must be higher than zero NOTE It is advised that the file systems on the host be shrunk before shrinking the logical disks otherwise shrinking might cause data loss or file system corruption 3 Click Apply to view the current settings 4 Click Confirm The task starts 2 7 6 Expanding volumes To expand the capacity of a volume do the following 1 Select Maintenance Utilities gt VOL Reconfiguration from the main menu 2 Select Expand and specify the following options for a VOL expansion task The expansion volume is formed by concatenating new logical disks VOL ID Select a VOL ID from the drop down menu for expansion LD Level Select a RAID level to filter a list of expanding LDs Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI Expanding LDs_ Select and use the arrow buttons to move one or more LDS from the Available LDs list to the Expanding LDs list NOTE The volume must be in optimal state 1 2 The maximum number of member logical disks for each volume is eight No two logic
252. l disk by allocating an adjacent free chunk If there is a free chunk right after the logical disk the required capacity of the logical disk can be allocated immediately via the free chunk DG Figure 5 22 Logical disk capacity expansion by allocating an adjacent free chunk e Expand a logical disk by moving logical disks to a free chunk 5 52 Adlvanced Functions Functions If there is no free chunk right after the selected logical disk the controller will start a background task to move nearby logical disks to fill the requested capacity Figure 5 23 Logical disk capacity expansion by moving logical disks to a free chunk e Expand a logical disk by allocating an adjacent free chunk and moving logical disks If the free chunk right after the selected logical disk is not sufficient for expansion the controller will allocate the free chunk and also start a background task to move logical disks LD0 E LD0 LD 1 7 e expand LD 1 free chunk 0 LD 1 LD 2 free chunk 1 free chunk 1 DG DG Figure 5 24 Logical disk capacity expansion by allocating an adjacent free chunk and moving logical disks 5 5 4 Disk group expansion Disk group expansion can be used to increase the useable space of a disk group by adding one or more disks to the disk group When the expansion task is complete the new space is created in the end space of the disk group Logical disks can be created in the space set up by the expansion e Dis
253. lO allows a host computer to access a RAID system over multiple paths for enhancing system availability and performance The RAID system supports multi path IO either with the bundled proprietary software or by the native multi path IO software of the operating systems The following RAID systems support multi path IO solutions e 4Gb s FC SAS SATA RAID system e 3Gb s SAS SAS SATA RAID system The single controller systems support the following operating systems e Windows 2003 Server 32 bit 64 bit OS PathGuard e Linux with 2 6 x series kernel like SLES 9 10 RHAS 4 5 RHEL 4 5 Device Mapper multi path driver e Solaris 10 OS MpxlO Multiplexed I O e MAC OS X default driver e VMWare ESX default driver The dual controller systems support the following operating systems e Windows 2003 Server 32 bit 64 bit OS PathGuard e Linux with 2 6 x series kernel like SLES 9 10 RHAS 4 5 RHEL 4 5 Device Mapper and proprietary multi path driver For the updated interoperability list and the bundled multi path software please contact your supplier 5 1 2 Benefits Below are the summarized benefits of the multi path IO solution s Higher availability With redundant paths the failure of single path will not result in corruption of the whole system and the applications can continue to access the storage devices without being aware of the path failures This highly enhances the availability of the whole system s Higher performanc
254. le You may find similar utilities from your HBA and switch vendors 15 Know more about performance benchmarking And finally you have to understand that the test result of performance benchmark tool is not always related to your real world performance You have to be careful with choose right tools and right testing workload profiles to mimic your application behaviors 6 4 Hard Disks Hard disks are the most important components in a RAID system because they are where the data resides Please contact your RAID system supplier to get the list of qualified hard disk models when you re choosing hard disks 1 Hard disks cannot be recognized by the RAID controller The hard disks are initialized by the RAID controller when the controller boots up or when the hard disks are plugged into the RAID system If a hard disk cannot be ready within a specific period of time during the initialization the RAID controller will force the hard disks enter faulty state and you cannot see any model information of hard disks To ensure hard disks have enough time for power on you may extend the delay time when boot up of the RAID controller see 2 8 1 Hard disks on page 2 56 2 Hard disks are offline unexpected The RAID controller takes a hard disk offline when the hard disk cannot respond to the RAID controller after the full cycle error recovery procedure has been done This could happen when the hard disk is permanently dead because of its internal
255. led logical disk information Click gt to display a complete list of logical disk information You will see the following details e DGID e Write Cache Setting e LDID e Write Sorting e UUID e Read Ahead Policy e Created Time and Date e Read Ahead Multiplier e LD Read Algorithm e Read Logs e Alignment Offset sector e Member State e Write Cache Status 2 6 5 Volumes This feature allows you to create delete and modify your volume settings RAID 30 50 60 are supported by creating striping volumes over RAID 3 5 6 logical disks e Create volumes Click Create to add a new volume where up to a maximum of 32 volumes can be created Specify the following options for the configuration VOL ID Select a VOL ID from the drop down menu Name Use the system default name as volx x is the VOL identifier OR Uncheck the Use system default name box and enter the name in the Name field The maximum name length is 63 bytes LD Level Select a RAID level to filter a list of member LDs LD Owner This option is only available when the redundant Controller controller system is in use Select the owner controller of the member LDs Only the LDs whose owner controller are equal to the specified will be filtered out in Member LDs Member LDs Select the LDs to be grouped Preferred This option is only available when the redundant Controller controller system is in use Select the preferred controller to
256. lity menu P Set Password R Restart system Q Quit amp Boot RAID system Cmd gt Appendix There are eight items in the Boot Utility menu C 1 N Set IP address L Load Image by TFTP B Update Boot ROM S Update System ROM N Set IP address H Utility menu P Set Password R Restart system Q Quit amp Boot RAID system The Boot Utility allows you to update the Boot ROM and System ROM First you need to set the controller and server IP addresses Press N to enter the settings 1 Set the Board IP address and press Enter 2 Set the Server IP address and press Enter 3 Press Y to save the settings N Set IP address L Load Image by TFTP B Update Boot ROM S Update System ROM H Utility menu Plet Password R Rest art system Q Quit amp Boot RAID system Cmd gt n Board IP address 10 10 88 102 Server IP address 10 10 100 218 Save setting N y Cmd gt _ If your system supports redundant controller press N and you are required to set the following IP addresses N Set IP address L Load Image by TFTP B Update Boot ROM S Update System ROM H Utility menu P Set Password R Restart system Q Quit amp Boot RAID system Command n Server_IP address 10 10 88 77 IP address 10 100 mask ad Gateway address dress 259 295 2 10 10 88 254 Command gt 1 Set the Server IP address and press Enter 2 Set the Local IP address and pr
257. ller so that the administrator can easily track the execution history of the tasks The firmware also sends out notifications to inform the administrator about the current status of the tasks As a result the administrator can easily monitor the progress just like they are with the storage systems e Task progress monitoring and auto resume The firmware regularly provides the progress report of task execution as well as estimates when the tasks will be completed This helps the administrator to better plan the corresponding actions and manage the expectation of end users in the organization The progress is recorded on the hard disks and if the storage system is restarted either normally or abnormally the tasks will be automatically resumed at the point when the storage system is powered off e Disk rebuild priority over maintenance tasks There are chances that a disk might fail during the execution of maintenance tasks To minimize the period of RAID degradation the maintenance task will be aborted or paused and disk rebuilding will be executed immediately This reduces the risk of data loss and avoids Appendix unwanted performance impact When the rebuilding is done the paused tasks will be automatically resumed e Task priority control Executing the background tasks needs to occupy system resources like CPU time memory bandwidth or access to disk drive The administrator can choose the priority of the background tas
258. loop connection The connection shown in Figure 2 15 enables all the three JBOD chassis to be looped through the redundant controller system In this way the data is transmitted from node to node around the loop Once the JBOD2 is failed and causes interruption JBOD1 and JBOD3 still work normally via the redundant path Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI 2 3 3 Monitor mode When SAS JBOD chassis are connected the enclosure tabs will appear in the Monitor Mode see Figure 2 16 Each tab view displays Enclosure tabs SSE SG a different information for each gt o connected enclosure Click wee et the Enclosure 0 tab to view the information of the local RAID subsystem Click the 2 Enclosure 1 Enclosure 2 or S Enclosure 3 tabs for a brief a view of the connected SAS JBOD Figure 2 16 SAS enclosure monitor mode Each SAS JBOD has an unique chassis identifier which can be detected automatically by the GUI when connected The chassis identifier corresponds to the enclosure tab number shown in the GUI In this way users can identify and manage each SAS JBOD easily and correctly However the enclosure tabs are always displayed in ascending order of chassis identifiers instead of the chassis connection order The number of enclosure tabs may be different according the number of connected SAS JBOD chassis For more information see s For redundant controller with redundant J
259. mand diskscrubstop Synopsis diskscrubstop dgx dgxldy hnddx Description S disk scrubbing in a disk group a logical disk or a hard Command regparity Synopsis regparity dgx dgxldy Description Regenerate the parity of a logical disk or the logical disks of disk group with parity based RAID level Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands Command regparitystop Synopsis regparitystop dgxidy dgx igre 4 3 3 Task priority control Command hddutilpri Synopsis hddutilpri priority Description Show or set the utilities task priority of non DG hard disks Parameters priority low medium or high Command dgrebpri Synopsis dgrebpri dgx priority Description Set the rebuild task priority of a disk group Parameters priority low medium or high Command dginitpri Synopsis dginitori dgx priority Description Set the initialization task priority of a disk group Parameters priority low medium or high Command dguitilpri Synopsis dgutilori dox priority Description Set the utilities task priority of a disk group Parameters priority low medium or high 4 3 4 Task schedule management Command schedulecreate Synopsis schedulecreate s YYYY MM DD hh mm m DD hh mm w WD hh mm command Description Sa or a periodic schedule for a CLI s YYYY MM DD hh mm the target date time m DD hh mm monthly Parameters w WD hh mm weekly
260. may also set the language manually RAIDGuard Central allows adding more languages Please contact your RAID system supplier if you want to use other languages 5 6 2 Deployment Overview RAIDGuard Central consists of the following three software components RAIDGuard Central Server RGC Server RAIDGuard Central Agent RGC Agent and RAIDGuard Central GUI RGC GUI RGC Server is the main software component of RAIDGuard Central responsible for RAID system monitoring event consolidation and event notification RGC Server communicates with RGC Agents which are installed on computers in different networks one RGC Agent for one network to discover RAID systems and receive events RGC Server also provides information to the RGC GUI which may be launched either locally on the same computer of RGC Server or remotely with web browsers RGC Server is embedded with a web server When you launch the web GUI of a RAID system on RGC GUI the RGC Server and RGC Agent will forward the packets between the remote web browser and the web GUI server on the RAID system The illustration below shows how RGC software components can be deployed to build a centralized RAID management and monitoring infrastructure A computer is chosen to execute RGC Server and RGC Agents are installed to different networks for communicating with the RAID systems in each network Note that RGC Server alone cannot communicate with RAID systems you need To install also an RGC A
261. mmands the CLI Commands Command hddxfermode Synopsis hddxfermode mode Specify the transfer mode of hard disks in the enclosure Description The possible values of mode are Auto default 1 5Gb and 3Gb Command hddqueue Synopsis hddqueue on off Description Enable or disable the IO queuing of hard disks Command hdddelayaccess Synopsis hdddelayaccess b xxsec Description Specify the delay time before the controller tries to access the hard disks after power on Parameters b boot up delay access time Command hddverify Synopsis hddverify on off Enable or disable the write commands for initialization or Descripion rebuilding data on logical disks Command hddlistconf Synopsis hddlistconf Description List the current hardware configurations of all hard disks 4 5 2 SAS ports Command sasname Synopsis sasname sasx name Description A Sent eA name of a SAS port sasx as name The Command saslistcurconf Synopsis saslistcurconf sasx all Description pe eee al configurations of a SAS port sasx or all 4 5 3 SCSI ports Command scpname Synopsis scpname scpx name 4 24 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands You can sets the name of a SCSI port scpx as name The 4 5 4 Pescipnon default is scpx Command
262. mmediately box Write Cache This option enables or disables the write cache of a volume Write Sorting This option enables or disables the sorting in the write cache To improve writing performance it is recommended to turn this option on for random access This option is available only if the write cache is on Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI Read Ahead Always The controller performs pre fetching data Policy for every read command from hosts Adaptive The controller performs pre fetching only for host read commands that are detected as sequential reads The detection is done by read logs Off If there is no sequential read command read ahead will result in overhead and you can disable the read ahead Read Ahead This option specifies the read ahead multiplier for Multiplier the Always and Adaptive read ahead policies Select how much additional sequential data will be pre fetched The default value is 8 Read Logs This option specifies the number of concurrent sequential read streams for the Adaptive read ahead policy and the range is between 1 and 128 The default value is 32 To clear write buffers in the write cache of a volume select a volume and click the Flush button e Create volume VOL snapshot volume pair Instead of creating volume pairs in the Snapshot Volumes page you can directly create volume pair to a specified volume by clicking the VOL button Specify a virtual disk a
263. mum capacity of primary secondary spare COW volume is 16TB The minimum capacity of secondary volume is 32MB The minimum capacity of spare COW volume is 128MB The maximum number of spare COW volumes is 128 5 4 3 How to Use Snapshots e Overview To make the most use of the snapshot function proper planning and configuration is of essence Below is a list of related tasks grouped into three phases Phase 1 Planning 4 Identify the source volumes that need to have snapshots 2 Define how many snapshots will be taken and how long they will exist 3 Allocate the disk space and RAID attributes of the secondary volumes 4 Allocate the disk space and RAID attributes of the soare COW volume Phase 2 Configuration 5 Create volumes of the secondary volumes 6 Select a secondary volume for each source volume primary volume 7 Set up snapshot options like overflow alert 8 Build snapshot automation scripts and conduct trail runs optionally Phase 3 Creating and Utilizing Snapshots Manually or Scripted 5 41 Advanced Functions Functions When taking a snapshot for a source volume the tasks below are required 9 Stop all the write access to the LUN of the primary volume 10 Flush the cached data on the memory of your host systems 11 Create the snapshot volume 12 Resume the write access to the LUN of the primary volume 13 Export the snapshot volume to a LUN for your applications optionally
264. n sectors detected y inconsistent rows found and z rows recov ered If the number of bad sectors grows exceptionally fast or beyond Advice a reasonable number consider to conduct diagnostics and replace with new disks D 21 unang Event ID 0x206d Scrub Prog ress Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID LD_ID Notify threshold Message Scrub progress w on DGxLDy reach to the notify percent z The progress of scrubbing on dgxlidy has reached the pre define Description i reshold Advice None e Disk group parity regeneration Event ID 0x2024 Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters DG ID Message Reg parity on DGx started Description Reg parity on dgx was started manually Advice None Event ID 0x2026 Type TASK Severity WARNING Parameters DG ID Message Reg parity on DGx aborted Description Reg parity on dgx was aborted Advice Check if the disk group is busy or non optimal Event ID 0x2027 Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters DG ID Message Reg parity on DGx stopped Description Reg parity on dgx was stopped manually Advice None Event ID 0x2025 Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Message Reg parity on DGx completed Description Reg parity on dgx was completed Advice None D 22 Appendix
265. n a copy of a volume can be created instantaneously and the backup or replication operations can be performed on the snapshot volume so the time to freeze a volume for backup can be largely reduced Testing Applications with Real World Data Because snapshot is created from production volume and its data is writeable independently from the original volume you can use the snapshot to test new applications to find potential problems after software upgrade or patch Supporting SAN based Applications A snapshot volume can be exported to other host computers to offload the backup or other applications from the host computers owning the 5 38 Aulvanced Functions Functions working volume This improves the system performance as well as frees you from installing all applications on all the host computers NOTE Please test your backup scenarios and restored data with your applications For sophisticated applications like database the restored data of the primary volume has to be in sync with data on other volumes in order to ensure proper operations of the applications 5 4 2 How Snapshot Works e Snapshot Volume Pair and Copy On Write Operations Before creating snapshots for a working volume another volume secondary volume is needed to be associated with the working volume primary volume to form a snapshot volume pair You can use JBOD disks logical disks or volumes as primary or secondary volumes After a snapsh
266. n HDDx All entries of the bad block reallocation table were occupied Description and neither reallocation nor block invalidation could be done if new bad sectors are detected Advice Replace with new disks to prevent data loss D 32 Appendix Event ID 0x1403 Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message Out of BBR spare blocks on HDDx On disk reserved space for bad block reallocation was occu Description pied reallocation cannot proceed if new bad sectors are detected Advice Replace with new disks to prevent from data loss D 33 Appendix On disk metadata Event ID 0x0814 Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message Write primary metadata on HDDx failed The controller failed to access the primary RAID metadata stored Description on hddx and the metadata was non trustable However the secondary RAID metadata still works c Start to monitor more carefully the status of the secondary RAID Advice NESA metadata on this disk Event ID 0x0815 Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message Write secondary metadata on HDDx failed The controller failed to access the secondary RAID metadata Description stored on hddx and the metadata was invalid However the pri mary RAID metadata still works Advi Start to monitor more carefully the stat
267. n Timeout Fast UTIL gt Advanced Adapter Settings gt Port Down Retry Count e LSI FC HBA LSI command line Utility LSIUtil gt Change FC Port settings gt Initiator Device Timeout Contact your HBA vendor for more information about these settings 6 Linux pauses for a while during boot up with dual controller system Because it takes time for Linux to test the standby LUNs of a controller you might experience long boot up time of Linux but it hurts nothing after the Linux is running If you want to reduce the boot up time please follow the procedures below after completing the installation of multi oath driver Troubleshooting s Edit etc modprobe conf RedHat or etc modprobe conf local SUSE 10 to add this line options scsi_mod dev_flags Accusys ACS92102 0x 1000 e Change to the boot directory and build the ramdisk image with the following command mkinitrd f initrd 2 6 kernel_version img kernel_version RedHat or mkinitrd SUSE 10 e Reboot the Linux system 7 Constant path failover or many disk timeout errors reported at host Under heavy I O loading the operating systems might experience long O response time and falsely report I O error when the response time is over its I O timeout value The MPIO driver might also be informed of I O or path failure and the preferred I O path would be changed constantly This would severely hurt the performance Extending the I O timeout value of your OS or applic
268. n by SNMP traps and watch the status of a RAID system Please contact your RAID system provider to get the MIB Management Information Base file and import the MIB file to your SNMP manager before enabling this feature Notify State On Off default This option enables or disables the SNMP trap event notifications SNMP Agent State On Off default This option enables or disables the SNMP Agent for status watching Port 161 default Set up the port by which the SNMP Agent receives the status retrieval commands from SNMP applications Community Name public default Set up the community name as the authentication string between the SNMP Agent and SNMP applications Add SNMP Event Receivers Servers You can have up to three SNMP servers to receive SNMP event notification packets Click Add to choose a Server ID and set its SNMP server address port and the corresponding protocol version community name and severity level Server ID 0 1 2 Select a server ID from the drop down menu Server Address IP Address Domain Name Set up the IP address or the domain name of the SNMP server Port 162 default Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI Set up the port on which the SNMP server receives SNMP event notification packets SNMP Version v1 default v2c Specify the SNMP version and the event notification type Choosing v1 for SNMP trap event notification and choosing v2c for SNMP I
269. n order 1 Ensure enough unused space in the file system of a partition 2 Shrink the file system on the partition by your file system utility 3 Shrink the partition on the LUN by your partition editor 4 Shrink the corresponding logical disk or volume by the firmware utility 5 Rescan the physical drives by your operating system utility e Capabilities at host to support LUN resizing Proper LUN resizing depends on the capabilities of your operating system partition editor and file system utilities It is advised to check the related manuals and do some trial runs before doing LUN resizing for your production site You may use file system check utilities after the resizing for ensuring data integrity Below list the software that offers solutions fo support partition resizing e Symantec Partition Magic http www symantec com s Paragon Partition Manager http www paragon software com e Arconis Disk Director http www acronis com e Coriolis Systems iPartition MAC OS http www coriolis systems com There are also utilities offered by operating systems or file systems and below are some examples e Windows 2003 server or later DiskPart see 5 5 6 Windows DiskPart Utility e Linux ext2 ext3 file systems resize2fs e Linux ReiserFS file system resize_reiserfs e Linux XFS file system xfs_growfs e Linux GNU parted partition editor http www gnu org software parted e Symantec Veritas VxFS fsadm and extendf
270. n the Firefox browser and select Tools gt Options gt Advanced gt General tab 2 Click the Choose button to specify your preferred language for the GUI to display Options a x ba GO SU aa S G Main Tabs Content Feeds Privacy Security Advanced General Network Update Encryption Accessibility T Always use the cursor keys to navigate within pages T Search for text when I start typing r Browsing JV Use autoscrolling T Use smooth scrolling IC Check my spelling as I type r Languages Choose your preferred language for displaying pages OK Cancel Help Figure 2 2 Setting the language in Firefox 2 2 Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI 3 The following Languages dialog displays To add a language click Select a language to add choose the language and click the Add button Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the languages in order of priority and the Remove button if you need to remove a language Click OK x Web pages are sometimes offered in more than one language Choose languages for displaying these web pages in order of preference Languages in order of preference English United States en us J English en G love Down Remove select a language to add Add Cancel Help Figure 2 3 Languages dialog Firefox 4 Click OK again to confirm the settings 2 1 2 Multiple System Viewer The RAID GU
271. n the hard disks cannot be recognized by the controller You need to erase the configuration information on the hard disks for your RAID system to use the hard disks If you need not to retain the data and the configurations on the hard disks you can clear configurations on the hard disks see 2 10 1 Restoring to factory settings on page 2 67 You may also turn off the On line Array Roaming option See 2 7 16 Miscellaneous on page 2 55 With that the RAID controller will not check the stored configuration information of hard disks and see any newly installed hard disks as hard disks without configurations You may remove and then re install the unknown hard disks to the system either manually or by GUI 2 6 1 Hard disks on page 2 21 The hard disk state will return to Unused state If you need your data and configurations please contact your system supplier for solutions 6 9 Troubleshooting 5 Hard disk shows Conflict state The Conflict state indicates that the hard disk contains valid RAID configurations but the controller cannot work with such configurations If the conflict is because the cache unit size of the controller is bigger than the stripe size of the logical disk on the hard disks you can change the cache unit size see 2 7 16 Miscellaneous on page 2 55 and restart the system to accommodate the logical disk The cache management algorithm requires that the cache unit size has to be equal to or smaller th
272. n the redundant controller system is in use all the LUN statistics information in both controllers Controller A and B will be displayed on the screen Click amp to see a complete list of LUN information You will see the specified LUN ID and its histogram output in the following sectors The histogram output shows the sizes that the read and write commands return e LUN ID e 32 Sector e 1 Sector e Dd Sector e 2 Sector e 128 Sector e 4 Sector e 256 Sector e 8 Sector e 512 Sector e 16 Sector 2 11 4 Storage port 2 78 This feature allows you to enable disable or reset storage port IO logging When storage port IO logging is enabled the following statistics of a FC ports or SAS port will be displayed You can press the Reset button to clear all statistics to zero Category Display HTP ID FC SAS port identifier Link Failure The value of the LINK FAILURE COUNT field of the Link Count Error Status Block for the port Loss of Sync Count The value of the LOSS OF SYNCHRONIZATION COUNT field of the Link Error Status Block for the port Loss of Signal Count The value of the LOSS OF SIGNAL COUNT field of the Link Error Status Block for the port Invalid TX Word Count The value of the INVALID TRANSMISSION WORD field of the Link Error Status Block for the port Invalid CRC Count The value of the INVALID CRC COUNT field of the Link Error Status Block for the port Usingthe RAID G
273. nal sequential data will be pre fetched The default value is 8 Read Logs This option specifies the number of concurrent sequential read streams for the Adaptive read ahead policy and the range is between 1 and 128 The default value is 32 LD Read This option is only available for logical disks with Algorithm parity based RAID level i e RAID 3 5 6 None None of the algorithms will be used when accessing data disks Intelligent Data Computation The controller will access logical disks within the shortest resoonse time This greatly enhances read performance Fast Read Response When this option is selected you are prompted to enter the maximum response time for all read requests The allowed range for response time is 100 to 15000 msecs Check on Read This option is similar to the Fast Read Response In addition to reading the requested data from disks the controller will also perform parity check across corresponding strips on each data disk To clear write buffers in the write cache of a logical disk select a logical disk and click the Flush button Create logical disk LD snapshot volume pair Instead of creating volume pairs in the Snapshot Volumes page you can directly create volume pair to a specified logical disk by clicking the S VOL button Specify a virtual disk as the secondary volume from the SV ID drop down menu then click the Apply button to confirm Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI e Detai
274. nctions The capacity of a volume can be online expanded by adding the logical disks to the volume which concatenates the space of each logical disk to form a larger capacity Because the expansion is done instantly without incurring any background tasks you can quickly start using the added capacity without waiting Users can also reduce the capacity of a volume by removing the concatenated logical disks Freely expanding and shrinking a volume enables efficient storage resource management Striping A volume formed by single volume unit VU 1 1 JI MV2 MV3 et ae TS Na 4 on 1 Figure 5 28 Striping member Concatenating A volume formed by multiple volume units VU 2 1 VU 2 2 VU 2 3 VU 2 4 MV 2 1 MV 2 2 B MV 2 4 VOL 2 coneatenating 2 concatenating Figure 5 29 Concatenating member Concatenated striping A volume formed by concatenating set of striping member volumes VU 3 1 striping VU 3 2 striping I I sil gggggop MV 3 1 MV 3 2 MV 3 3 MV 3 4 MV 3 5 MV 3 6 MV 3 7 De VOL 3 concatenating two sets VU3 1 amp VU 3 2 Figure 5 30 Concatenated striping member 5 5 6 Windows DiskPart Utility The Microsoft Diskpart utility is a command line program for managing the disk partitions or volumes on Windows systems You can use it for repartitioning drives deleting partitions creating partitions changing drive letters and shrinking or expanding volumes by using scripts or direct input from a comma
275. nd 2 19 maximum throughput 2 19 PPP port setting 2 61 I 2 Co R RAID 0 defined A 3 striped disk array without fault tolerance A 3 RAID 1 defined A 4 mirroring A 4 RAID 10 defined A 8 high reliability setup combined with high performance A 8 RAID 3 defined A 5 parallel transfer with parity A 5 RAID 30 defined A 9 byte striping with parity combined with block striping A 9 RAID 5 defined A 6 independent data disks with distributed parity blocks A 6 RAID 50 defined A 10 block striping with distributed parity combined with block striping A 10 RAID 6 defined A 7 independent data disks with double parity blocks A 7 RAID 60 defined A 11 striping with dual parity A 11 RAID system redundant rear view 2 9 2 10 RAID system single rear view 2 9 RAID quick setup 2 20 RAIDGuard central features and benefits 5 58 recovery procedures 2 53 redundant controller 5 21 active active mode 5 25 dual independent mpio hosts 5 29 dual mpio clustering hosts 5 31 single mpio host dual channel 5 25 single mpio host quad channel 5 26 active passive mode single mpio host dual channel 5 33 controller failback 5 36 controller failover 5 35 data synchronization 5 34 notification messages 5 37 path failback 5 35 setting the preferred controller 5 25 regenerating parity 2 50 remove LUNs from host 2 40 remove LUNs in storage group 2 42 restoring to factory settings 2 68 RGC components RAIDGuard Central Agent RGC Agen
276. nd config mode sss sese 2 6 Hard disk tode marrana eae at bss Ee e e a ea aetna 2 6 Information ICONS sse eee eee eee 2 7 Hard disks tray color eee eee 2 7 Components at the rear side of the system eee eee e 2 10 Login usernames and passwordS sss sees eee eee 2 11 Supported number of redundant SAS JBOD chassis and hard disks 2 12 Information icons in SAS monitor mode sese ee eee eee eee 2 17 Performance profile values esse eee eee 2 19 Hard disk information 5 ait 520 oe ected sleet ee Vcc eats aeterni 2 21 Limitations of the number of member disks eee 2 44 Slate transition sessi Ree 2 53 List Of status MESSAGES eee eee 3 3 List of emergent messages eee 3 4 List of background task messages sse eee 3 5 MPIO device information sss sese eee 5 10 System status information see eee 5 69 The capacity correlated with sector size e 6 9 ee paras Figure 1 1 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 18 Figure 2 19 Figure 2 20 Figure 2 21 Figure 2 22 Figure 2 23 Figure 2 24 Figure 2 25 Figure 2 26 Figure 2 27 Figure 2 28 Figure 2 29 Figure 3 1 List of Figures Layered storage objects eee 1 8 GW IOGIA SCKEGI Ca iaeoe e e aeee Se 2 1 Setting the language in Firefox sse eee 2 2 Languages dialog Firefox eee 2 3 Multiple system viewer side button sss se
277. nd prompt The Diskpart utility is embedded in Windows Server XP 2003 and Vista operating system If can also support Windows 2000 but you need to download it from Microsoft web site 5 55 Advanced Functions Functions For a list of commands that you can use within the Diskpart console you can type help to get some information For the help instructions for a particular command you can type the name of the command followed by help such as select help The Diskpart utility can support online expansion of basic and dynamic disks for all Windows operating systems but partition shrinking is supported only on Windows Vista Below are basic examples to illustrate how to do expansion and shrink by the Diskpart NOTE For details about the capabilities and limitations of the Diskpart utility please check Microsoft web site and make sure you have a full backup before the operations Do extend a partition Before expansion please make sure that there is contiguous free soace available next to the partition to be extended on the same LUN with no partitions in between If there is no free space you can extend the LUN by extending its corresponded logical disk or volume in the RAID system Step1 At a command prompt type Diskpart exe Launches the utility Step2 At the DISKPART prompt type Select Disk 1 Selects the disk Step3 At the DISKPART prompt type Select Volume 1 Selects the volume Step4 At the DISKPA
278. ne by read logs Off If there is no sequential read command read ahead will result in overhead and you can disable the read ahead Read Ahead Multiplier This option specifies the read ahead multiplier for the Always and Adaptive read ahead policies Select how much additional sequential data will be pre fetched The default value is 8 Read Logs This option specifies the number of read logs for the Adaptive read ahead policy The range is between 1 and 128 The default value is 32 To clear write buffers in the write cache of a JBOD disk select a JBOD and click the Flush button Create JBOD volume pair Instead of creating volume pairs in the Snapshot Volumes page you can directly create volume pair to a specified JBOD disk by clicking the VOL button Specify a virtual disk as the secondary volume from the SV ID drop down menu then click the Apply button to confirm Detailed JBOD disk information Click to display a complete list of JBOD disk information You will see the following details JBOD ID e Write Sorting UUID e Read Ahead Policy Created Time and Date e Read Ahead Multiplier Write Cache Status e Read Logs Write Cache Setting Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI 2 6 3 Disk groups This feature allows you to create delete and modify your disk group settings e Create disk groups Click Create to add a new disk group where up to a maximum of 8 disk groups can be created Specify t
279. net Ethernet V O Interface Terminal TCPAP TCPAP FC SAS SCSI Embedded CLI RAID FAW API RAID System RAID System Figure 4 1 Interfaces to Access CLI With the embedded CLI you can get full function management capabilities without the need to install any software on your hosts But you can access only one system by a terminal at a time With the host side CLI utilities you may manage multiple RAID systems at one site or apply pre saved CLI scripts to multipole RAID systems at a time for massive RAID system deployment The host side CLI utilities allow you to access RAID systems by in band Ethernet and out of band interfaces FC SAS SCSI The login information login name and password to the CLI is the same as the login information for Web GUI of the RAID system to be accessed 0000 is the default login password NOTE The sample code and libraries for developing software to manage RAID systems by in band or out band API is available upon request 4 1 1 Embedded CLI The embedded CLI can be accessed remotely by the Ethernet TCP IP and locally by the RS232 terminal And by Ethernet you may use Telnet and SSH Secure Shell Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands Telnet client software is available for all operating systems and you can download the SSH client software from the following web sites SSHWinClient http www ssh com PUTTY http www chiark greenend org uk sgtatham putty 4 1 2 Host side O
280. ng free space on a disk group Section 2 6 4 Logical disks e Create volumes using one or more free logical disks Section 2 6 5 Volumes s Defragment a disk group to merge free chunks into one Section 2 7 2 Defragmenting disk groups s Expand over utilized logical disks with free chunks Section 2 7 4 Expanding the capacity of logical disks in a disk group s Expand over utilized volumes with free logical disks Section 2 7 6 Expanding volumes e LUN resizing capacity expansion shrink procedures The resizing of a logical disk or volume changes the usable capacity of a LUN The LUN capacity change is made effective after the background task is done for logical disk expansion and it is effective immediately after your UI operation for other resizing utilities expanding volumes and shrinking volumes logical disks To ensure your host can properly recognize and utilize the expanded space please follow the steps below in order 1 Expand a logical disk or a volume by the firmware utility 5 48 Advanced Functions Functions 2 Wait till the background task is done for logical disk expansion only 3 Rescan the physical drives by your operating system utility 4 Expand the partition on the LUN by your partition editor 5 Expand the file system on the expanded partition by your file system utility To ensure your host can properly recognize and shrink the corresponding space without data loss please follow the steps below i
281. notifications Mail Subject RAID system event notification default Enter the mail subject The maximum length is 31 bytes Mail Content By default there is no content Enter the mail content The maximum length is 47 bytes Mail Retry Period minute 10 default Specify the period of time in minutes to retry sending event notification mail The range is from 10 to 60 Mail Delay Time second 10 default Specify the delay time in seconds to send out multiple events in one mail This helps to reduce the number of mails The range is from 5 to 60 Add Event Receivers You can add a maximum of three mail recipients Click Add to set the receiver ID mail receiver address and the corresponding severity level Remove Event Receivers 2 61 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI Select the mail recipient s you want to delete and click Remove The selected mail recipients are deleted Modify Event Receivers Select a mail recipient you want to change for its mail address and the event severity level Click Modify to enter the settings screen 2 9 2 Setting up the SNMP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a widely used protocol based on TCP IP for monitoring the health of network attached equipments The RAID controller is equipped with an embedded SNMP Agent to support SNMP based monitoring You can use SNMP applications SNMP v1 or v2c compliant at remote computers to get event notificatio
282. ns can be classified into two types of workload transaction database or file server and stream video audio or backup archival The former tends to be random access with variable IO size and the former is sequential access with large IO size Read the manual of your applications to find the suggested RAID configurations or check the Appendix when choosing the RAID configurations 2 Adjust the controller performance parameters The RAID system is equipped with many parameters that allow you to gain excellent performance and also poor performance when poorly configured Basically delayed write and read ahead option should be turned on and cache unit size should be set according to your IO size But if you are unsure about how the parameters work please choose the performance profile in the Quick Setup menu see 2 5 Quick Setup on page 2 19 according to your workload or leave all parameters as default 3 Use large I O size at host 6 2 Troubleshooting Aggregating multiple contiguous I O into single I O of big size significantly improves the sequential l O performance because of better bandwidth utilization and reduced CPU loading You can use larger allocation size a k a block size when creating a file system for example 64KB for NTFS and Apple Xsan and 4kB for ext3 If you want to use multiple I O connections multi path I O is more advised than software striping RAID 0 since the later tends to limit the maximum I
283. nt gt Logical Disks gt Create DG1LDO gt Specify the preferred controller as ctla Select Storage Provisioning RAID Management gt Storage method Provisioning gt Symmetric Add WWPN of HBAs to hosts HBAO WWPN gt Host 0 gt Host Group 0 HBA1 WWPN gt Host 1 gt Host Group 0 Map LUNs to host groups DGOLDO and DG1LDO gt Host Group 0 5 3 4 Controller and Path Failover Failback Scenarios By incorporating with the MPIO driver the access to any virtual disk can be continued when one of the controller is failed Two principles should be cared for proper operation 1 MPIO driver must be installed in the hosts 2 All virtual disks must be mapped to the host across two controllers Path Failover Across Controllers The paths to a VD on its preferred controller are called active paths while the paths on the counterpart are called standby paths When all active paths are failed the MPIO driver directs the traffic to standby paths Figure 5 11 depicts the scenario NOTE The path failure may be caused by pure path failure or controller failure 5 34 Aelvanced Functions Functions Host Group Q Host Group Q a Le S S 4 Host V 7 Host V Controller A Controller B bo U l U DGOLDO j DG1LDO gt Figure 5 11 Controller failover Rs ee d Path Failback Across Controllers When any activ
284. ocal sales or support office Event ID 0x2801 Sensor ID Type ENCLOSURE Severity WARNING Parameters Bus Gea E empera ture Massage Abnormal temperature detected by sensor x in enclosure y z c g Abnormal temperature detected by sensor x in controller z c Description The temperature at sensor x in enclosure y or controller has been p out of normal working temperature range right now is z C Advice Check the fans in the system and the air conditioning of the envi ronment Event ID Ox2802 x Sensor ID Type ENCLOSURE Severit ty ERROR Parameters Enclosure ID Messag The temperature sensor x in enclosure y failed g The temperature sensor x in controller failed ET The controller cannot detect the temperature sensor x in enclo Description sure y or controller Advice Contact local sales or support office unang Fan Event ID Ox2804 Type ENCLOSURE Severity NOTICE Parameters S Enclosure ID Message Rotation speed of fan x in enclosure y back to normal Description The rotation speed of fan x in enclosure y returned to normal range If the rotation speed is very unstable replace the fan or contact Advice local sales or support office Event ID 0x2805 Type ENCLOSURE Severity WARNING Parameters E Enclosure ID Message Abnormal rotation speed of fan x in enclosure y detected Description The
285. of the enclosure Command enclist Synopsis enclist encx element all Description List the current status of one or all management elements of an enclosure element could be one of the following values soow vit crt Parameters fan tm Each of which means power supply voltage sensor current sensor fan and temperature sensor Command enclist conf Synopsis enclistconf Description List enclosure configurations Command encidentify Synopsis encidentify on off encx Enable or disable identifying the enclosure with a visual Description indication This command is applicable only when enclosure visual indication hardware is available Command encfwupdate Synopsis enfwupdate encx firmware bin Description Update the firmware of the controller in an external enclosure with the specified firmware file 4 5 8 Uninterruptible power supply Command upscontrol Synopsis upscontrol on off Description Enable or disable UPS support Command upslist Synopsis upslist Description List UPS information Command upsconfig 4 28 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands upsconfig d YY MM DD xxsec r xx s xxsec 4 6 Synopsis b xxsec Description Set UPS configurations At least one option should be assigned d YYYY MM DD date of last battery replacement xxsec low battery runtime threshold Parameters r xx minimum battery charge capacity before restart s xxsec U
286. oller will restart immediately when a user restores user configurations Save the NVRAM configurations to HDD s Read the NYRAM configurations from HDDs and save to the NVRAM C C Gelt main configurations G Upload a configuration file and store it as the controllers main configurations Browse Figure 2 29 Options in the Configurations screen 4 System Management menu 3 Setting up the network The network interface serves as one of the methods to manage the controller There are two network types static and DHOP To set up the network do the following l Select System Management gt Network from the main menu 2 For the redundant controller system only From the Controller drop down menu select the desired controller for the following network settings to apply 3 From the Assignment Method drop down menu select either static DHCP or DHCP APIPA e If you select the static method assign the IP address network mask gateway and DNS Server to the network e If you select the DHCP method assign the DNS server address e If you select the DHCP APIPA method assign the DNS server address 4 Click Apply and the settings are effective immediately NOTE If DHCP is selected for the network you need to close the GUI and use the new IP for the connection NOTE APIPA stands for Automatic Private IP Addressing If DHCP APIPA is selected and the controller cannot get response from DHCP se
287. om different vendors using single software But note because VDS is limited to general functions you need to use Web GUI or CLI for some advanced functions of this RAID system Initially Configuring the RAID System Properly configuring your RAID systems helps you to get the most out of your investments on the storage hardware and guarantee planned service level agreements It also reduces your maintenance efforts and avoids potential problems that might cause data loss or discontinued operations It is especially true for a powerful and flexible RAID system like the one you have now This section provides some basic steps and guidelines for your reference The initial configuration has the following tasks 1 Understanding your users needs and environments 2 Configuring the hardware settings and doing health check 3 Organizing and presenting the storage resources 4 Installing and launching bundled software optionally 5 Getting ready for future maintenance tasks Understanding your users needs and environments The first step for procuring or deploying any equipment is to know the users needs and environments assuming you ve already known much about your RAID systems Users needs include the capacity performance reliability and sharing The environment information includes the applications operating systems standalone or clustered host systems host adapters switches topologies direct attached or networked storag
288. om host y to LUN z This could be to recover from a transient error due to Description unstable channel command time out or unexpected host behaviors The controller will drop the command specified by the host and the host will retry the command however this could result in LUN performance drop If this event occurs often check the host connectivity check Advice LUN s IO statistics to see if the maximum response time is reason able for the hosts connected or contact local sales or support office e Port and chip Event ID 0x3010 Type HOST INFO Host Port ID Message Host port x started Description The controller has started the host port x successfully and link up p can be started Advice None Event ID 0x301 1 c Controller Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters ID Chip ID Message Reset host i f chip x in controller y The controller y resets chip x that failed to execute commands properly This could be to recover from transient error due to a Description unstable channel or heavy traffic The controller will resume nor mal operations of the chip after reset however this could result in performance drop of the LUNs exported to the host ports of this chip If this event occurs often check the host connectivity or contact Advice local sales or support office D 42 Appendix D 43 Even
289. ome an important part of communication because of its ease of use and timeliness RAIDGuard Central leverages the most popular IM service Microsoft MSN to deliver 5 58 Advanced Functions Functions event information of RAID systems to specified MSN accounts This ensures that you get timely updates on the status of your RAID system e Smart discovery of RAID systems RAIDGuard Central is the portal of your RAID system management Instead of remembering the IP address of each RAID system you can use RAIDGuard Central to scan the networks to discover the RAID systems attached to the networks After RAIDGuard Central locates the RAID systems you may access the web GUI of the RAID systems e Support multiple platforms Based on Java and web technologies RAIDGuard Central Server and its agents support the most popular operating systems Windows Linux and Mac You may choose the most appropriate platforms to perform the RAID monitoring and event consolidation tasks according to the environments In addition RAIDGuard Central provides web based GUI which also enables you to check the status of RAID systems from any places where Internet connection is available e Support multiple languages RAIDGuard Central currently supports three languages English Traditional Chinese and Simplified Chinese The default language will be automatically selected according to the default locale of the computers running RAIDGuard Central and you
290. on cannot be done A few common guidelines and examples are as below e To avoid mistakenly destroying data a disk group cannot be deleted when it contain logical disks e To avoid overloading disk scrubbing is not allowed for a degraded disk group or an initializing disk group e To avoid confusing operations some settings cannot be modified when a related state happens For example rebuilding related settings cannot be modified when there is rebuilding disk 3 The web GUI does not show updated information The web browser displays the cached the web pages such that you cannot see the updated web pages For example the percentage of 6 7 Troubleshooting firmware upload progress isn t updated Please go to the setting page of your web browser to delete the temporary files cookies and the history 4 It takes very long time for the web GUI to respond my commands The web GUI is presented by browser but its contents are generated by the storage processor which need also process I O request as well as other maintenance tasks You might experience slow GUI when the I O access is very heavy Please reduce the workload or stop some background tasks Bad hard disks or bad blocks could cause long response time of web GUI because some system information is retrieved from or written to hard disks When it takes a long time for hard disks to complete an I O request the web GUI would freeze to wait for the I O completion Pl
291. one controller to monitor the status of the system or to do configurations for both controllers e Mirrored write cache A controller caches data in the memory for performance when the delay write option is turned on To ensure that the cached data can be retained data written to one controller is also forwarded to the peer controller The RCC also serves as the path of data forwarding for mirroring write cache You may also disable the write cache mirroring by the UI see Mirrored Write Cache Control option on Section 2 7 15 s Controller failover and failback Both controllers monitor each other by periodic heartbeat signaling packets exchanged over the RCC If a controller detects that the RCC link is offline or the heartbeat signal is not received within a period of time it will power off the peer controller and start the controller failover procedure The I O access to the faulty controller will be redirected to the surviving controller and the background tasks will also be continued by the surviving controller When the faulty controller is replaced by a new controller the surviving controller will negotiate with the replacement controller to perform the controller failback procedure The replacement controller will get synchronized with the surviving controller to learn the latest status and configurations After that the surviving controller will stop servicing the I O for the peer controller and the replacement controller will ta
292. onnections between hosts and RAID systems please follow the steps below 5 2 Advanced Functions Functions Create virtual disks like JBOD disks logical disks and volumes 4 2 Choose symmetric storage presentation method 3 Add all HBA ports with WWPN or SAS address to the hosts in the controller 4 Selectively add hosts HBA ports to a host group HG 5 Export virtual disks to LUNs for the host group HG 6 Repeat the previous two steps for each host computer and host group The hosts mentioned in this manual and the user interfaces of the RAID systems refer to the HBA ports on the host computers and host groups refer to a group of HBA ports For example a host computer with two dual port HBAs is perceived as four individual hosts by the RAID controller Exporting a virtual disk to a host or a host group will allow the HBA port or the group of HBA ports to access the virtual disks from any of the host interface ports in the RAID system NOTE 1 Because a LUN is not accessible during regular initialization install the MPIO driver after the regular initialization is done or use background initialization 2 Use MPIO management utility to verify that all disk devices and paths are recognized by the MPIO software 3 Go to Section 5 2 when using MPIO with redundant controller systems 5 3 Advanced Functions Functions Bellow is the guideline and example to set up the hosts and host groups when u
293. ons cannot work any more Advice Replace with new disks to prevent from data loss D 36 Appendix D 4 Host ports FC s Hosts Event ID 0x3000 r Host WWPN Type HOST Severity INFO Parameters Host Port ID Message Host x detected on host port y Description The controller detected host x on host port y The host can start access the controller over the host port Advice None Event ID 0x3001 c Host WWPN Type HOST Severity NOTICE Parameters Host Port ID Message Host x removed on host port y Description Host x quitted from host port y If host quitted unexpectedly or it happens continuously during Advice host access check the host connectivity or contact local sales or support office e Link Event ID 0x3002 Type HOST Severity INFO Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x link up aT The link on the host port x had been built by the controller suc Description cessfully and data transferring can be started Advice None D 37 Apendi Event ID 0x3003 Type HOST Severity NOTICE Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x link down The link on the host port x had been turned down by the control ler and data transferring was posed This happens when the host Description port was disconnected from host HBA or switch because of removing powering down resetting the host or swit
294. ons window 1 From the Path Policy drop down menu select either Fail over or Dynamic balance e If you select Fail over mode specify the preferred working path e If you select Dynamic balance mode specify a weight mode and switch counter 2 Each option is described as below Specify the settings for the selected MPIO disk Path Policy Fail over The Read Write lOs are transferred on the designated Primary Active path The Passive path takes over the transfer load only when the Primary path is off line Dynamic balance The Read Write IOs on paths are transferred according to the Weight Mode policy Preferred Select a path as the primary active path The Working Path primary path takes the entire IO transfer load and the un selected as standby path passive Weight Mode Read Write lOs Given path has completed x IOs path2 has completed y lOs and switch counter has been set to z lOs Whenever z Read Write lOs have been transferred the transferred IO Counts on each path will be checked If x gt y and the primary active path is on path the primary path will be switched to path2 at next IO Vice versa if x lt y and current path is path2 the primary path will be switched back to path at next IO Read Write Bytes Given path has transferred x Bytes path2 has transferred y Bytes and switch counter has been set to z lOs Whenever z Read Write lOs have been transferred the transferred Read Write Byte
295. ontroller RAID system On the rear side of the RAID system you can see the fan modules power supplies two fiber ports for fiber controller two sas ports for SAS controller one Ethernet port and SAS expansion port for SAS expansion controller solution Click on the components for detailed information Fiber Controller A i Hei wl A s Oey ja BOC e C D SAS Controller s ROCH SCSI Controller B Figure 2 9 Rear side of the RAID system GUI 2 9 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI e For redundant controller RAID system Figure 2 10 illustrates the rear components at the rear of the redundant controller system Two controllers controller A and controller B are located from left to right as shown Therefore fiber ports on the controller A are fcpaland fcpaz2 fiber ports on the controller B are fcpbland fcpb2 gt Controller A s RE m fa Controller B fcpa2 left fcpa1 right fcpb2 left fcpb1 right Figure 2 10 Rear side of the redundant fiber RAID system A16R FS Instead of four fiber ports equipped with the redundant fiber controller There are four SAS ports located on both controller A and B See the port identifiers as shown in Figure 2 11 Un m x om oC 1 Controller A ntroller B sasa2 left sasal right sasb2 left sasbi right Figure 2 11 Rear side of the redundant SAS RAID system A16R SS Component Detailed Information
296. op and restart your applications you may put them into a script file and use the scheduling utility offered by the operating system to create snapshot at designated points in time or periodically For example in Windows you click on Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt System Tools gt Scheduled Tasks to launch Schedule Task Wizard Integrating the script with the snapshot applications like backup or replication software your tasks can be done more easily 5 47 Advanced Functions 5 5 Dynamic Capacity Management The RAID controller enables flexibility in capacity configuration and reconfigurations for the following benefits e Improving the utilization of disk capacity e Lowering the cost of hard disks in term of procurement and energy s Easy management without down time e Comprehensive capacity management utilities The firmware utilities below allow you to increase disk space s Delete unused logical disks to release free space Section 2 6 4 Logical disks s Delete unused volumes to release free logical disks Section 2 6 5 Volumes s Expand a disk group by adding hard disks to it Section 2 7 1 Expanding disk groups e Shrink under utilized logical disks to release free space Section 2 7 5 Shrinking logical disks e Shrink under utilized volumes to release free logical disks Section 2 7 7 Shrinking volumes The firmware utilities below allow you to manage or utilize free disk soace s Create logical disks usi
297. opsis dglist dgx all Description List the status of one or all disk groups 4 2 4 Spare and rebuild Command dgspare Synopsis dgspare add remove dgi hddx Description Add or remove a local spare in a disk group Command dgrebseq Synopsis dgrebseq dgi par seq pri I dx ldy Description Set rebuild mode of a disk group B Gaas par seq pri paralel sequenicl is priority l ldx ldy priority of logical disks to rebuild Command globalspare Synopsis globalspare add remove hddx hddy Description Add or remove one or more hard disks as global spare disks Command autospare Synopsis autospare on off Description Review or set the auto spare settings Parameters on off turn on or off the auto spare option Command restorespare Synopsis restorespare on off Description Review or set the restore spare settings Parameters on off turn on or off the restore spare option 4 9 Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands 4 2 5 Logical disks Command Idcreate Synopsis ldcreate dgxldy capacity raidlevel s stripesize i initopt f x o offset n name c ctx Description Create a logical disk capacity logical disk capacity raidlevel raidoO raid5 raid3 raid1 raid raid10 or nraid s stripesize stripe size i initopt initialization method Paramete
298. options with pre read depth s Adaptive pre read algorithms for sequential read workload e Selective write caching policies write through and write behind delay write e Selective cache flush period with manual flush utility e Support intelligent write I O merging and sorting algorithms e Support intelligent disk I O scheduling e Selective performance profile AV streaming Max IOPS and Max throughput 1 3 Introntuction e RAID Reconfiguration Utilities e Online disk group expansion e Online RAID level migration e Online stripe size migration e Online simultaneous execution of the operations above e Online disk group defragmentation for free soace consolidation e Online simultaneous disk group expansion and defragmentation e Online logical disk capacity expansion e Online logical disk capacity shrink e Support rebuild first policy for early recovery from RAID degradation e Data Integrity Maintenance Utilities e Online logical disk parity regeneration e Online disk scrubbing a k a media scan or patrol read e Online parity check and recovery e Online disk cloning and replacement with automatic resuming cloning e Support skipping cloned sectors when rebuilding partially cloned disks e Background Task Management e Background task progress monitoring s Support one time or periodic scheduling of maintenance tasks e Support priority control for different types of background tasks like rebuilding e Support manual abort
299. or contact local sales or support office Advice Event ID Ox3016 Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x detected parity error during Command phase Description Parity error was detected during command phase Advice None Event ID 0x3017 Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x detected parity error during Message Out phase Description Parity error was detected during message out phase Advice None Event ID 0x3018 Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x detected CRC error while receiving CMD_IU Description CRC error was detected while receiving CMD_IU Advice None D 44 Appendix D 45 Event ID 0x3019 Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x detected parity error during Command phase Description Parity error was detected during command phase Advice None Event ID Ox301a Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message Host port x detected parity error during Data Out phase Description Parity error was detected during data out phase Advice None Event ID Ox301b Type HOST Severity WARNING Par
300. or will fail soon replace the hard disk Event ID Ox080b Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message DST on HDDx completed with read error Description DST on hddx completed with read error Advice The disk failed or will fail soon replace the hard disk Event ID Ox080c Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message DST on HDDx completed with servo error Description DST on hddx completed with servo error Advice The disk failed or will fail soon replace the hard disk Event ID Ox080d Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message DST on HDDx completed with electrical error Description DST on hddx completed with electrical error Advice The disk failed or will fail soon replace the hard disk O Appendix Event ID 0x080e Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message DST on HDDx completed with unknown test element error Description DST on hddx completed with error but the failed elements are unknown Advice The disk failed or will fail soon replace the hard disk Bad block handling Event ID 0x1401 Start Sector NO End Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Sector NO Disk ID Message Bad blocks between sector x and sector y on HDDz detected Description A bad block starting from sector x on hddy was detected by the controller If the number of bad blocks detected i
301. orage groups 2 42 update boot code 2 74 update firmware 2 74 UPS setting 2 66 V VDS provider configuration utility 5 74 installing 5 74 uninstalling 5 74 virtual volume creating 2 35 deleting 2 36 volume pair automatic expansion 2 34 creating 2 34 setting overflow alert 2 34 volume concatenated striping 1 9 concatenating 1 9 2 47 creating 2 31 restrictions 2 31 creating volume pair 2 33 defined 1 9 deleting 2 32 expanding restrictions 2 46 shrinking 2 47 restrictions 2 47 striping 1 9 W write completion write behind 2 38 2 40 2 42 write through 2 38 2 40 2 42 write log control 2 56 1 4
302. orage resources are managed as storage objects in a hierarchical structure The hard disks the only physical storage objects in the structure are the essence of all other storage objects A hard disk can be a JBOD disk a data disk of a disk group or a local spare disk of a disk group If can also be an unused disk or a global spare disk The capacity of a disk group is partitioned to form logical disks with different RAID Figure 1 1 Layered storage objects configurations and multiple logical disks can be put together to create volumes using striping concatenation or both The JBOD disks logical disks and volumes are virtual disks which can be exported to host interfaces as SCSI logical units LUN and serve I O access from the host systems Below are more descriptions about each storage objects e JBOD disk A JBOD Just a Bunch Of Disks disk is formed by single hard disk that can be accessed by hosts as a LUN exported by the controller The access to 1 8 introduction the LUN is directly forwarded to the hard disk without any address translation It is often also named as pass through disk Member disk The hard disks in a disk group are member disks MD A member disk of a disk group can be a data disk or a local spare disk A data member disk provides storage space to form logical disks in a disk group Disk group A disk group DG is a group of hard disks on which logical disks can be created Opera
303. oring can be done virtually anywhere in the world e Non volatile event logging To help the administrators to track the history of all state changes the firmware records the log of events on the NVRAM of the controller Because the logs are recorded on the controller there is no need of extra software to keep the records The logs can also be downloaded to the administrator s desktop for further analysis or long term database and it can be saved as a human readable text file or CSV file for soreadsheet applications e Timely event notification In addition to the audible alarm on the controller to alert the administrators the firmware can also send out event notification email and SNMP traps To make sure that the events are delivered to the recipients redundant servers are used to pass the events The administrator can also manually generate test events TO see how events are logged and alerts are sent e Selective logging and notification The firmware records a wide range of events from informative events like user login or management operations to critical events like Power supply unit failure or RAID crash To help find specific events in the log the events are classified into different severity levels and types The administrator can choose the severity levels of events to be recorded and different event recipients can also be notified of events of different severity level O Apendi B 11 Convenient Task Management T
304. ors or bad sectors of a physical disk increases over a certain threshold or a disk reports SMART warning you can copy all the data on the disk to another disk To clone a hard disk do the following 1 Select Maintenance Utilities gt HDD Clone from the main menu 2 Click Clone and specify the following disk cloning options Source Disk Select a source disk you want to clone The disk must not be in an NRAID disk group Target Disk Select the target disk to be the clone The disk must be either unused a global spare or a local spare of the same disk group as the Source Disk Schedule Immediately The task will start immediately Once The task will start on the specified date and time Automatic During cloning if the target disk fails the controller Resume will use another disk and resume cloning The Auto Spare Control option see 2 7 16 Miscellaneous on page 2 55 must be set to On The following is the order of disks used to resume cloning 1 Local spare disks 2 Global spare disks 3 Unused disks If there is no disk to resume cloning or this option is not specified cloning is aborted when the target disk fails NOTE 1 If there is disk scrubbing task or parity regeneration task in the disk group of the source disk the task is aborted and cloning is started If the disk group of the source disk contains faulty disks cloning is suspended until the disk group completely rebuilds its d
305. ot is created the write commands to the primary volume will invoke copy on write COW operation which copies the old data from the primary volume to the secondary volume before updating the primary volume with the new data The COW operation preserves the data and the primary volume can still be accessed e Secondary Volume and Lookup Table A snapshot volume is a virtualized entity which leverages the data and space both on the primary and secondary volume When an I O command reads the snapshot volume it retrieves the data either from the primary volume if the data is not updated or from the secondary volume if the data has been changed And writes to a snapshot volume will be also stored in the secondary volume A lookup table is maintained in the secondary volume for the RAID controller To know where the differential data is stored Because the secondary volume stores only the differential data you can choose a secondary volume of capacity less than the primary volume However to ensure minimum operations the capacity of the secondary volume has to be at least 10 percent of the primary volume A user configurable overflow alert can notify you when the secondary volume has been filled up with the differential data over capacity threshold e Spare COW Volume When running out of the space of a secondary volume and there are spare COW volumes the copied data of COW operations will be automatically redirected to an unused spare CO
306. ot volume Parameters n name The name of a snapshot volume Primary and secondary volume of snapshot volume pair must not be in faulty state Restrictions All snapshot volume of the same primary volume must not be in the restoring state There must be no existed svolx Command svoldelete Synopsis svoldelete svolx f Description Delete a snapshot volume Parameters f force to delete LUN mapping 4 40 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands Command svset Synopsis svset pdevice all p percentage Description Set a snapshot volume pair option Parameters l o percentage set the threshold for overflow alert Command svolname Synopsis svolname svolx name Description Set snapshot volume name Command svpimport Synopsis svpimport pdevice sdevice Description Import snapshot volumes Command svimportlist Synopsis svimportlist Description List snapshot volume pairs on virtual disks Command svlist Synopsis svlist pdevice alll Description List snapshot volume pairs Command svrestore Synopsis svrestore svolx Description Restores a primary volume to a snapshot volume Command svspare Synopsis svspare add remove dgxldy voly jody Description adds or removes a spare COW volume 4 41 Aulvanced Functions Functions Chapter 9 Advanced Functions 5 1 Multi Path IO Solutions 5 1 1 Overview Multi path
307. our cursor away from the viewer and it disappears NOTE 1 The multiple system viewer supports up to 256 on line systems 2 Only systems in the same subnet mask will appear in the multiple system viewer Usingthe RAID GUI RAID GUI 2 2 Monitor Mode RAID GUI monitors the status of your RAID controller s through your Ethernet connection The RAID GUI window first displays the Monitor Mode This mode is also the login to enter Config Mode The GUI components shown are introduced in the following sections Bswnen mode Tear TT nae U About Monitor Mode O 9 EO pO Login memt 7 a Figure 2 6 Single controller GUI monitor mode At the front view panel there are 16 or 24 HDD trays displayed in the redundant controller system Depending on the redundant controller system model the number of HDDs may differ Besides a maximum of eight enclosures can be connected to the subsystem serially while the single subsystem supports up to seven enclosures For more information about the indications of HDD status code and color see 2 2 1 HDD state on page 2 6 l mnn AS TITI w Figure 2 7 Redundant controller system GUI monitor 2 5 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI There are four buttons at the top right of the page See the following table for each button s function Button Description ket Switches between Monitor Mode and m Config Mode Switch Mode
308. ous events section 2 2 Follow the hardware manual to do troubleshooting if needed and contact your supplier if the problems still exist Make sure the links of the host interfaces are up and all installed hard disks are detected Since your hard disks will be the final data repository largely influencing the overall performance and reliability it is advised to use the embedded self test utility and SMART functions to check the hard disks see 2 8 Hardware Configurations on page 2 56 A better approach would be to use benchmark or stress testing tools You need also be sure that all the attached JBOD systems are detected and no abnormal event reported for the expansion port hardware see 2 3 SAS JBOD Enclosure Display for SAS expansion controller only on page 2 12 Sometimes you will need to adjust the hardware parameters under your supplier s advices to avoid potential interoperability issues e Organizing and presenting the storage resources The most essential configuration tasks of a RAID system are to organize the hard disks using a variety of RAID settings and volume management functions and eventually to present them to host systems as LUNs LUN mapping This is a process consisted of both top down and bottom up methodology You see from high level and logical perspectives of each host system to define the LUNs and their requirements On the other hand you will do configuration starting from the low level and physical objects
309. out to accommodate slow disk operation e Increase Disk I O Retry Time to try I O more times before giving up e Reduce Transfer Speed to mitigate bad signal quality of disks e Disable I O Queue to avoid problematic NCQ support of disks e Disable Disk Standby Mode to avoid problematic sleep support of disks e Extend Disk Access Delay Time to allow longer time for disk spin up 5 Check failure of multiple hard disks If multiple hard disks are taken offline at a time it could be system level problem For example if the hard disks in a JBOD system are offline unexpected poor cabling in SAS or FC expansion chain would also lead to unexpected hard disk offline In addition poor heat ventilation unstable power supply or hardware quality issues could also lead to offline of multiple hard disks In case there are multiple failed hard disks causing corrupted logical disks you may try to use array recovery utility to the RAID configurations see 2 7 13 Array recovery on page 2 52 6 Ensure proper power on off sequence of RAID and JBOD You have to make sure the expansion chassis has been ready before powering on the RAID system such that the RAID system can properly recognize the expansion chassis and the hard disks And shut down the 6 6 Troubleshooting RAID system first and then its expansion chassis such that the RAID systems won t see the lost of expansion chassis as a failure event 7 AAMUX boards are required for attach
310. ple is illustrated as below devices device vendor vendorname product productname path_grouping_policy group_by_prio getuid_callout sbin scsi_id p 0x80 g u s block n prio_callout sbin acs_prio_alua d hardware_handler lacs path_checker hp_sw path_selector round robin 0 failback immediate no_path_retry queue rr_min_io 100 product_blacklist LUN_Z Aulvanced Functions Functions e Uninstall and stop the multipathd service Redundant Controller System Simply type rpm e mpath xxx x e Access to multi path devices 1 If no error message is displayed during the installation and startup of the multipathd service you ve successfully started the multipathd and you can now go to dev to find the multi path devices which are named as dm x where x is a number assigned by the DM driver 2 You can create partitions on dev dm x using fdisk or parted command To access the partitions you need also to use kpartx to create DM devices in the dev e Manage multipathd service 1 To view the LUNs of the attached RAID systems type cat proc scsi scsi and similar outputs are displayed as below linux go62 cat proc scsi scsi Attached devices Host scsiO Channel 00 Id 00 Lun 00 Vendor Accusys Model ACS82410 Rev 0001 Type Direct Access ANSI SCSI revision 05 Host scsil Channel 00 Id 00 Lun 00 Vendor Accusys Model ACS82410 Rev 0001 Type Direct Access ANSI SCSI revision 0
311. ps and storage groups to host ports Select a binding you want to cancel and click Unbind in the selective storage main screen Click Confirm to cancel the selected binding Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI 2 7 Maintenance Utilities This feature allows you to perform maintenance tasks on your arrays 2 7 1 Expanding disk groups DG Reconfiguration allows expansion on disk groups by adding one or more disks thus increasing the usable capacity of the disk group You can also perform defragmentation during expansion To expand disk groups do the following 1 Select Maintenance Utilities gt DG Reconfiguration from the main menu 2 Click Expand and specify the following options for a DG expansion task DG ID Select a disk group for expansion from the drop down menu Expanding Select and use the arrow buttons to move one or HDDs more unused hard disks from the Available HDDs list to the Expanding HDDs list Schedule Immediately The task will start immediately Once The task will start on the specified date and time Defragment Check this option to allow for defragmentation during during expansion expanding 3 Click Apply to review the current settings 4 Click Confirm The task is created NOTE 1 The disk group to be expanded must be in the optimal state 2 You may only select to increase the number of hard disks but not to change the disk group setting 3 Once confirmed please wait until the
312. r wishes to include additional device information that is not specified in a standard MIB then that is usually done through MIB extensions 2 63 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI SNMP MIB Installation Ex iReasoning MIB Browser 1 Installing the SNMP MIB Manager software on the client server 2 Importing a copy of the MIB file in a directory which is accessible to the management application MIBs Sotre Location iReasoning mibbrowser mibs 3 Compiling the MIB description file with the management application 4 Set Agent s Charset to ISO 8859 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt General NOTE Before the manager application accesses the RAID controller user needs to integrate the MIB into the management application s database of events and status indicator codes This process is known as compiling the MIB into the application This process is highly vendor specific and should be well covered in the User s Guide of your SNMP application Ensure the compilation process successfully integrates the contents of the ACS RAID MIB MIB file into the traps database Each SNMP MIB application s have some different For more information refer to management application s user manual SNMP MIB Operation Ex iReasoning MIB Browser 5 Set RAID controller IP address of SNMP managment application 6 Choose ACS RAID MIB on MIB tree and then expand the tree to choose xxxx Table component execute Cirl T to open Table View 2
313. r six ports for redundant SAS JBOD available for SAS JBOB expansion See the port identifiers as shown in Figure 2 13 Single SAS JBOD chassis Down stream port Down 1 Up stream ports from left to right Up1 Up2 Redundant SAS JBOD chassis A16R SJ Down stream port Down 1 Up stream ports from left to right Up1 Up2 Figure 2 13 Rear side of the SAS JBOD chassis GUI 2 3 2 SAS JBOD Installation with RAID subsystem e For single controller with single JBODs Use the down and up stream ports to connect the RAID subsystem with up to three SAS JBODs Figure 2 14 shows a serial construction for expanded JBOD disks Connect the RAID subsystem s SAS port to the up stream port of a SAS JBOD using a Mini SAS cable For more expanded JBOD chassis connect the down stream port on the previously connected SAS JBOD to the up stream port on the other SAS JBOD Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI RAID Subsystem err l e ep mng Ya 33522 E a e For redundant controller with redundant JBODs A16R SJ To ensure the system can continue its operation without any interruption in the event of any SAS JBOD failure a loop construction is suggested Figure 2 15 shows an example of the loop implementation with a redundant RAID system and SAS JBODs Users can create as below Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI RAID Subsystem JBOD1 JBOD2 333253 Exp a A mam Figure 2 15 Redundant SAS JBOD A16R SJ
314. r the same set of RAID systems The monitoring tasks can still continue when one of the RGC Servers is down NOTE 1 The RGC components communicate with each other by the TCP connections at the following ports 8060 8070 8077 and 8088 Make sure the network connection and these ports are not blocked by your firewall equipments and software before deploying RGC components Please also make sure these TCP ports are not used by other applications running on the computer of RGC Server and Agents Running RGC components requires Java Runtime Environment JRE version 1 5 or later on the computers 5 6 3 Installing the RAlIDGuard Central The RAIDGuard Central provides software installation files for all supported operating systems You can choose the installation file and follow the setup procedures below depending on the operating system you are using 1 Copy the installation file to the host computer on which you want to install the RAIDGuard Central s Windows OS installation file setup exe e MAC OS installation file RAIDGuardCentral_SW_x xx mpkg e Linux OS installation script RAIDGuardCentral_SW_x xx run 2 Double click the installation file to start the installation 3 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation NOTE The RAIDGuard Central provides three installation options complete RGC components RGC server only and RGC Agent only 5 61 Advanced Functions Functions 5 6 4 Uninst
315. rameters Voltage Massage Abnormal 3 3V voltage source in backplane z V g Abnormal 3 3V voltage source in controller z V ae The current voltage of the 3 3V voltage source in backplane or Description controller was out of normal range right now is zV Advice Check the power supply system or contact local sales or support office Event ID Ox280b Type ENCLOSURE Severity WARNING Parameters Voltage Abnormal 5V voltage source in backplane z V Message Abnormal 5V voltage source in controller z V Description The current voltage of the 5V voltage source in backplane or controller was out of normal range right now is zV Advice Check the power supply system or contact local sales or support office Event ID Ox280c Type ENCLOSURE WARNING Voltage Abnormal 12V voltage source in backplane z V Message Abnormal 12V voltage source in controller z V Description The current voltage of the 12V voltage source in backplane or controller was out of normal range right now is zV Advice Check the power supply system or contact local sales or support office D 53 unang Event ID 0x2821 S Voltage Type ENCLOSURE Severity NOTICE Parameters Enco T Message Voltage source x in enclosure y back to normal Description Voltage source x in enclosure y returned to normal range Advice If the voltage is very unstable contact local sales or support office Event ID Ox
316. rators are asked to support the IT infrastructure of branch offices that might be far away the capability to support remote management largely reduces the administration efforts e Administration access control As data is very important asset access to the storage system must be carefully guarded The firmware offers control of the access to the storage system operations Two levels of access are provided administrator and user the former has the full access to the storage system while the later can only monitor the system status without the permission to change the configurations The access control not only enforces the security but also avoids configuration inconsistency Apendi Appendix C Boot Utility Follow the steps below to enter the Boot Utility menu 1 Run HyperTerminal or the terminal program used to establish an RS232 connection with your RAID system and open the connection established with your RAID system RS232 COM Bits per second 115200 Port Setting Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow Control None 2 Turn on the RAID system the terminal shows the version CPU and memory information 0 1 2 2006 04 13 933 MHz 1024 MB Memory testing 126MB skip testing lt Ctr1 B gt enter boot utility 2 3 You can press ESC to skip the memory test and press Ctrl B to enter the Boot Utility N Set IP address L Load Image by TFTP B Update Boot ROM S Update System ROM H Uti
317. rehensive features and utilities of the firmware the system administrators can easily build solutions that meet business requirements as well as conduct management tasks effortlessly The firmware offers not only performance and reliability but also capabilities to effectively maximize storage resources It is a well balanced mix of powerful functionalities and user friendly management interfaces The firmware is designed with the following twelve key features e Flexible storage presentation e Flexible storage provisioning e Comprehensive RAID configurations e Dynamic configuration migration e Effective capacity management e Adaptive performance optimization e Proactive data protection e Fortified reliability and robustness e Vigilant system monitoring e Convenient task management e Extensive supportive tools e Easy to use user interfaces B 2 Flexible Storage Presentation Storage presentation refers to the process to export internal storage resources to be used by the host computers As a storage system may be deployed in different environments or even shared by different types of host computers at the same time the RAID controller firmware offers flexible storage presentation to accommodate these different requirements in order to accomplish effective storage sharing and minimize the management efforts e Flexible storage presentation To simplify the storage presentation for different environments the firmware provides the
318. resented by the letter P Figure A 4 RAID 5 disk array A 6 Apendi A 6 RAID 6 RAID 6 stripes data and parity data across an array of drives as with RAID 5 and calculates two sets of parity information for each stripe to improve fault tolerance Performance wise RAID 6 is generally slightly worse than RAID 5 in terms of writes due to the extra parity calculations It may however be slightly faster in terms of random reads due to the spreading of data over one more disk As with RAID 3 and RAID 5 performance can be adjusted by changing stripe size RAID 6 Independent data disks with double parity blocks Characteristics e Storage capacity number of disks 2 x capacity of the smallest disk e A minimum of four disks are required e Fault tolerance very good to excellent e Good speed with random reads Recommended use e File and application servers e Database servers e Internet email and news servers e Intranet servers e Use in high reliability server environments Disk 1 Disk 2 Disk 3 Disk 4 Figure A 5 RAID 6 disk array Appendix A RAID 10 RAID 10 arrays are formed by striping data across RAID 1 sub arrays This offers better performance than RAID 1 alone but does not have the speed of a pure RAID 0 array Storage efficiency and fault tolerance vary depending on the number and size of sub arrays compared to the array as a whole RAID 10 High reliability setup combined wi
319. rget loop ID can be changed manually to avoid conflict with initiator loop ID if a simple fiber hub is used At the moment only A16 R FS RAID system supports multiple ID solutions Aulvanced Functions Functions As Figure 5 5 shows the green and the red dotted paths are both active paths When the green path link fails the red dotted path will continue to access all the storage devices without interruption Host Group 0 a r l s rd Server without 5 pathguard installed FC Switch Controller A Controller B DGOLDO DGOLD1 DG1LD0 0G1LD1 0 DE Figure 5 5 MTID environment To set up the connection perform these tasks in the RAID GUI e Create virtual volumes and specify the preferred controllers s Specify the storage provisioning method e Specify the LUN ID and map LUNs to fiber ports Advanced Functions Functions The succeeding Configuration Tasks table shows the details of each configuration task according to the example given in Figure 5 5 Configuration Tasks Tasks Instructions Create Virtual volumes and RAID Management gt Disk Groups gt specify the preferred Create DGO and DG controller RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DGOLDO gt Specify the preferred controller as ctla RAID Management gt Logical Disks g
320. rotation speed of fan x in enclosure y has been out of normal range Advice Replace the fan or contact local sales or support office Voltage Event ID Ox2807 Type ENCLOSURE Severity NOTICE Parameters Voltage MMascude 3 3V voltage source in backplane back to normal z V g 3 3V voltage source in controller back to normal z V tus 3 3V voltage source in backplane or controller returned to nor Description mal range right now is zV Advice If the voltage is very unstable contact local sales or support office Event ID 0x2808 Type ENCLOSURE Severity NOTICE Parameters Voltage Massage 5V voltage source in backplane back to normal z V g 5V voltage source in controller back to normal z V ae 5V voltage source in backplane or controller returned to normal Descripiion range right now is zV Advice If the voltage is very unstable contact local sales or support office D 52 Appendix Event ID Ox2809 Type ENCLOSURE Severity NOTICE Parameters Voltage GG zae 12V voltage source in backplane back to normal z V g 12V voltage source in controller back to normal z V ei 12V voltage source in backplane or controller returned to nor Description mal range right now is zV Advice If the voltage is very unstable contact local sales or support office Event ID Ox280a Type ENCLOSURE Severity WARNING Pa
321. rs f x free chunk o sector alignment offset n name the name of a logical disk c ctlx for redundant controller only the preferred controller of a logical disk Command Iddelete Synopsis Iddelete dgxldy f Description Delete a logical disk Parameters f force to delete LUN mapping Command Idname Synopsis Idname dgxidy name Description Name a logical disk Command Idlist Synopsis Idlist dgxldy dgx all Description List the status of one logical disk all logical disks on a disk group or al logical disks on the controller 4 2 6 RAID algorithms options Command intellicompute Synopsis intelicompute dgxidy all on off as Enable or disable Intelligent data computation for one or alll Description 2A ip 3 5 6 logical disks Command readmaxtime Synopsis readmaxtime dgxldy all xxmsec Description Specify the maximum response time for one or all RAID 3 5 6 logical disks Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands Command checkonread Synopsis checkonread dgxldy all on off Description Enable or disable check on read for all RAID 3 5 6 logical disks Command writelog Synopsis writelog on off Description Review or set the write logging Parameters on off enable or disable write logging 4 2 7 Volumes Command volcreate Synopsis volcreate volx dgxldy dgildj s stripesize o sector n name
322. rt warnings The firmware can also instruct the disk drives to execute device self test routines embedded in the disk drives this effectively helps the users to identify defective disk drives e Online bad sector reallocation and recovery with over thresh old alert Hard disks are likely to have more and more bad sectors after they are in service When host computers access bad sectors the controller rebuilds data and responds to host In addition to leveraging on disk reserved space for bad block reallocation the controller uses the reserved space on hard disks for reallocating data of bad sectors If the number of bad sectors B 8 Appendix increases over the threshold specified by the administrator alerts will be sent to the administrator and disk cloning will be started automatically e Online SMART disk cloning When a hard disk fails in a disk group RAID enters the degradation state which means lower performance higher risk of data loss or RAID corruption When a hard disk is likely To become faulty or unhealthy such as bad sectors of a physical disk increases over a threshold or a disk reports SMART warning the controller will online copy all data of the disk fo a spare disk Moreover should the source disk fails during the cloning controller will start rebuilding on the cloning disk and the rebuilding will skip the sectors where the cloning has been done The disk cloning has been approved as the most effective sol
323. rvers on the network the controller will choose an unused IP adress in the private address space between 169 254 0 0 and 169 254 255 255 address conflict is avoided by probing the network Reset SMTP server Select a server you want to clear the SMTP configurations from and click Reset 2 70 Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI Configure or Modify SMTP server Select a server you want to configure and click Modify The configurations window opens Enter the information for the following options Server Address Set the SMTP server address Port Enter the SMTP port for the outgoing mails Check with your ISP provider for the port number to use By default the port is set to 0 SSL Setting Enable or disable the SMTP server to use secure connection Sender Account Set the account to be used on the SMTP server Authentication Turn the authentication on or off for the SMTP server Password Set the password of the account on the SMTP server Name Set the name to be shown in the sender field If this option is not set the sender account on the SMTP will be used Test SMTP server Select a server and click Test SMTP to ensure the SMIP server is correctly configured The Send Test Mail window displays Enter an email address for testing NOTE The primary and secondary server must not be the same SMTP server and sender 2 10 4 System Time e Setting up the Time Time is requir
324. rylist ctlx Description List the status of the battery installed in a controller Command ctldst Synopsis ctldst on off Description Enable or disable the detailed self test of controller during start up Command diagdump Synopsis diagdump diag bin Description Export extensive diagnostics information from the controller to a file Command nandflash Synopsis nandflash primary secondary Description Show the current status of the on board NAND flash chips Command bbmcontrol Synopsis bbmcontrol on off Description Enable or disable battery backup support 4 38 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands Command memtest Synopsis memtest on off Description Enable or disable memory testing during system boot up 4 10 Miscellaneous Utilities 4 10 1 Lookup RAID systems Command raidlookup Synopsis raidlookup Search all RAID systems on the local network and list the Description following information of each RAID system controller IP address system model name system name firmware version and beeper alarm status 4 10 2 Turn on off CLI script mode Command scriptmode Synopsis scriptmode on off Description Turn on or off the CLI script mode 4 10 3 Get command list and usage Command help Synopsis help class_name command help list the name of all classes Description help class_name list commands in the specified class
325. s Below are some commonly seen restrictions regarding to file system and partition resizing 5 49 Advanced Functions Functions e A LUN for resizing can have only one primary partition and no extended partition s A boot partition with operating system on it might not be shrunk s Rebooting the OS might be needed after the resizing e Resizing partition or file system might have to be done offline s File system defragmentation might be needed before resizing NOTE The software listed above is only for your information no warranty should be assumed Please contact the software vendors to learn how to use the software to support LUN resizing Comparisons with thin provisioning Dynamic LUN resizing is better than thin provisioning in terms of reliability and performance because it retains the linear and contiguous data layout e Thin provisioning needs to maintain address translation tables which could cause disastrous data loss when corrupted s The over advertised capacity of thin provisioning misleads the soace allocation algorithm of a file system e The scrambled data layout of thin provisioning cause bad performance especially when sharing storage of different types of workloads or host computers e Thin provisioning is very likely to be misled to allocate unnecessary space by data movement or data scrubbing applications like file system defragmentation 5 5 1 Free chunk defragmentation The free space on
326. s All cables are connected and the corresponding paths are displayed by the MPIO software utility e Check the device nodes from the operating system disk management utility to make sure the MPIO devices have been created Make sure the number of MPIO devices matches your cabling topology see 5 1 Multi Path IO Solutions on page 5 1 for how to calculate the number 4 The replacement controller cannot work for controller fail back The replacement controller stops boot up if it fails to discover the same set of expansion chassis of the surviving controller You need to make sure the expansion chassis are properly attached to the expansion port of the replacement controller and there is no broken connection between the expansion chassis Please also note that the I O access and background tasks can be migrated to the replacement controller only after the host interfaces of the replacement controller are properly connected to the host computers 5 It takes too much time for path or controller failover with MPIO driver The MPIO driver detects path failure by checking the HBA driver to get the link status The setting of HBA determines how much time it takes for the MPIO driver to detect path failure and to do path failover If your controller failover failback is supported by MPIO drivers it also determines how much time it takes for controller failover s Qlogic FC HBA BIOS Utility Fast UTIL gt Advanced Adapter Settings gt Link Dow
327. s a storage system can provide the more types of applications that the system can serve The RAID controller firmware supports versatile RAID configurations as well as flexible storage provisioning that can achieve high utilization of disk soace and enable sharing storage resources e Comprehensive RAID configurations To fulfill different requirements a variety of RAID configurations are offered Multiple disk groups multiple array Multiple logical disks per disk group support RAID partitioning Variable RAID levels supported Variable stripe sizes supported Hot spare with both global spare and local spare Support auto spare option for data rebuilding on unused disks e Multiple RAID configurations on single disk group Contrary to legacy RAID partitioning by which all logical disks are merely partitions of a disk group and they have the same RAID configurations the firmware offers flexible storage presentation where multiple RAID levels and B 2 Appendix stripe sizes can coexist in single disk group This largely improves the utilization of disk soace as well as simplifies the configuration planning e Online volume management The firmware provides online volume management to build LUNs of multi level RAID by striping over two or more logical disks for higher performance aggregating horsepower of more disks better reliability multiple independent parity and larger capacity distributing data over more disks To
328. s growing exceptionally fast or beyond a reasonable number consider to conduct diag Advice nostics and replace with new disks If there is no subsequent event notifying the recovery or reallocation of the bad block detected data on the bad block is lost Event ID UX 1 404 Start Sector S NO End Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Sector NO Disk ID Message Bad blocks between sector x and sector y on HDDz recovered i A bad block starting from sector x on hddy was recovered by Description the controller If the number of bad blocks detected grows exceptionally fast or Advice beyond a reasonable number consider to conduct diagnostics and replace with new disks D 30 Appendix D 31 Event ID UX 1 400 Sector NO Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Sector NO Disk ID Message A BBR entry added for mapping sector x to sector yon HDDz Description An entry of bad block reallocation table at was allocated for p mapping sector x to sector y on hddz If the number of BBR table entries or spare blocks being reallo Advice cated grows exceptionally fast or beyond a reasonable number consider to conduct diagnostics and replace with new disks Event ID 0x1408 Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters on Ne Message _ Invalidate sector x on HDDy The controller marks an area starting from sector x on hddy as non trustable by recording the se
329. s on each path will be checked If x gt y and the primary active path is on path the primary path will be switched to path2 at next IO Vice versa if x lt y and current path is path2 the primary path will be switched back to path at next lO 5 11 Advanced Functions Functions Command Queue Given path has x lOs in queue path2 has y lOs in queue and switch counter has been set to z lOs Whenever z Read Write IOs have been transferred the transferred Read Write IO Queues on each path will be checked If x gt y and the primary active path is on path the primary path will be switched to path2 at next lO Vice versa if x lt y and current path is path2 the primary path will be switched back to path at next IO Round Robin With switch counter set to z IOs whenever every z Read Write IOs have been transferred the primary active path will be switched to another path Switch Counter Specify a counter value for path switching The range if from 1 to 99 3 Click Apply to apply the settings on the selected MPIO disk 5 1 5 Linux Multi Path Solution Native Linux multi path I O support has been added to the Linux 2 6 kernel tree since the release of 2 6 13 and has been back ported into Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 in Update 2 and into Novell SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 in Service Pack 2 It relies on device mapper DM a kernel driver framework that allows add on drivers to be installed to the
330. s the secondary volume from the SV ID drop down menu then click the Apply button to confirm s Detailed volume information Click amp to display a complete list of volume information You will see the following details e VOL ID e Write Cache Setting e UUID e Write Sorting e Created Time and Date e Read Ahead Policy e Alignment Offset sector e Read Ahead Multiplier e Write Cache Status e Read Logs Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI 2 6 6 Snapshot Volumes This feature allows you to create delete and modify your snapshot volume settings This is referred as the snapshot technology See 5 4 Snapshot on page 5 38 for more information e Create snapshot volume pairs S VOL Pair Click Add to add a new snapshot volume pair before adding new snapshot volumes where up to a maximum of 64 volume pairs can be created Specify the following options for the configuration PVID From the drop down menu specify an LD as the primary volume of the volume pair SVID From the drop down menu specify an LD as the secondary volume of the volume pair e Delete snapshot volume pairs Select the snapshot volume pair s you want to delete and click Remove e Modify snapshot volume pairs To modify a setting select a snapshot volume and click Modify Specify the following options for configuration Overflow Alert Specify an overflow alert threshold for a secondary volume The range is from 50 to 99 When the allocated spa
331. scover the RAID systems e Register RAID systems Add a RGC Agent 1 Enter the IP address of the Agent on the left panel of RGC GUI and click the Add button 2 An Agent icon 8 with IP address will be displayed in the Structure tree section if the Agent has been successfully added t gofo o e nr f Ni S Agent 10 10 88 117 L TP Range FF Monitor Miss SyemMame Model Nume FW Verson BIC Verion Serial Number Situs Remove thisagent S d Figure 5 35 Adding the IP address of an agent NOTE 1 If the RGC Agent is installed onto the local host server you can also add it as one of the agents 2 Each agent can only be controlled by a RGC Server 3 The color of an agent icon amp will fade away when it goes offline 5 67 Advanced Functions Functions Scan RAID systems 1 Click the Agent icon 8 on the Structure tree section to choose the Agent 2 Click the Scan button to discover the RAID systems on the sub network of the Agent If you want to scan a specific IP address range enter the IP addresses in the IP Range field Fy RAIDGuard Central GUI Figure 5 36 Scanning the online RAID systems in the specified IP range 3 For scanning RAID systems the RGC Agent sends out broadcast packets on its subnet If IP address range is specified only the RAID systems within the IP address range will respond to the Ag
332. se 2 3 Opening the multiple system viewer see ee ee ee nne 2 4 Single controller GUI monitor mode eee eee eee eee 2 5 Redundant controller system GUI monitor monitor mode 2 5 ABD liray GU sissies oath ae cia ae oe hale aN 2 6 Rear side of the RAID system GUI 2 9 Rear side of the redundant fiber RAID system A16R FS 2 10 Rear side of the redundant SAS RAID system A16R SS 2 10 Login SCCUOR cases see esse ts aerate be cea ee ne ie ie seek eect ces 2 11 Rear side of the SAS JBOD chassis GUI 2 13 Single SAS JBOD CONNECTION esse 2 14 Redundant SAS JBOD A16R SJ loop connection 00 2 15 SAS enclosure monitor mode sss 2 16 SAS enclosure configuration mode esse eee eee eee 2 16 Overview Screen esse e eee eee 2 18 Method switching message eee eee eee eee eee eee 2 36 Simple storage ost cole lai ce eee scotia eet et oon 2 37 Symmetric Storage eae ay seo de ce tenet eb e ceede seaeagecbctedere 2 38 Selective storage seer eee eee 2 40 Specify the percentage for Bad Block Alert sss eee 2 58 Specify the percentage for Bad Block Clone esse eee 2 58 Event log download message sese 2 65 Options in the Configurations screen 1 System Management menu eee eee eee eee 2 68 Options in the Configurations screen 2 System Management menu eee eee eee ee 2 69 Options in the Configurations screen 3 System Management menu eee eee eee eee 2 69 Options in the Configurations screen 4 Syst
333. sed but RGC can still receive events generated from RAID systems Change the new listening port The web server Change Port listens for requests at port 8080 by default The range is from 1 to 32767 Launch RGC GUI Launch the RGC GUI 5 63 Advanced Functions Functions Listed Information Display the current status of server Inactive or the Web Server Status current listening port Web Server Port Display the current server port Display the number of users logged into the RGC Connecting Users GUI NOTE RAIDGuard Central supports only login with the admin account The RGC Agent monitor screen based on Windows platform is displayed as below System Language Help Registered RGC None Registered Systems 0 Figure 5 33 RGC Agent monitor screen The following table describes the function of each menu bar item and listed information in this screen Menu Bar System Exit Exit the program Specify the desired GUI language Language The language options will differ according to the language support on your operating system Hei Help Contents Open the online help web page elp About Display the program version Listed Information Display the RGC Server address the current agent Registeiea RGE belongs to Otherwise None is displayed Display the number of RAID systems registered to Registeled Sysieins the current agent NOT
334. sing multi path IO solutions e Independent MPIO Hosts Computers For independent non clustered host computers sharing single RAID system the storage should be partitioned and accessed independently by the host computers One host group should be created for each host computer and the host group should include all HBA ports on the host computer So each host computer has LUN mappings of its own and it can see its LUN mappings from all HBA ports and paths Host Group 0 Host Group 1 7 N 7 N ld Server1 k s Server2 N s N N with Pathguard installed E with Pathguard installed N X Fibre Switch SAN Storage Group 0 Storage Group 1 for Host Group 0 for Host Group 1 Figure 5 1 Dual independent MPIO hosts Figure 5 26 illustrates two independent servers sharing single RAID system with multi path I O Each server sees two LUNs DGOLDO and DGOLD1 for Server 1 and DG1LDO and DG1LD1 for Server 2 each of which has two paths The table below shows the configuration steps for Figure 5 26 Instructions Select Storage Provisioning RAID Management gt Storage method Provisioning gt Symmetric 5 4 Advanced Functions Functions Add WWPN of HBAs to hosts HBAO WWPN gt Host O HBA1 WWPN gt Host 1 HBA2 WWPN gt Host 2 HBA3 WWPN gt Host 3 Add hosts to each host group Host O and Host 1 gt Host Group 0 Host 2 and
335. sis cacheunit 4kb 8kb 16kb 32kb 64kb 128kb Description Review or set the cache unit size Parameters 4kb 8kb 16kb 32kb 64kb 128kb set cache unit size Command cacheflush Synopsis cacheflush volx dgxldy jbdx all w xxmin ae Flush write buffers in the write cache of a volume a logical Description disk a JBOD disk or all write buffers in the cache Parameters w xxmin number of minutes to wait for flush completion Command cachedirtyratio Synopsis cachedirtyratio dirty_ratio Description Review or set the dirty buffer ratio Parameters dirty_ratio dirty buffer ratio Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands Command cachelist Synopsis cachelist volx dgxldy jbdx all Description List the setting and status of a volume a logical disk a JBOD disk 4 3 4 3 1 RAID Maintenance Utilities RAID attributes reconfiguration utilities Command dgexpand Synopsis dgexpand dgi d hddx hday Description Expand a disk group by adding one or more disks Parameters d defragment during expanding Command Idmigrate Idmigrate dgxldy s newstripesize r newraidlevel d Synopsis LU hddx hddy nas Perform RAID level and or stripe size migration for a logical Descripnon disk on a disk group At least one option must be set s newstripesize migrate to new stripe size r newraidlevel migrate to new RAID level Parameters
336. sk remains online when it is working properly Foreign The hard disk is moved from another controller Conflict The hard disk may have configurations that conflict with controller configurations Removed The hard disk is removed PRemoved The hard disk is permanently removed Faulty The hard disk becomes faulty when a failure occurs Initializing The hard disk starts the initialization Unknown The hard disk is not recognized by the controller e Mode definition Ready The hard disk is in use or ready for use Standby The hard disk is in standby mode Unknown The hard disk is not recognized by the controller 2 21 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI 2 22 Buttons Add To add hard disks select a hard disk and click this button Remove To remove hard disks select a hard disk and click this button To remove hard disks permanently check the Permanent remove box when removing them Modify Select a hard disk and click this button to enter the settings screen to enable or disable the disk cache and the disk identify function NOTE When the selected hard disk is not in the on line state the Disk Cache field will not be displayed If a hard disk belongs to a disk group you cannot change its disk cache To modify it refer to 2 6 3 Disk groups If the hard disk belongs to a disk group you can check the Apply to all members of this DG option to apply the disk identify setting to all the member disks
337. sklun sgx fcpx sasx luny all Description Unmask one or all LUNs in a storage group or a default storage group Command sgaccess Synopsis sgaccess sgx fcpx sasx scpx all luny ro rw Description Set LUN access right of one or all LUNs in a storage group or a default storage group Parameters ro rw read only or read writable Using the CLI Commands the CLI Commands Command sgname Synopsis sgname sgx name Description Name a storage group Command sglistlun Synopsis sglistlun sgxluny fcpxluny sasxluny scpxluny sgx fcpx sasx scpx all Description List LUN information in one or all storage groups default storage groups 4 4 4 Presentation planning Command sgsetmethod Synopsis sgsetmethod sim sym sel Description Select storage presentation method sim sym sel simple symmetric LUN or selective storage Parameters presentation a on off enable or disable automatic LUN mapping Command sgmgmidevice Synopsis sgmgmtdevice on off lunx Description rae or disable management device support of in band lunx This option specifies the LUN be used by the Parameters management device default is LUN 127 Note SCSI host interface system the default is LUN 15 4 4 5 Selective storage presentation Command htpbind Synopsis htpbind fcpx sasx all sgy hostz hgz Description Bind a storage group to one or all FC ports
338. so bad sectors may stay a long time undetected if disk access pattern is unevenly distributed and the sectors reside on seldom accessed areas In disk rebuilding all data on the surviving hard disks is needed to regenerate the data of the failed disk and if there are bad sectors on the surviving disks the data cannot be regenerated and gone forever As the number of sectors per disk increases this will be a very common issue to any disk based storage systems The firmware provides online disk scrubbing utility to test the entire disk surface by a background task and recover any bad sectors detected e Online parity consistency check and recovery The ability to protect data in parity based RAID relies on the correctness of parity information There are certain conditions that the parity consistency might be corrupted such as internal errors of hard drives or abnormal power off of system while the cache of hard drives is enabled To ensure higher data reliability the administrator can instruct the controller to conduct parity check and recovery during disk scrubbing e S M A R T drive health monitoring and self test S M A R T stands for Self Monitoring Analysis Reporting Technology by which a hard disk can continuously self monitor its key components and collect statistics as indicators of its health conditions The hard disks are periodically polled and the controller will alert the administrator and start disk cloning when the disks repo
339. splay the SMART data of a hard disk 4 22 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands 4 23 Command hddbbralert Synopsis hddbbralert on off p percentage percentage2 percentage3 percentage4 Description Enable or disable event alerts for bad block reallocation Parameters l p percentage percentage2 percentage3 percentage4 thresholds to alert Command hddbbrclone Synopsis hddbbrclone on off p percentage Description Enable or disable disk cloning for bad block reallocation Parameters l o percentage thresholds to start cloning Command hddbbrretry Synopsis hddbbrretry on off Description Enable or disable retrying IO in bad block reallocation Command hddcache Synopsis hddcache on off all dgx hddx as Enable or disable the disk cache of a hard disk hard disks in pescnpnon a disk group or all hard disks Command hddstandby Synopsis hddstandby on off Description Enable or disable the hard disk standby state Command hddidentify Synopsis hddidentify on off hddx dgx Description Enable or disable visual identification of a hard disk or disk group Command hddtimeout Synopsis hddtimeout xxsec Description oe the timeout value of a IO command sent to hard Command hddretry Synopsis hddretry xx Description Specify the number of retries when a disk IO command fails Using the CLI Co
340. ssage JBODx created Description jbdx was created Advice None unang Event ID Ox0c01 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters JBOD ID Message JBODx deleted Description jbdx was deleted Advice None Event ID 0x1000 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters DG ID Message DGx created Description dgx was created Advice None Event ID 0x1001 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters DG ID Message DGx deleted Description dgx was deleted Advice None Event ID 0x1800 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters DG ID LD ID Message DGxLDy created Description dgxldy was created Advice None Event ID 0x1801 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters DG ID LD ID Message DGxLDy deleted Description dgxldy was deleted Advice None Event ID UX T COU Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters VOL ID Message VOLx created Description volx was created Advice None D 2 Appendix D 3 Event ID 0x1c01 Type RAID Severity INFO Parameters VOL ID Message VOLx deleted Description volx was deleted Advice None Initialization Event ID 0x204c
341. stem supports all the options When a cable is pulled I O freezes for approximately 30 60 seconds until the SAN driver determines that the link is down and failover occurs During that time the virtual machines with their virtual disks installed on a SAN might appear unresponsive and any operations on the vmfs directory might appear to hang After the failover occurs I O should resume normally After changing the configuration of LUN or paths please use esxcfg rescan command to do rescan and esxcfg vmhbadevs to know the mapping between device names and the LUNs For more information please refer to VMware ESX Server Administration Guide and VMware ESX Server SAN Configuration Guide or go to hitp www vmware com Advanced Functions Functions 5 1 8 Sun Solaris 10 OS Multi Path Solution The latest Sun Solaris OS 10 has integrated Storage Multipahting software which offers path failover and a path management utility The single controller RAID system is fully compliant with the software After configuring the LUN mappings and connecting the RAID system to Solaris system you may find multi path devices in the device directory with their name of the following format dev dsk c3t2000002037CD9F72d0s0 which is largely different from non multi path devices dev dsk c1t1d0s0 The path management utility mpathadm allows you to list paths list LUN discovered configure auto failover and control paths Please check its man
342. sts each of which makes a small number of disk accesses If one drive in a RAID level 5 array fails the lost data can be rebuilt from data on the functioning disks e RAID Level 6 This level is similar to level 5 Data is striped across all member disks and parity is striped across all member disks but RAID 6 has two dimensional parities so it can tolerate double disk failure e JBOD Just a Bunch of Disks This is a method of arranging multiple disks and technically is not RAID Under JBOD all disks are treated as a single volume and data is spanned across them JBOD provides no fault tolerance or performance improvements over the independent use of its constituent drives Appendix A 2 NRAID None RAID This level allows you to combine the capacity of all drives and does not suffer from data redundancy RAID Level 10 This level offers a compromise between the reliability and tolerance of level 1 and the high transfer rates provided by level 0 RAID Level 30 50 60 RAID 30 50 60 performs striping over RAID 3 5 6 groups With multiple independent RAID groups performance and reliability can be improved These RAID levels are supported by data striping volumes over logical disks Apendi A 2 RAID O RAID O links each drive in the array to form one large drive Storage capacity is determined by the smallest drive in the array This capacity is then applied to format all other drives in the array When
343. t Create DGOLD1 gt Specify the preferred controller as ctla RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DG1LDO gt Specify the preferred controller as ctlb RAID Management gt Logical Disks gt Create DGILD1 gt Specify the preferred controller as ctlb Select Controller Failover Multiple ID mode Select Storage Provisioning RAID Management gt Storage method Provisioning gt Simple Specify the LUN ID and map fcpal gt DGOLD LUNs fo fiber ports fcpa2 gt DGOLDO fcpb1 gt DG1LD1 fcpb2 gt DG LDO 5 20 Advanced Functions Functions 5 3 Redundant Controller 5 3 1 Overview Redundant controller is a high availability solution for ensuring system availability against controller failure and for improving the performance by doubling the I O processing power A redundant controller system incorporates two active active controllers that can service O concurrently and take over each other if any controller fails This section introduces basic concept of redundant controller operations e Dual controller configuration and status synchronization The two controllers synchronize with each other by the dedicated high speed Redundant controller Communication Channels RCC on the system backplane The synchronization allows a controller to know the configurations and status of the peer controller such that it can take over the jobs of a failed peer controller It also allows you to access any
344. t 5 59 RAIDGuard Central GUI RGC GUI 5 59 RAIDGuard Central Server RGC Server 5 59 deployment procedures 5 60 installing 5 61 launching GUI 5 62 login 5 65 main screen 5 65 MSN event notification configuring 5 72 RAID system monitoring 5 71 export event logs 5 72 launch RAID system GUI 5 72 view event logs 5 71 RAID system registration 5 67 uninstalling 5 62 RS232 COM port setting C 1 S SAS enclosure 2 12 SAS JBOD chassis monitor mode 2 16 rear view 2 13 scrubbing 2 49 restrictions 2 49 send a test mail 2 66 setting up the network 2 70 DHCP 2 70 static 2 70 setting up the time 2 71 shrinking logical disks 2 46 shrinking volumes 2 47 SMART polling 2 57 SMTP 2 61 setting 2 61 test SMTP server 2 71 snapshot features 5 38 snapshot volume creating 5 48 restoring 5 41 SNMP send a test SNMP trap 2 63 setting 2 62 spare restore 2 55 I 3 ee nn SSL forced setting 2 73 status info 3 3 storage provisioning 2 36 selective storage add hosts 2 41 add LUNs in storage group 2 41 bind host host group and storage group 2 42 remove hosts 2 41 remove LUNs in storage group 2 42 unbind hosts host groups and storage groups 2 42 simple storage add LUNs in a storage port 2 36 remove LUNs in storage port 2 38 symmetric storage add hosts 2 38 add LUNs in host 2 39 remove hosts 2 39 remove LUNs from host 2 40 Symmetric MPIO multi path IO 2 38 T test SMTP server 2 71 U unbind hosts host groups and st
345. t ID 0x3012 Host Chan Type HOST Severity ERROR Parameters nel ID Con troller ID Error Code Message Host channel x in controller y PCI Error z Description The controller y has detected error in the host channel Advice Check if the power supply is stable Contact local sales or sup port office Event ID 0x3013 Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host Port ID Message IOC Bus Reset on port x Description A bus reset has occurred on port x that was initiated by the IOC Advice None Event ID 0x3014 Type HOST WARNING Host Port ID Message __ Ext Bus Reset on port x Description A bus reset has occurred on port x that was initiated by an exter nal entity Advice None unang SCSI e IO exceptions handling Event ID 0x3015 Host Port ID Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host SCSI ID LUN ID Message Task abort on host port x from host y to LUN z The controller received task abort on host port x from host y to LUN z This could be to recover from a transient error due to unstable channel command time out or unexpected host behaviors The controller will drop the command specified by the host and the host will retry the command however this could result in LUN performance drop Description If this event occurs often check the host connectivity check LUN s IO statistics to see if the maximum response time is reason able for the hosts connected
346. t setting 3 7 hotkeys 3 5 status info 3 3 terminal port setting 3 7 LCD manipulation procedure 3 1 LD read algorithm check on read 2 30 fast read response 2 30 intelligent data computation 2 30 local spare defined 1 9 logical disk creating 2 27 creating volume pair 2 30 defined 1 9 deleting 2 29 expanding 2 34 2 45 2 46 shrinking 2 46 logical unit defined 1 9 login 2 11 LUN mapping 1 10 defined 1 10 M management tool VDS provider 5 73 maximum IO per second 2 19 maximum throughput 2 19 member disk defined 1 9 meta data update frequency 2 56 migrating 2 44 limitations 2 44 mirror write cache 5 23 setting 5 25 mode config mode 2 18 monitor mode 2 5 switch mode 2 6 MPIO multi path IO 2 38 MPIO device add new logical disks 5 76 MPIO device information page 5 10 MPIO driver installation 5 8 MPIO host configuring 5 2 MPIO policy settings 5 11 path policy 5 11 preferred working path 5 11 switch counter 5 12 weight mode 5 11 MPIO policy settings 5 11 MTID 5 18 Multiple ID 5 18 multiple system viewer 2 3 N NRAID defined A 13 O on line array roaming control 2 56 P partition state transition 2 53 password settings 3 8 path failover alert delay 2 67 PathGuard uninstalling 5 8 PathGuard MPIO configuration dual independent MPIO hosts 5 4 multipath clustered servers 5 6 PathGuard MPIO utility add MPIO host remote 5 15 benefits 5 1 performance profile 2 19 AV streaming 2 19 maximum IO per seco
347. t xxmin shutdown delay time System Management Configurations management Command configrestore Synopsis configrestore h Description Erase all configurations on NVRAM or hard disks and restore to factory default Parameters h erase configurations on all hard disks instead of NVRAM Command configerase Synopsis configerase hddx hday Description Erase controller s configurations stored on hard disks Command configtohdd Synopsis configtohdd hddx Description Save NVRAM configurations to a hard disk Command configfromhdd Synopsis configfromhdd hddx Description Restore NVRAM configurations from hard disks Command configget Synopsis configget config bin Description Get main configurations stored on NVRAM and save to a file config bin Command configset Synopsis configset config bin Description Store a file config bin as the controller s main configurations on NVRAM 4 34 Using the CL Commands the CLI Commands Command configtext Synopsis configtext config html Description Get the main configurations and save to a html file Command configtextmail Synopsis configtextmail account Description Get the main configurations and save to a text file which is then sent to the specified mail receiver Command confighdd
348. ta to be placed on a member disk The stripe size must be larger than or equal to the cache unit size Free Chunk Each free chunk has a unique identifier in a disk group which is determined automatically by the controller when a free chunk is created Select a free chunk from the drop down menu for logical disk creation Initialization Noinit No initialization process and the logical disk Option can be accessed immediately after it is created Regular The controller initializes the logical disk by writing zeros to all sectors on all member disks of the logical disk This ensures that all data in the logical disks are scanned and erased Background The controller starts a background task to initialize the logical disk by synchronizing the data stored on the member disks of the logical disk This option is only available for logical disks with parity based and mirroring based RAID levels Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI Alignment Set the alignment offset for the logical disk starting Offset sector sector to enhance the controller s performance For Windows OS it is suggested to set the alignment offset at sector 63 NOTE Make sure the disk group to be created for a new logical disk is in OPTIMAL or LD_INIT state otherwise the new logical disk will not be created e Delete logical disks Select the logical disk s you want to delete and click Delete To delete alll LUNs of dgxldy check the
349. take longer time to complete the reconfiguration because large part of the data needs to be regenerated The degradation period will be also longer which means bad performance and higher probability of RAID crash It is highly advised that the administrator should ask for rebuild disk during reconfiguration when online RAID reconfiguration is needed B 6 Effective Capacity Management The spending on storage resources is rising faster than overall IT expenses but there are still out of capacity emergencies The space of some LUNs might be used up while there are other LUNs with idle space The RAID controller firmware allows the administrator to online resize the LUN capacity and easily manage the free space Therefore neither sophisticated resource planning nor tedious process to do data copy and LUN re initialization is required The storage resources can thus be effectively and flexibly utilized during all the life time e Support expansion chassis attachment The controller is equipped with an expansion port for attaching expansion chassis This helps to build a huge capacity storage solution at lower cost than to purchase multiple RAID systems The expansion port also offers a future proof solution for capacity expansion that helps users to add more disk drives to a RAID system without adding switches or host bus adapters e Online logical disk capacity expansion and shrink The capacity of a logical disk can be online expanded if there
350. tart on the specified date and time every month 3 Click Apply The task will start according to the specified time NOTE The hard disk must not be a member disk of a disk group The disk group and logical disk s for scrubbing must be in the optimal state The scrubbing task will be aborted if the disk group enters degraded mode starts rebuilding disk or starts disk cloning If the disk group of the source disk contains faulty disks scrubbing is aborted until the disk group completely rebuilds its disks To cancel disk scrubbing do the following 2 49 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI 1 Select the task s and click Stop to abort the disk scrubbing A confirmation prompt displays Click Confirm to cancel the scrubbing task 2 7 10 Regenerating the parity This feature is less complicated than scrubbing This command regenerates the parity of a logical disk or all logical disks on disk groups without parity checking Follow the steps below to create a regenerating parity task 1 Select Maintenance Utilities gt Regenerate Parity from the main menu 2 Click Reg parity and specify the following options for a parity regeneration task DG ID LD ID Select a DG ID and an LD ID or All LDs from the drop down menu for parity regeneration Schedule Immediately The task will start immediately Once The task will start on the specified date and time Weekly The task will start on the specified day
351. te This temporarily mutes the beeper but it beeps again if exceptional conditions still exist Auto Write Through Cache This option enables or disables the auto write through function for the following four types of events 1 Controller Failure 2 Battery Backup Module Failure 3 Power Supply Unit Failure 4 Fan Failure 5 UPS Failure When events are detected with a specified type both the cache on the controller and disk will be automatically set as write through After the failure or warning condition is removed the cache settings will be restored to your original configuration Path Failover Alert Delay min 5 default When a path failover occurs the controller will send out warning events to notify users after the specified delay time in minutes The range is between 0 and 60 To make the settings effective click Apply 2 10 System Management 2 10 1 Restoring to factory settings To clear the NVRAM or hard disk configurations do the following 1 Select the Erase configurations on NVRAM or the Erase configurations on HDD s option to clear all configurations made on NVRAM or hard disks 2 When the Erase configurations on HDD s option is selected specify the hard disks or a hard disk to clear the configurations on it 2 67 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI 3 Click the Apply button and the erase configuration message appears Click Confirm to restore factory default val
352. te disk groups Select the disk group s you want to delete and click Delete e Modify disk groups To modify a setting select a DG and click Modify Specify the following options for configuration Name Spare Disks Disk Cache Type a name associated for the DG ID Assign disks to be used as local spares This option enables or disables the on disk cache of hard disks in a disk group When a new disk becomes a member of the disk group for example by disk rebuilding and cloning the on disk cache uses the same settings as the disk group LD Initialization Mode The initialization mode defines how logical disks of a disk group are initialized Different disk groups can have different initialization modes Parallel The initialization tasks of logical disks are performed concurrently Sequential Only one initialization task is active at a time LD Rebuild Mode This determines how to rebuild logical disks in a disk group All logical disks can be rebuilt at the same time or one at a time Different disk groups can have different rebuild modes Parallel The rebuilding tasks are started simultaneously for all logical disks in the disk group The progress of each rebuilding task is independent from each other Sequential Rebuilding always starts from the logical disk with the smallest relative LBA on the disk group continues to the logical disk with the second smallest relative LBA and so on Priorit
353. te the registration for the VDS Provider 5 73 Advanced Functions Functions You may now start using VDS compliant manage software to manage the registered RAID systems 5 7 2 Installing the VDS Provider Follow the steps below to install the VDS Provider onto the management host 1 Copy the software file VDSProvider_SW_1 00 zip into the computer and extract this file to a folder 2 Double click the Setup exe file in the folder 3 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation NOTE The VDS Provider Configuration Utility requires that you have Java Runtime Environment JRE version 1 5 or later installed on your Windows system 5 7 3 Uninstalling the VDS Provider Follow the steps below to uninstall the VDS Provider GUI from the management host 1 Click Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs 2 Locate VDS Provider and click on it to start the Un installation Click No to quit or Yes to confirm the un installation 5 7 4 Using the VDS Provider Configuration Utility Before using VDS based management for RAID systems you are required to use the VDS Provider Configuration Utility to register the RAID systems such that the VDS Provider knows how fo link to the RAID systems by network You are also required to supply the password of the RAID systems for the VDS Provider to get proper management access rights to the RAID systems To launch the VDS Provider
354. ted to multiple host interface ports The multi path software on the host computer can access the virtual disks through any of the exported LUNs over the links Because multiple HBAs or multiple ports on single HBA on a host computer are required to access the same set of LUN mappings grouping these HBAs into a host group and using symmetric storage presentation for exporting LUNs would it ease your configuration tasks If directly attaching the host interface ports to the HBAs you can easily know the number of paths for single virtual disk by counting the physical links But if a switch is used to build a fabric you need to multiply the number of HBA ports and the number of host interface ports of the controller to derive the number of paths For example if a host has three HBA ports connecting to a switch which links to a RAID system with four host interface ports there will be twelve paths for the host to the RAID system For regular operating systems a path is perceived as a physical disk and accessing a LUN through different paths simultaneously without multi path software could cause data corruption It is the multi path software to scan all detected physical disks paths and map the physical disks to single logical disk MPIO disk if these physical disks present consistent information to indicate that they belong to the same virtual disk The applications then can access the LUN via the MPIO disk After completing the physical c
355. th conf and if it is not there you need to build it see the example under usr share doc packages multipath tools multipath conf synthetic 2 To install multipathd into your Linux service scripts type insserv etc init d multipathd 3 To activate multipathd service on your Linux service scripts type chkconfig a multipathd and the screen shows the Linux run levels at which mulitpathd will be turned on or off linux go62 chkconfig a multipathd multipathd O off off 2 0ff Stam 4 off Stom G off After completing the steps above your Linux will launch multipathd automatically during the system boot up But at this moment multipathd is still not started For Red Hat in here that is different olease type chkconfig multipathd on 4 To manually start multipathd service type service multipathd start The screen shows linux go62 service multipathd start Starting multipathd done e Uninstall and stop the multipathd service Single Controller System 1 To immediately stop the service type service multipathd stop But note that you have to un mount the file system over the multi path devices before doing so to avoid data loss 2 To deactivate multipathd service on you system type chkconfig multipathd off This will stop the auto start of the multipathd during the boot time 3 To completely remove the multipathd service on you system type insserv r etc init d multipathd e Install and start the multipa
356. th high performance Characteristics Storage capacity number of disks 2 x capacity of the smallest disk A minimum of four disks are required Same fault tolerance as RAID 1 I O rates are high thanks to striping RAID 1 segments Can handle multiple simultaneous disk failures Recommended use e High performance database servers Figure A 6 RAID 10 disk array A 8 Apendi A 8 RAID 30 RAID 30 arrays are formed by striping data across RAID 3 sub arrays This offers better performance than RAID 3 alone but does not have the speed of a pure RAID 0 array Storage efficiency and fault tolerance vary depending on the number and size of sub arrays compared to the array as a whole RAID 30 resembles RAID 50 in terms of characteristics but is more suitable for handling large files RAID 30 Byte striping with parity combined with block striping Characteristics e Storage capacity number of disks in each subarray 1 x number of subarrays x capacity of the smallest disk A minimum of six disks are required e Good fault tolerance in general e Increased capacity and performance compared to RAID 3 Recommended use e Multimedia e File servers e Large databases Logical Volume Striping RAID 3 RAID 3 Figure A 7 RAID 30 disk array A 9 Appendix A 9 RAID 50 RAID 50 arrays are formed by striping data across RAID 5 sub arrays Striping helps increase capacity and performance wi
357. thd service Redundant Controller System For redundant controller systems the Linux multi path requires proprietary driver to recognize the controller preference to deliver optimal performance The driver depends on the kernel version of your Linux and below list the pre built driver binaries RHEL5 32bit mpath xxx x i386 rhel5 rom 5 13 Advanced Functions Functions RHEL5 64bit mpath xxx x x86_64 rhel5 rom RHEL5 Xen 64bit mpath xxx x x86_64xen rhel5 rom SuSe 10 32bit mpath xxx x i586 sles 10 rom SuSe 10 64bit mpath xxx x x86_64 sles10 rom If your Linux kernel cannot match the pre built driver binaries you may also build the binary on your own Below are the source RPM packages 4 RHELS mpath xxx x src rhel5 rom SuSe10 mpath xxx x src sles10 rom Install The RPM by typing rpm ivh mpath xxx Xx xxx xxxx rpm This not only installs the driver but also starts the multipathd service like the procedures described for the single controller system To build a driver binary follow the steps below 2 1 Type rpm ivh mpath xxx x sre xxxx rpm to install the source code package 2 2 Change working directory to usr src packages SPECS and type rpmbuild bb mpath spec 2 3 Change working directory to usr src redhat packages RPMS your ARCH and Type rpm ivh mpath xxx x rpm Edit etc multipath conf to specify the vendor names product names priority callout function and hardware handler An exam
358. the RAID GUI Specify the read ahead expire control in 1 100 seconds The range is from 10 to 1000 Write Cache Periodic Flush second 5 default Specify the period in seconds to periodically flush the write cache If O is specified periodic cache flushing is disabled The range is from 0 to 999 Write Cache Flush Ratio 45 default Specify the dirty write buffer watermark When the specified percentage is reached the system will start to flush the write buffers immediately The range is from 1 to 100 Mirrored Write Cache Control On default Off This option is only available on the redundant controller system If this option is enabled all written data from hosts will be mirrored to the peer controller NOTE Mirrored Write Cache will improve the write performance but it will cause data loss when a controller fails Do not disable it if you need dual active active controller configuration 2 7 16 Miscellaneous Auto Spare Control On default Off If this option is enabled and there is no global spare disk unused hard disks are used for rebuilding If there are multiple unused disks the disk with the lowest hard disk identifier will be used Spare Restore Control On Off default If this option is enabled the controller will restore the data from the spare disk to a new replacement disk when inserted This allows the user to keep the same member disks as original Au
359. thout adding disks to each RAID 5 array which will decrease data availability and affect performance when running in a degraded mode Storage efficiency and fault tolerance vary depending on the number and size of the sub arrays compared to the array as a whole As mentioned above RAID 50 is similar to RAID 30 in terms of characteristics but is more suitable for use with smaller files RAID 50 Block striping with distributed parity combined with block striping Characteristics e Storage capacity number of disks in each subarray 1 x number of subarrays x capacity of the smallest disk A minimum of six disks are required More fault tolerant than RAID 5 High data transfer rate RAID 0 striping ensures high I O rates Recommended use e Applications requiring random positioning performance e Large databases Logical Volume Striping Figure A 8 RAID 50 disk array A 10 Apendi A 10 RAID 60 RAID 60 arrays are formed by striping data across RAID 6 sub arrays Striping increases the system capacity and performance without adding disks to the array It features dual parity which allows for a possible failure of two disks in each array RAID 60 Striping with dual parity Characteristics e Storage capacity number of disks in each subarray 1 x number of subarrays x capacity of the smallest disk e A minimum of eight disks are required e More fault tolerant than RAID 5 e D
360. tible firmware update to make the redundant controller system always remains online For example once the firmware update is executed on controller A all the LUN mappings will be shifted from controller B to controller A Then the controller B restarts automatically When the controller B is completed with the firmware update all the LUN mappings will be shifted from controller A to controller B The controller A then restarts automatically s Degraded State Update When the system is operating in a degraded state users simply perform the firmware update on a single controller However when the failed controller is replaced the system will automatically synchronize the firmware to the replacement controller 5 24 Aulvanced Functions Functions 5 3 3 Redundant Controller System Configuration with MPIO e Active Active Redundant Single MPIO Host Dual Channel As Figure 5 6 shows the redundant RAID system is operating in a single MPIO host environment using the symmetric storage provisioning method The access channel is established via two fibre ports fcoaland fcpb The redundant paths of two LUNs are also established by mapping them across two fibre ports Host Group 0 N lt Host N FCPa2 FCPal FCPb2 FCPb Y Controller A Controller B 7 x 7 x DGOLDO DG1LDO E Figure 5 6 Redundant Single MPIO host dual channel To set up th
361. tion Security control sse eee 4 36 4 9 4 System information sese eee eee eee eee 4 37 4 95 Miscellaneous sciita a eee ee 4 37 4 10 Miscellaneous Utilities s c2cc2csenacasicestesszesecasecesecereceececdacarentsextusuceseresveeseteeus 4 39 4 10 1 Lookup RAID systems sese eee eee 4 39 4 10 2 Turn on off CLI script mode sese eee 4 39 4 10 3 Get command list and usage 2 ied eee ead ed 4 39 4 11 Configuration SMOMCUNS oorsien aiaa ee a eee et 4 39 4 11 1 RAID QUICK SOUND s i siissii esc nock nc area ce iniaeeai aa an aaia iea D 4 39 4 11 2 Performance profile sese 4 40 PVZ SMAI SMOU ay Ges a tea TT 4 40 Chapter 5 Advanced Functions 5 1 Multi Path I0 Solutions score sese eerste vee ede eo et al ete eld oa 5 1 Dla Heu T 5 1 5 12 Beneits T 5 1 5 1 3 Configuring MPIO Hosts and RAID Controller eee eee eee 5 2 5 1 4 Windows Multi Path Solution PathGuard ccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 7 5 1 5 Linux Multi Path Solution esse sese 5 12 5 1 6 MAC Multi Path Solution esse 5 16 5 1 7 VMware ESX Server Multi Path Solution sese eee 5 16 5 1 8 Sun Solaris 10 OS Multi Path Solution sss eee eee eee eee eee 5 17 5 2 Multiple ID Sol t ONS ecrire ieceres iiss tas eerie 5 18 Die eul 5 18 5 3 Red undant Controller j ee a eS ROOTS EE 5 21 Re a Nau aT 5 21 5 3 2 Controller Data Synchronization eee eee 5 23 5 3 3 Redundant Controller System Configuration with MPIO sss sees e 5 25 5 3 4 Controller and Path Failover Failback Scenarios see eee
362. tion and streamline the data flow Disk IO scheduler is deployed to reduce the number of disk access and minimize the seek time among disk access Elaborated RAID algorithms are performed to minimize the number of parity update and shorten the response time The administrator is allowed to control these optimizations and tune the corresponding parameters e One click performance optimization To free the administrators from understanding those sophisticated performance parameters and tedious performance tuning the firmware provides predefined performance profiles for optimizing the storage system according to different workload Simply by one click on the GUI a storage system optimized for time critical transaction oriented or high throughput applications can be built O Apendi B 8 Proactive Data Protection The most fundamental requirement for a storage system is to protect the data from all kinds of failures The RAID controller firmware supports versatile RAID configurations for different levels of reliability requirement including RAID 6 to tolerate double drive failure and Triple Parity for extreme data availability It provides online utilities for proactive data protection to monitor disk health minimize the risk of data loss and avoid RAID degradation RAID configurations can be recovered and imported even the RAID is corrupted e Online disk scrubbing Bad sectors of a hard disk can be detected only when they are accessed
363. tions to a disk group are applied to all hard disks in the disk group Logical disk A logical disk LD is formed by partitioning the space of a disk group Logical disks always use contiguous space and the space of a logical disk is evenly distributed across all member disks of the disk group A logical disk can be exported to hosts as a LUN or to form volumes Local spare and global spare disk A spare disk is a hard disk that will automatically replace a failed disk and rebuild data of the failed disk A local spare disk is dedicated to single disk group and a global spare disk is used for all disk groups When a disk in a disk group fails the controller will try to use local spare disks first and then global spare disks if no local spare is available Volume A volume is formed by combining multiple logical disks using striping RAIDO and concatenation NRAID algorithms Multiple logical disks form single volume unit using striping and multiple volume units are aggregated to form a volume using concatenation A volume can be exported to hosts as a LUN Logical unit A logical unit LUN is a logical entity within a SCSI target that receives and executes I O commands from SCSI initiators hosts SCSI I O commands are sent to a target device and executed by a LUN within the target Virtual disk A virtual disk is an storage entity that can service I O access from LUNs or from other virtual disks It could be JBOD disk logic
364. to Array Roaming Control On Off default On Enable imported foreign hard disks when the controller is started Foreign hard disk configurations are also restored Off Disable imported foreign hard disks when the controller is started NOTE Hard disks with configurations that conflict with controller configurations are not imported and enter conflict state Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI On line Array Roaming Control On Off default On The controller will try to keep the disk in the foreign state if hard disk contains valid meta data However if the disk fails to import successfully it will enter the conflict state Off All on line installed disks are perceived as new disks and enter Unused state Meta data on the disk is cleared and reset Write Log Control On default Off The consistency of parity and data might not be retained because of improper shutdown of the controller This option enables or disables write logging for parity consistency recovery NOTE 1 Enabling write logging will cause slight performance degradation 2 Write logging is only effective to logical disks with parity based RAID levels 3 To guarantee the consistency of data and parity by write logging the on disk cache must be turned off Meta data Update Frequency Low default Medium High This option specifies the frequency to update the progress of background tasks except reconfiguration tasks
365. ty ue Table 2 3 Hard disks tray color 2 2 2 Information icons When components are working normally their icons are shown in green When components are uninstall not norms or failed the icons are shown in red Click on each icon for detailed information Icon Name Detailed Information Event log view e Seq No e Severity e Type s Time e Description Beeper See 6 2 Beeper on page 6 1 for the possible beeper reasons Temperature Sensor e Current s Non critical s Critical ele Voltage e Sensor D e Current e High Limit e Low Limit Table 2 4 Information icons 2 7 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI 2 8 2 Fan module This icon will be shown when the fan is installed on the controller s Controller Fan 9 BBM This icon will be shown when the BBM control is on e State e Remaining Capacity e Voltage V e Temperature C F e Non critical Temperature C F e Critical Temperature C F UPS This icon will be shown when the UPS control is on UPS Status e State e Load Percentage e Temperature C F e AC Input Quality High Voltage V Low Voltage V Battery Status e State e Voltage V e Remaining Power in percentage seconds Table 2 4 Information icons Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI 2 2 3 Rear side view e For single c
366. u may also use the host side CLI utility acs_snap exe After copying the executable file to the directory where you want to run the utility on your host system you can use the utility to create list and delete snapshot volumes for a LUN However because it communicates with the RAID controller by the in band interface your primary volumes have to be exported to host computers to get commands from the acs_snap exe Utility e Pausing I O at Hosts and Applications Before creating a snapshot all write data on the LUN of the primary volume have to be committed to the RAID storage and no data structure is in the inconsistent state Otherwise the RAID controller would capture a corrupted data image that prohibits your operating systems or applications from using it For example if a money transfer transaction completes only reducing the source and leaves the destination intact the snapshot taken at this moment cannot get a balanced total sum of the money in the database However there are also operating systems or applications that can successfully recover from the database with partially done transactions by journaling algorithms In contrary to stopping the applications manually you may use the utility offered by your applications to force the applications to enter quiescent state in which there is no ongoing transaction and alll completed transactions have been made effective permanently In some systems you may try to un mount the
367. ual parity allows two disk failures in each array e Increased capacity and performance thanks to striping Recommended use e Data archiving backing up e High availability applications e Large capacity servers Logical Volume Striping Figure A 9 RAID 60 disk array Appendix A 11 JBOD JBOD Just a Bunch of Disks focuses on individual drives The operating system sees each drive as an individual drive in JBOD mode Therefore the total capacity of JBOD is the sum of the capacities of each disk This allows the user to add disks until the desired total capacity is reached However there is no RAID protection in this mode JBOD Spanned disk array without fault tolerance Characteristics e Large capacity s No fault tolerance Recommended use e Data backing up e Large capacity servers Disk 1 Disk 2 Disk N tt T Host TIGE t LA AL RAID controller Logical Volumes Physical Drive 7 Drive 2 Drive 1 Figure A 10 JBOD disk array unang A 12 NRAID NRAID None RAID combines all drives as one simple logical volume The capacity of this volume is the total capacity of the physical member disks NRAID does not have data redundancy Logical Volume 4 Logical Volume HBA SCSI or FC t 4 HOST 3 Drive N Physical Drive S Drive 2 Drive 1 Figure A 11 NRAID Appendix Appendix B Features and Benefits B 1 Overview With the comp
368. ues NOTE 1 The Erase configurations on HDD s option will be available only when hard disks are in foreign conflict or unknown state 2 After the erase command is applied to NVRAM the controller will restart immediately 2 10 2 NVRAM configuration The controller s configurations are stored in either NVRAM or hard disk s depending on configuration types The following options allows you to manage the configuration data Save the NVRAM configuration to HDD s Specify this option to save the NVRAM configuration data to a hard disk or all hard disks Warning The controller will restart immediately when a user restores user configurations Save the NVRAM configurations to HDD s T Apply to all HDDs hdd3 L hdd4 hdd5 xl Read the NVRAM configurations from HDDs and save to the NVRAM Get main configurations Upload a configuration file and store it as the controller s main configurations Figure 2 26 Options in the Configurations screen 1 System Management menu 2 68 Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI Read the NVRAM configuration on hard disks and save to NVRAM Specify this option to read the NVRAM configuration data on the specified hard disk and save to NVRAM Warning The controller will restart immediately when a user restores user configurations Save the NVRAM configurations to HDD s Read the NVRAM configurations from HDDs and save to the NVRAM hdd3 Get main configurations
369. um of 128 volume pairs can be created Specify the following options for the configuration COW VOL ID From the drop down menu specify an LD as the spare COW volume e Delete snapshot volume pairs Select the soare COW volume you want to delete and click Remove e Create snapshot volumes Click Create to add a new snapshot volume where up to 4 snapshot volumes can be created per primary volume snapshot volumes The total maximum number of snapshot volumes that can be created is 64 Specify the following options for the configuration SVOL ID Select a snapshot volume ID from the drop down menu PV ID Select a primary volume ID from the drop down menu 2 35 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI Name Use the system default name as svolx x is the VOL identifier OR Uncheck the Use system default name box and enter the name in the Name field The maximum name length is 63 bytes e Delete snapshot volumes Select the snapshot volume s you want to delete and click Delete To delete all LUNs of svolx check the Force to delete LUN mapping s box All access to the snapshot volume will be stopped e Modify snapshot volumes To modify a setting select a snapshot volume and click Modify You can type a name for the specified snapshot volume e Restore to snapshot volumes To restore the primary volume to a snapshot volume in a volume pair Select a snapshot volume and click Restore e
370. ume e Snapshot Roaming The snapshot configurations are stored in the disks of the secondary volume If Auto Array Roaming Control option is enabled please see 2 7 16 Miscellaneous on page 2 55 foreign hard disks with snapshot configurations can be automatically restored during the controller boo up However if Auto Array Roaming Control option is turned off or auto array roaming does not work due to configuration conflict configurations of disk groups and logical disks have to be restored first by importing the foreign hard disks and then you may proceed to manually import the snapshots by GUI or CLI please see 2 7 12 Array roaming on page 2 51 After the snapshots are imported either automatically or manually you need to set their LUN mappings 5S NOTE Abnormal shutdown of the RAID system could cause data loss of the snapshot volume if the lookup table on the secondary volume is not updated 5 4 4 Snapshot Utility and Scripting e Using Snapshot Host side Utility on Windows In addition to managing snapshot volumes you may also use the snapshot utility acs_snap win32 Vx xx exe fo do cache flush Its complete usage syntax is described as below Usage acs_snap create lt device gt lt snapshot_name gt delete lt device gt lt snapshot_name gt flush lt device gt list lt device gt Examples 5 45 Advanced Functions Functions 1 Create a snapshot acs_snap win32 Vx xx exe create F f_snapl
371. uration e Support hot spare with global spare and local spare e Support auto spare and spare restore options e Support auto online disk rebuilding and configurable rebuild modes e Multiple disk rebuilding modes parallel sequential and prioritized e Support up to 8 disk groups and 32 logical disks per disk group 1 2 introduction e Support up to 24 disks in one chassis and totally 64 drives with expansion units e Volume management e Support striping volume for performance enhancement e Support concatenating volume for large capacity LUN e Support concatenated striping volume e Online volume capacity expansion e Online volume capacity shrink e Support up to 32 volumes and 8 logical disks per volume e Augmented RAID Features e Flexible free chunk management e Multiple RAID initializations none regular write zero and background e Support disk group write zero initialization e Support user configurable disk group capacity truncation s Support alignment offset e Support intelligent computation for RAID data and parity e Support fast read I O response e Support NVRAM based write log and auto parity consistency recovery e Support online bad block recovery and reallocation e Support battery backup module BBM for data retention during no power e Caching and Performance Optimizations e Selective cache unit sizes KB 4 8 16 32 64 and 128 s Independently selectable caching policies for each LUN e Selective pre read
372. us of the primary RAID vice G metadata on this disk Event ID 0x08 16 Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message Write both metadata on HDDx failed The controller failed to access both primary and secondary RAID Description metadata on hddx and the RAID metadata was invalid In this p case hddx will be set to faulty and disk rebuilding will be started if needed Advice None Event ID 0x0821 Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message Read primary metadata on HDDx failed The controller failed to access the primary RAID metadata stored Description on hddx and the metadata was non trustable However the secondary RAID metadata still works Advice Start to monitor more carefully the status of the secondary RAID metadata on this disk D 34 Appendix D 35 Event ID Ox0822 Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID Message Read both metadata on HDDx failed The controller failed to access both primary and secondary RAID Description metadata on hddx and the RAID metadata was non trustable p In this case hddx will be set to faulty and disk rebuilding will be started if needed Advice Start to monitor more carefully the status of the primary RAID metadata on this disk Event ID 0x0823 Type DISK Severity WARNING Parameters Disk ID M
373. using a 40GB 50GB and a 60GB drive in a RAID 0 array your system will effectively have a single 120GB drive 40GB x 3 RAID 0 Striped disk array without fault tolerance Characteristics Storage capacity number of disks x capacity of the smallest disk A minimum of two disks are required Fault tolerance No RAID 0 implements a striped disk array the data is broken down into blocks and each block is written to a separate disk drive lO performance is greatly improved by spreading the I O load across many channels and drives e No parity calculation is required freeing up system resources e Fastest and most efficient array type but offers no fault tolerance Recommended use Video production and editing Image editing Pre press applications Any application requiring high bandwidth The following diagram illustrates writing data to a RAID 0 array composed of four HDDs connected to the controller Data blocks are distributed across all disks in the array Figure A 1 RAID 0 disk array A 3 Appendix A 3 RAID 1 RAID 1 is commonly referred to as disk mirroring as all data is duplicated on two or more disks This provides a high access rate and very high data availability RAID 1 has low performance for write operations but very high performance for intensive read operations RAID 1 Mirroring Characteristics Storage capacity the capacity of the smallest disk A minimum of two
374. ut band CLI Utilities Out band CLI communicates with a RAID system by the interface that is different from the I O interfaces The RAID system is bundled with the out band CLI utilities using TCP IP through the Ethernet port of the RAID controller You can use CLI on one computer to access RAID systems as long as host computer can reach the RAID systems by the network The host side CLI utilities for out band interface are offered for Windows and Linux NOTE The out band CLI utility use TCP port 7779 to connect to the RAID system Please make sure no firewall blocks the traffic on this port e Out band CLI for Windows To install out band CLI tool on Windows copy the scli outband win32 Vx xx exe file to the directory where you want to run the program and you may start using the CLI utility Installation To install out band CLI tool on Windows copy the scli outband win32 Vx xx exe and isdk outband Vx xx lib file to the directory where you want to run the program and you may start using the CLI utility Usage scli outband win32 Vx xx exe t lt controller_ip gt u lt username gt p lt password gt c command Parameters t lt controller_ip gt the IP address of the RAID controller to be accessed u lt username gt p lt password gt user name and password c command the CLI command to be executed Example List the status of all hard disks of the RAID system at 168 95 0 1 scli outband win32 Vx xx t 168 95 0 1
375. utions to prevent RAID degradation e Transaction log and auto parity recovery The capability to rebuild data of parity based data protection relies on the consistency of parity and data However the consistency might not be retained because of improper system shutdown when there are uncompleted write commands To maintain the consistency the controller keeps logs of write commands in the NVRAM and when the controller is restarted the parity affected by the uncompleted writes will be automatically recovered e Battery backup protection The controller delays the writes to disk drives and caches the data in the memory for performance optimization but this also causes risk because the data in the cache will be gone forever if the system is not properly powered off The battery backup module retains the data in the cache memory during abnormal power loss and when the system is restarted the data in the cache memory will be flushed to the disk drives As the size of cache memory installed grows increasingly the data loss could lead to unrecoverable disasters for applications B 9 Fortified Reliability and Robustness The mission of a RAID controller is not only to protect user data from disk drive failure but also any hazards that might cause data loss or system downtime Both hardware and firmware of RAID controller has incorporated advanced mechanisms to fortify the data reliability and to ensure the system robustness These designs are
376. ve the causes of events that trig Advice ger auto shutdown Restart the controller Disable auto shutdown first before starting investigating the causes Event ID Ox2419 Type SYSTEM Severity FATAL Parameters Message NVRAM event log checksum error The checksum stored on NVRAM for event log cannot match the contents on NVRAM This could happen if the controller was not Description properly shutdown Because the event log on NVRAM might be corrupt and cannot be trusted all event logs will be erased auto matically Advice If this event continuously happens contact local sales or support office Firmware update Event ID Ox2407 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Controller ID Message System firmware in controller x updated Description System firmware in controller x was updated successfully Advice Restart the controller so that the new firmware can be effective D 64 Appendix Event ID 0x2408 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Controller ID Message Controller x failed to update system firmware Description The controller x cannot update the system firmware Advice Check the firmware file is not corrupt and has the correct version Event ID Ox2429 Type SYSTEM Severity INFO Parameters Controller ID Message Boot code in controller x updated Description Boot code in
377. volume at designated points in time Unlike traditional data copy which takes hours or even days for data replication depending on the size of the volume the snapshot function can create a copy of a volume of any size within seconds In addition creating a snapshot volume requires only partial capacity of the original volume so snapshot is indeed a convenient solution in terms of time and capacity efficiency Because the snapshot is done at the array and block level by leveraging the computing power of the RAID controller it is host independent and application independent It also causes less performance impact comparing to host based snapshot software solutions You are also allowed to restore data of a LUN using snapshot restore function As the data image can be rolled back to a snapshot immediately you may resume your applications without waiting time Below are a few examples of using the snapshot function Disk based Full image Backup and Restore With snapshots of a volume at different points in time you can retrieve files of old revisions or restore deleted files simply by mounting the LUN of the snapshot volumes Contrary to tape based backup backup and data restoration is simpler and faster Reducing Data freezing Time for Backup or Replication When doing backup or data replication the data of a volume has to be frozen to maintain the data consistency by pausing the I O access of the applications With the snapshot functio
378. volumes eee eee 5 40 SAN Environment 9579292222402202 2 Aa RZ OSHEE aA 5 46 Defragment a disk group to expand the last free chunk 5 51 Defragment a disk group to consolidate free chunks 5 51 Logical disk capacity shrink and expanding an adjacent free chunk 5 52 Logical disk capacity shrink and creating a new free chunk Logical disk capacity expansion by allocating an adjacent free chunk 5 52 Logical disk capacity expansion by moving logical disks to a free chunk 5 53 Logical disk capacity expansion by allocating an adjacent free chunk and moving logical disks Disk group expansion by adding new member disks and enlarging the last free chunk new free chunk sese eee eee ee eee 5 54 Disk group expansion to consolidate free chunks eee eee 5 54 Striping member VOIUMES 2 0 eee eee 5 55 Concatenating member volumes sese eee 5 55 Concatenated striping member volumes eee eee eee eee eee ee 5 55 ee paras Figure 5 31 Figure 5 32 Figure 5 33 Figure 5 34 Figure 5 35 Figure 5 36 Figure 5 37 Figure 5 38 Figure 5 39 Figure 5 40 Figure 5 41 Figure A 1 Figure A 2 Figure A 3 Figure A 4 Figure A 5 Figure A 6 Figure A 7 Figure A 8 Figure A 9 Figure A 10 Figure A 11 Deployment example of RAIDGuard Central components 5 60 RGC Server monitor screen see eee eee 5 63 RGC Agent monitor Screen sees 5 64 RGC GUI main screen esse eee 5 65 Adding the IP address of an agent eee eee eee 5 67
379. was powered on Command 7 S sector The accumulated transfer size of write commands since the disk was powered on The average command response time since the disk Response Time was powered on ms The maximum command response time since the disk was powered on The number of current outstanding IO in the disk Outstanding IO The number of current outstanding IO in the controller s IO scheduler queue The disk utilization in the last second Disk Utilization The disk utilization in the last five seconds NOTE When the redundant controller system is in use all the statistics information of the hard disks in both controllers Controller A and B will be displayed on the screen 2 11 2 Cache This feature allows you to enable disable or reset buffer cache IO logging When cache IO logging is enabled select the cache type volume logical disk or JBOD disk to be displayed from the drop down menu The 2 76 Usingthe RAID GUI the RAID GUI following IO statistics will be displayed You can press the Reset button to clear all statistics except dirty buffer and clean buffer to zero Category Display ID Cache identifier The number of read commands executed since the Read disk was powered on Command Se sector The accumulated transfer size of read commands since the disk was powered on f The number of write commands executed since the Write disk was powered on Comm
380. with few hard disks and expand the disk group later if more capacity is needed The initial cost from disk purchase can be minimized while future expansion is guaranteed e Online RAID level and stripe size migration For performance tuning or adjusting the reliability level the RAID level and stripe size needs to be changed To execute the online migration the B 4 Appendix controller will start a background task to perform the data re layout operations during the migration RAID operations are still available to protect data and serve requests from host computers Unlike other implementations where only specific RAID levels or stripe sizes can be migrated the RAID controller firmware can do the migration virtually from all RAID levels and stripe sizes to others as long as the disk space is sufficient e Simultaneous migration and expansion The RAID level migration stripe size migration and disk group expansion can be done simultaneously without adding extra overheads This significantly reduces the reconfiguration efforts and time when multiple reconfigurations are needed e Rebuild during RAID reconfiguration When a disk fails during the RAID reconfiguration the reconfiguration will be paused and disk rebuilding will be started immediately After the rebuilding is done the reconfiguration will be resumed Without rebuilding during reconfiguration the reconfiguration is executed on the degraded disk group and it will
381. word 2 72 check on read 2 30 cloning 2 47 automatic resume 2 48 COM port setting 2 60 concatenating striping member vol umes 1 9 concatenating volume units 1 9 2 47 controller factory setting 2 68 D disk group creating 2 25 defined 1 9 defragmenting 2 43 deleting 2 26 expanding 2 43 disk self test DST 2 50 restrictions 2 50 DiskPart utility 5 48 extend partition 5 56 shrink partition 5 56 E emergent info 3 4 enclosure polling interval 2 75 erase HDD configurations 2 68 erase NVRAM configurations 2 68 event log messages D 1 expanding logical disks 2 34 2 45 2 46 expanding volumes 2 46 extensive supportive tools B 13 F fast read response 2 30 FC port connection mode auto arbitration loop fabric 2 60 setting 2 59 forgotten password 2 11 G global spare defined 1 9 GUI refresh rate 2 75 H HDD mode defined 2 21 HDD state defined 2 21 HDD state tray color 2 7 HDD cloning 2 47 HDD code 2 6 intelligent data computation 2 30 interface features administration access control B 15 CLI commands B 14 remote management via web I 1 o nn telnet and SSH B 15 web based GUI B 14 web based GUI over PPP B 15 IO queue NCQ 2 58 J JBOD creating 2 23 creating volume pair 2 24 deleting 2 23 JBOD defined A 12 spanned disk array without fault tolerance A 12 L language 2 1 LCD console background task messages 3 4 creating a RAID array 3 6 emergent info 3 4 etherne
382. work the icons are shown in red Click on each icon for detailed information Icon Name Detailed Information Temperature e Sensor 125 e Current s Non critical e Critical Voltage Sensor p e Current e High Limit s Low Limit Fan module DP LANT 2 e BP_FAN2 e BP_FAN3 e BP_FANA e POWI e POW2 Power supply Table 2 8 Information icons in SAS monitor mode 2 3 5 SAS SATA HDD information Through the hard disk codes and tray color shown on the screen you can easily identify the status of each connected SAS SATA hard disk Click on each SAS SATA hard disk to display detailed information For more information about hard disk codes and tray colors see Table 2 2 and Table 2 3 on page 2 7 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI 2 4 Config Mode To configure any settings under Config Mode log in with admin and its password The Overview screen displays as below Genncn Taan TRT Abou Overview Quick Setup RAID Management jaintenance Utilities Hardware Configurations Event Management System Management Figure 2 18 Overview screen The RAID GUI Config Mode provides the following configuration settings Quick Setup Allows you to configure your array quickly AD Allows you to plan your arra Management y uni T Maintenance Utilities Allows you to perform maintenance tasks on your arrays Hardware Allows you to configure the settings to hard disks
383. x300c Host WWPN Type HOST Severity INFO Parameters ost Port ID Message Host x detected on host port y The controller detected host x on host port y The host can start Description access the controller over the host port Advice None e Link Event ID 0x300d Host Port ID Type HOST Severity INFO Parameters ohy ID Message Host port x phy y link up The link on the host port x phy y had been built by the controller Description successfully and data transferring can be started Advice None Event ID Ox300e Host Port ID Type HOST Severity NOTICE Parameters phy ID Message Host port x phy y link down The link on the host port x phy y had been turned down by the controller and data transferring was posed This happens when Description the host port was disconnected from host HBA or switch because of removing powering down resetting the host or switch or removing the cables If the link Unexpectedly disconnects or it happens continuously Advice during host access check the host connectivity or contact local sales or support office D 41 unang e IO exceptions handling Event ID Ox300f Host Port ID Type HOST Severity WARNING Parameters Host WWPN LUN ID Message Task abort on host port x from host y to LUN z The controller received task abort on host port x fr
384. xceptionally fast or beyond Advice a reasonable number consider to conduct diagnostics and replace with new disks Event ID 0x2055 Type TASK Severity WARNING Parameters DSK ID Sector Num Message Scrub on HDDx aborted with y bad sectors detected Description Disk scrubbing on hddx was aborted and y bad sectors were Advice Check if the disk is off line or busy O Apendi Event ID 0x2038 l DISK ID Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters aor Nim Message Scrub on HDDx completed with y bad sectors detected Description Disk scrubbing on hddx was completed and y bad sectors were If the number of bad sectors grows exceptionally fast or beyond Advice a reasonable number consider conducting diagnostics and replace with new disks Event ID Ox2065 Scrub Prog Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters E S threshold Message Scrub progress y on HDDx reach to the notify percent z Description ae progress of scrubbing disk has reached the pre define thresh Advice None e Disk scrubbing of disk groups Event ID Ox201d Type TASK Severity INFO Parameters DG ID Message Scrub on DGx started Description Disk scrubbing on dgx was started manually Advice None Event ID 0x2036 Type TASK Severity NOTICE Parameters DG ID Message Scrub on DGx started by schedule Description Scheduled disk s
385. xpansion units e Support SAS SMP and SAS STP protocols e Support external enclosure monitoring by SES e Selective external enclosure and disk polling period e Host Interface Functions model dependent s Support 4Gb s Fibre Channel host interfaces FC SAS SATA controller e Support 3Gb SAS host interfaces SAS SAS controller e Support Ultra320 SCSI host interfaces SCSI SATA controller e Support T11 SM HBA attributes statistics e Support multiple path IO MPIO solutions e Management Interfaces s Local management via RS 232 port and LCD panel s Remote management via Ethernet and TCP IP e Support network address settings by static DHCP and APIPA 1 5 Antrontuction e Support web based GUI via embedded web server HTTP e Support multiple languages and on line help on web GUI s Web based multiple RAID system viewer with auto system discovery s Embedded Command Line Interface CLI via RS232 port SSH and telnet s Host side Command Line Interface CLI via FC SAS SCSI and TCP IP e Support in band and out of band RAID management e Support SSL for protecting management sessions over Internet e Support RAIDGuard Central for remote centralized management e System Monitoring Functions e Support monitoring and control of hardware components and chassis units e Support SMART UPS monitoring and alert over RS232 port e NVRAM based event logging with severity level s Event notification via beeper email SMTP and SNMP tr
386. you to create delete and modify your logical disk settings e Create logical disks Click Create to add a new logical disk where up to a maximum of 32 logical disks can be created in each DG Specify the following options for configuration DG ID Select a DG ID from the drop down menu This is the disk group to be assigned for logical disk setting LD ID Select an LD ID from the drop down menu 2 27 Using the RAIDGUL the RAID GUI Name Use the system default name as dgxldy x is the DG identifier and y is the LD identifier OR Uncheck the Use system default name box and enter the name in the Name field The maximum name length is 63 bytes RAID Level Select a RAID level for the logical disk Different logical disks in a disk group can have different RAID levels However when NRAID is selected there must be no non NRAID logical disks in the same disk group Capacity MB Enfer an appropriate capacity for the logical disk This determines the number of sectors a logical disk can provide for data storage Preferred This option is only available when the redundant Controller controller system is in use Select the preferred controller to be in charge of managing and accessing the logical disk Stripe Size KB 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 The stripe size is only available for a logical disk with a striping based RAID level It determines the maximum length of continuous da
387. your purchase of the product This controller allows you to control your RAID system through a user friendly GUI which is accessed through your web browser This manual is designed and written for users installing and using the RAID controller The user should have a good working knowledge of RAID planning and data storage Symbols used in this manual This manual highlights important information with the following icons CAUTION This icon indicates the existence of a potential hazard that could result in personal injury damage to your equipment or loss of data if the safety instruction is not observed NOTE This icon indicates useful tips on getting the most from your RAID controller Preface o n Company Contact Accusys Inc 5F No 38 Taiyuan St Jnubei City Hsinchu County 30265 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 3 560 0288 Fax 886 3 560 0299 http www accusys com tw E mail sales accusys com tw Accusys U S A Inc 46710 Fremont Blvd Fremont CA 94538 U S A Tel 1 510 66 1 0800 Fax 1 510 661 9800 Toll free number 1 866 277 5888 htto www accusys com E mail support accusysusa com Accusys Korea Inc Baegang B D 5F Shinsa Dong 666 14 Kangnam Gu Seoul Korea Tel 82 02 6245 9052 Fax 82 02 3443 9050 htto www accusys co kr E mail sales accusys co kr Accusys China Beijing Inc No 1701 BIK B Horizon International Tower No 6 Zhichun Street Haidian District Beijin
388. ze of a LUN The table below shows the capacity correlated with sector size Table 6 1 The capacity correlated with sector size Sector size 512B 1KB 2KB AKB LUN Size 0 2 TB 2 A4TB 4 8T1B 8 16 TB The latest partition table GPT GUID Partition Table and modern operating systems like Windows XP 64 bit Windows 2003 server SP1 Windows 2008 server Windows Vista and Linux 2 6 x kernel support 64 bit logical block addressing without the 2TB limitation Using 512B as the sector size default is fine 2 Failed hard disk interrupts the background maintenance tasks To avoid unwanted overloading and risk the reconfiguration task of a disk group is paused and the disk scrubbing is aborted when a hard disk of the disk group goes offline If there is a spare disk or the failed hard disk is replaced the reconfiguration can be resumed after the disk data rebuilding is done For disk scrubbing you ll need to restart it manually 3 Failed hard disk interrupts the background maintenance tasks To avoid unwanted overloading and risk the reconfiguration task of a disk group is paused and the disk scrubbing is aborted when a hard disk of the disk group goes offline If there is a spare disk or the failed hard disk is replaced the reconfiguration can be resumed after the disk data rebuilding is done For disk scrubbing you ll need to restart it manually 4 Hard disk shows Unknown state The configurations o

NOtE - Accusys

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents